Read The Fucking Manual - Fortune modHEADmaster

1 files changed, 10246 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/fortune-rtfm b/fortune-rtfm
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a218f0a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/fortune-rtfm
@@ -0,0 +1,10246 @@
+if - "use" a Perl module if a condition holds (also can "no" a module)
+The "if" module is used to conditionally load or unload another module.  The construct
+will load MODULE only if CONDITION evaluates to true.  The above statement has no effect unless
+"CONDITION" is true.  If the CONDITION does evaluate to true, then the above line has the same effect as:
+The use of "=>" above provides necessary quoting of "MODULE".  If you don't use the fat comma (eg you
+%
+select — synchronous I/O multiplexing
+#include <sys/select.h>
+int select(int nfds, fd_set *restrict readfds,
+fd_set *restrict writefds, fd_set *restrict errorfds,
+struct timeval *restrict timeout);
+Refer to pselect().
+%
+time - time a simple command or give resource usage
+time [options] command [arguments...]
+The  time  command  runs  the specified program command with the given arguments.  When command finishes,
+time writes a message to standard error giving timing statistics about this program run.   These  statis‐
+tics consist of (i) the elapsed real time between invocation and termination, (ii) the user CPU time (the
+pathname (something like /usr/bin/time).
+%
+alias — define or display aliases
+alias [alias-name[=string]...]
+The  alias utility shall create or redefine alias definitions or write the values of existing alias defi‐
+nitions to standard output. An alias definition provides a string value that shall replace a command name
+An  alias  definition shall affect the current shell execution environment and the execution environments
+%
+bg — run jobs in the background
+bg [job_id...]
+If  job  control  is  enabled (see the description of set −m), the bg utility shall resume suspended jobs
+ground  jobs.  If  the  job specified by job_id is already a running background job, the bg utility shall
+have no effect and shall exit successfully.
+Using bg to place a job into the background shall cause its process ID to become ``known in  the  current
+%
+bind — bind a name to a socket
+#include <sys/socket.h>
+int bind(int socket, const struct sockaddr *address,
+socklen_t address_len);
+The  bind()  function  shall  assign  a local socket address address to a socket identified by descriptor
+socket that has no local socket address assigned. Sockets created with the  socket()  function  are  ini‐
+tially unnamed; they are identified only by their address family.
+%
+break — exit from for, while, or until loop
+break [n]
+The  break  utility shall exit from the smallest enclosing for, while, or until loop, if any; or from the
+nth enclosing loop if n is specified. The value of n is an unsigned decimal integer greater than or equal
+outermost enclosing loop shall be exited. Execution shall continue with the command immediately following
+the loop.
+%
+cd — change the working directory
+cd [−L|−P] [directory]
+cd −
+The cd utility shall change the working directory of the current shell execution environment (see Section
+the  symbol  curpath  represents  an intermediate value used to simplify the description of the algorithm
+used by cd.  There is no requirement that curpath be made visible to the application.)
+%
+command — execute a simple command
+command [−p] command_name [argument...]
+command [−p][−v|−V] command_name
+The  command  utility  shall  cause the shell to treat the arguments as a simple command, suppressing the
+If the command_name is the same as the name of one of the special built-in utilities, the special proper‐
+%
+continue — continue for, while, or until loop
+continue [n]
+The  continue  utility shall return to the top of the smallest enclosing for, while, or until loop, or to
+while  or until loop or performing the next assignment of a for loop, and re-executing the loop if appro‐
+priate.
+%
+echo - display a line of text
+echo [SHORT-OPTION]... [STRING]...
+echo LONG-OPTION
+Echo the STRING(s) to standard output.
+-n     do not output the trailing newline
+-e     enable interpretation of backslash escapes
+-E     disable interpretation of backslash escapes (default)
+--help display this help and exit
+%
+eval — construct command by concatenating arguments
+eval [argument...]
+The  eval  utility  shall construct a command by concatenating arguments together, separating each with a
+<space> character.  The constructed command shall be read and executed by the shell.
+None.
+%
+exec — execute commands and open, close, or copy file descriptors
+exec [command [argument...]]
+The exec utility shall open, close, and/or copy file descriptors as specified by any redirections as part
+of the command.
+are  opened  with  associated  redirection  statements,  it is unspecified whether those file descriptors
+remain open when the shell invokes another utility.  Scripts concerned that  child  shells  could  misuse
+%
+exit — cause the shell to exit
+exit [n]
+The  exit  utility  shall  cause the shell to exit with the exit status specified by the unsigned decimal
+undefined.
+A  trap on EXIT shall be executed before the shell terminates, except when the exit utility is invoked in
+%
+export — set the export attribute for variables
+export name[=word]...
+export −p
+The  shell  shall  give the export attribute to the variables corresponding to the specified names, which
+shall cause them to be in the environment of subsequently executed commands. If the name of a variable is
+followed by =word, then the value of that variable shall be set to word.
+%
+false - do nothing, unsuccessfully
+false [ignored command line arguments]
+false OPTION
+Exit with a status code indicating failure.
+--help display this help and exit
+--version
+output version information and exit
+Please refer to your shell's documentation for details about the options it supports.
+%
+fc — process the command history list
+fc [−r] [−e editor] [first [last]]
+fc −l [−nr] [first [last]]
+fc −s [old=new] [first]
+The  fc  utility  shall list, or shall edit and re-execute, commands previously entered to an interactive
+sh.
+%
+fg — run jobs in the foreground
+fg [job_id]
+If  job  control  is  enabled (see the description of set −m), the fg utility shall move a background job
+Using fg to place a job into the foreground shall remove its process ID from the list of those ``known in
+%
+getopts — parse utility options
+getopts optstring name [arg...]
+The  getopts utility shall retrieve options and option-arguments from a list of parameters. It shall sup‐
+Each  time it is invoked, the getopts utility shall place the value of the next option in the shell vari‐
+able specified by the name operand and the index of the next argument to be processed in the shell  vari‐
+%
+hash — remember or report utility locations
+hash [utility...]
+hash −r
+The  hash utility shall affect the way the current shell environment remembers the locations of utilities
+fied,  it  shall add utility locations to its list of remembered locations or it shall purge the contents
+of the list. When no arguments are specified, it shall report on the contents of the list.
+%
+history - GNU History Library
+Many  programs  read input from the user a line at a time.  The GNU History library is able to keep track
+of those lines, associate arbitrary data with each line, and utilize information from previous  lines  in
+composing new ones.
+HISTORY EXPANSION
+The  history  library  supports a history expansion feature that is identical to the history expansion in
+History expansions introduce words from the history list into the input stream, making it easy to  repeat
+commands, insert the arguments to a previous command into the current input line, or fix errors in previ‐
+ous commands quickly.
+%
+jobs — display status of jobs in the current session
+jobs [−l|−p] [job_id...]
+The jobs utility shall display the status of jobs that were started in the current shell environment; see
+When jobs reports the termination status of a job, the shell shall remove its process ID from the list of
+%
+kill - terminate a process
+kill [-signal|-s signal|-p] [-q value] [-a] [--] pid|name...
+kill -l [number] | -L
+The  command  kill sends the specified signal to the specified processes or process groups.  If no signal
+caught.
+Most modern shells have a builtin kill function, with a usage rather  similar  to  that  of  the  command
+described  here.  The --all, --pid, and --queue options, and the possibility to specify processes by com‐
+mand name, are local extensions.
+If signal is 0, then no actual signal is sent, but error checking is still performed.
+%
+login, logout - write utmp and wtmp entries
+#include <utmp.h>
+void login(const struct utmp *ut);
+int logout(const char *ut_line);
+Link with -lutil.
+The  utmp  file records who is currently using the system.  The wtmp file records all logins and logouts.
+The function login() takes the supplied struct utmp, ut, and writes it to both  the  utmp  and  the  wtmp
+file.
+%
+printf - format and print data
+printf FORMAT [ARGUMENT]...
+printf OPTION
+Print ARGUMENT(s) according to FORMAT, or execute according to OPTION:
+--help display this help and exit
+--version
+output version information and exit
+FORMAT controls the output as in C printf.  Interpreted sequences are:
+\"     double quote
+%
+pwd - print name of current/working directory
+pwd [OPTION]...
+Print the full filename of the current working directory.
+-L, --logical
+use PWD from environment, even if it contains symlinks
+-P, --physical
+avoid all symlinks
+--help display this help and exit
+--version
+%
+read — read a line from standard input
+read [−r] var...
+The read utility shall read a single line from standard input.
+By default, unless the −r option is specified, <backslash> shall act as an escape character. An unescaped
+<backslash> shall preserve the literal value of the following character, with the exception  of  a  <new‐
+line>.   If  a <newline> follows the <backslash>, the read utility shall interpret this as line continua‐
+tion. The <backslash> and <newline> shall be removed before splitting the input into  fields.  All  other
+%
+readonly — set the readonly attribute for variables
+readonly name[=word]...
+readonly −p
+The  variables  whose  names are specified shall be given the readonly attribute. The values of variables
+with the readonly attribute cannot be changed by subsequent assignment, nor can those variables be  unset
+by  the  unset  utility.  If the name of a variable is followed by =word, then the value of that variable
+shall be set to word.
+%
+return — return from a function or dot script
+return [n]
+The  return  utility  shall  cause the shell to stop executing the current function or dot script. If the
+shell is not currently executing a function or dot script, the results are unspecified.
+None.
+%
+set — set or unset options and positional parameters
+set [−abCefhmnuvx] [−o option] [argument...]
+set [+abCefhmnuvx] [+o option] [argument...]
+set −− [argument...]
+set −o
+set +o
+%
+shift — shift positional parameters
+shift [n]
+the new number of positional parameters.
+The value n shall be an unsigned decimal integer less than or equal to the value of the special parameter
+%
+test - check file types and compare values
+test EXPRESSION
+test
+[ EXPRESSION ]
+[ ]
+[ OPTION
+Exit with the status determined by EXPRESSION.
+--help display this help and exit
+--version
+output version information and exit
+%
+times — write process times
+times
+The  times  utility  shall  write  the accumulated user and system times for the shell and for all of its
+child processes, in the following POSIX locale format:
+"%dm%fs %dm%fs\n%dm%fs %dm%fs\n", <shell user minutes>,
+<shell user seconds>, <shell system minutes>,
+<shell system seconds>, <children user minutes>,
+%
+trap — trap signals
+trap n [condition...]
+trap [action condition...]
+If  the  first  operand is an unsigned decimal integer, the shell shall treat all operands as conditions,
+and shall reset each condition to the default value. Otherwise, if  there  are  operands,  the  first  is
+treated as an action and the remaining as conditions.
+If  action is '−', the shell shall reset each condition to the default value. If action is null (""), the
+%
+true - do nothing, successfully
+true [ignored command line arguments]
+true OPTION
+Exit with a status code indicating success.
+--help display this help and exit
+--version
+output version information and exit
+Please refer to your shell's documentation for details about the options it supports.
+%
+type — write a description of command type
+type name...
+The type utility shall indicate how each argument would be interpreted if used as a command name.
+None.
+OPERANDS
+%
+ulimit — set or report file size limit
+ulimit [−f] [blocks]
+The  ulimit utility shall set or report the file-size writing limit imposed on files written by the shell
+increase the limit.
+%
+umask — get or set the file mode creation mask
+umask [−S] [mask]
+The  umask  utility shall set the file mode creation mask of the current shell execution environment (see
+affect the initial value of the file permission bits of subsequently created files. If umask is called in
+a subshell or separate utility execution environment, such as one of the following:
+%
+unalias — remove alias definitions
+unalias alias-name...
+unalias −a
+Substitution.  The aliases shall be removed from the current shell  execution  environment;  see  Section
+%
+unset — unset values and attributes of variables and functions
+unset [−fv] name...
+Each variable or function specified by name shall be unset.
+If  −v  is  specified, name refers to a variable name and the shell shall unset it and remove it from the
+environment. Read-only variables cannot be unset.
+If −f is specified, name refers to a function and the shell shall unset the function definition.
+%
+wait — await process completion
+wait [pid...]
+last command in each element of the asynchronous list shall become known in the current  shell  execution
+If  the wait utility is invoked with no operands, it shall wait until all process IDs known to the invok‐
+ing shell have terminated and exit with a zero exit status.
+%
+timedatectl - Control the system time and date
+The following options are understood:
+--no-ask-password
+Do not query the user for authentication for privileged operations.
+--adjust-system-clock
+%
+iptables-save — dump iptables rules to stdout
+ip6tables-save — dump iptables rules to stdout
+iptables-save [-M modprobe] [-c] [-t table]
+ip6tables-save [-M modprobe] [-c] [-t table]
+iptables-save  and  ip6tables-save  are used to dump the contents of IP or IPv6 Table in easily parseable
+format to STDOUT. Use I/O-redirection provided by your shell to write to a file.
+-M, --modprobe modprobe_program
+Specify the path to the modprobe program. By default, iptables-save  will  inspect  /proc/sys/ker‐
+nel/modprobe to determine the executable's path.
+%
+c_rehash - Create symbolic links to files named by the hash values
+c_rehash [-old] [-h] [-n] [-v] [ directory...]
+c_rehash scans directories and calculates a hash value of each ".pem", ".crt", ".cer", or ".crl" file in
+the specified directory list and creates symbolic links for each file, where the name of the link is the
+as many programs that use OpenSSL require directories to be set up like this in order to find
+certificates.
+If any directories are named on the command line, then those are processed in turn. If not, then the
+SSL_CERT_DIR environment variable is consulted; this shold be a colon-separated list of directories, like
+the Unix PATH variable.  If that is not set then the default directory (installation-specific but often
+/usr/local/ssl/certs) is processed.
+%
+gdbm_load - re-create a GDBM database from a dump file.
+[--block-size=NUM] [--cache-size=NUM] [--mmap=NUM]
+[--mode=MODE] [--no-meta] [--replace]
+gdbm_load [-Vh] [--help] [--usage] [--version]
+Create  a gdbm database file DB_FILE from the dump file FILE.  If the FILE argument is not supplied, out‐
+put the created database to the standard error.
+If the input file is in ASCII dump format, the mode and ownership of the created  database  are  restored
+%
+yes - output a string repeatedly until killed
+yes [STRING]...
+yes OPTION
+Repeatedly output a line with all specified STRING(s), or 'y'.
+--help display this help and exit
+--version
+output version information and exit
+Written by David MacKenzie.
+%
+named-checkconf - named configuration file syntax checking tool
+named-checkconf [-h] [-v] [-j] [-t directory] {filename} [-p] [-x] [-z]
+named-checkconf checks the syntax, but not the semantics, of a named configuration file. The file is
+parsed and checked for syntax errors, along with all files included by it. If no file is specified,
+/etc/named.conf is read by default.
+run, even if named-checkconf was successful.  named-checkconf can be run on these files explicitly,
+however.
+-h
+%
+grotty - groff driver for typewriter-like devices
+grotty [ -bBcdfhioruUv ] [ -Fdir ] [ files... ]
+It is possible to have whitespace between the -F option and its parameter.
+grotty  translates  the  output  of GNU troff into a form suitable for typewriter-like devices.  Normally
+the standard input.  A filename of - also causes grotty to read the standard input.  Output is written to
+the standard output.
+foreground colors; additionally, bold and italic attributes can be used at the same time (by using the BI
+%
+systemd-machine-id-setup - Initialize the machine ID in /etc/machine-id
+systemd-machine-id-setup
+information about this file.
+If the tool is invoked without the --commit switch, /etc/machine-id is initialized with a valid, new
+machined ID if it is missing or empty. The new machine ID will be acquired in the following fashion:
+used to initialize the machine ID in /etc/machine-id.
+%
+bridge - show / manipulate bridge addresses and devices
+OBJECT := { link | fdb | mdb | vlan | monitor }
+bridge link set dev DEV  [ cost COST ] [ priority PRIO ] [ state STATE] [ guard { on | off } ] [ hairpin
+{ on | off } ] [ fastleave { on | off } ] [ root_block { on | off } ] [ learning { on | off } ] [
+learning_sync { on | off } ] [ flood { on | off } ] [ hwmode { vepa | veb } ] [ self ] [ master ]
+bridge link [ show ] [ dev DEV ]
+bridge fdb { add | append | del | replace } LLADDR dev DEV { local | static | dynamic } [ self ] [ master
+] [ router ] [ use ] [ dst IPADDR ] [ vni VNI ] [ port PORT ] [ via DEVICE ]
+%
+grub-mkrelpath - make a system path relative to its root
+grub-mkrelpath [OPTION...] PATH
+Transform a system filename into GRUB one.
+-?, --help
+give this help list
+--usage
+give a short usage message
+-V, --version
+print program version
+%
+vgrename — rename a volume group
+will refuse to run or give warning messages.
+a  Volume  Group with the same name as the Volume Group containing your root filesystem the machine might
+not even boot correctly.  However, the two Volume Groups should have different UUIDs (unless the disk was
+cloned) so you can rename one of the conflicting Volume Groups with vgrename.
+%
+rename - rename files
+rename [options] expression replacement file...
+rename  will  rename the specified files by replacing the first occurrence of expression in their name by
+replacement.
+-s, --symlink
+Do not rename a symlink but its target.
+-v, --verbose
+Show which files where renamed, if any.
+-V, --version
+%
+grub-install - install GRUB to a device
+grub-install [OPTION...] [OPTION] [INSTALL_DEVICE]
+Install GRUB on your drive.
+--compress=no|xz|gz|lzo
+compress GRUB files [optional]
+-d, --directory=DIR
+use images and modules under DIR [default=/usr/lib/grub/<platform>]
+--fonts=FONTS
+install FONTS [default=unicode]
+%
+pvck — check physical volume metadata
+calVolume [PhysicalVolume...]
+pvck checks physical volume LVM metadata for consistency.
+--labelsector sector
+parameter  allows you to specify a different starting sector for the scan and is useful for recov‐
+ery situations.  For example, suppose the partition table is corrupted or lost  on  /dev/sda,  but
+%
+xfs_copy - copy the contents of an XFS filesystem
+xfs_copy -V
+argument must be the pathname of the device or file containing the XFS filesystem.  The  remaining  argu‐
+ments  specify  one or more target devices or file names. If the pathnames specify devices, a copy of the
+source XFS filesystem is created on each device. The target can also be the name of a  regular  file,  in
+xfs_copy creates the file. The length of the resulting file is equal to the size of the  source  filesys‐
+tem.  However, if the file is created on an XFS filesystem, the file consumes roughly the amount of space
+actually used in the source filesystem by the filesystem and the XFS log.  The space  saving  is  because
+xfs_copy  seeks  over  free  blocks  instead of copying them and the XFS filesystem supports sparse files
+efficiently.
+%
+pacman - package manager utility
+pacman <operation> [options] [targets]
+Pacman is a package management utility that tracks installed packages on a Linux system. It features
+dependency support, package groups, install and uninstall scripts, and the ability to sync your local
+machine with a remote repository to automatically upgrade packages. Pacman packages are a zipped tar
+format.
+Invoking pacman involves specifying an operation with any potential options and targets to operate on. A
+target is usually a package name, file name, URL, or a search string. Targets can be provided as command
+line arguments. Additionally, if stdin is not from a terminal and a single hyphen (-) is passed as an
+%
+ip - show / manipulate routing, devices, policy routing and tunnels
+ip [ -force ] -batch filename
+OBJECT := { link | address | addrlabel | route | rule | neigh | ntable | tunnel | tuntap | maddress |
+flush-attempts } | -o[neline] | -rc[vbuf] [size] | -t[imestamp] | -ts[hort] | -n[etns] name |
+-a[ll] | -c[olor] }
+-V, -Version
+%
+mk_cmds - error table compiler
+mk_cmds file
+Mk_cmds converts a table listing command names and associated help messages into a C source file suitable
+The source file name must end with a suffix of ``.ct''; the file consists of a declaration supplying  the
+name of the command table:
+command_table name
+followed by entries of the form:
+[ request | unimplemented ] name, " string "[, abbrev]...;
+%
+uniq - report or omit repeated lines
+uniq [OPTION]... [INPUT [OUTPUT]]
+Filter adjacent matching lines from INPUT (or standard input), writing to OUTPUT (or standard output).
+With no options, matching lines are merged to the first occurrence.
+Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
+-c, --count
+prefix lines by the number of occurrences
+-d, --repeated
+only print duplicate lines, one for each group
+%
+ldattach - attach a line discipline to a serial line
+The  ldattach daemon opens the specified device file (which should refer to a serial device) and attaches
+the line discipline ldisc to it for processing of the sent and/or received data.  It then goes  into  the
+background keeping the device open so that the line discipline stays loaded.
+With no arguments, ldattach prints usage information.
+LINE DISCIPLINES
+%
+gawk - pattern scanning and processing language
+gawk [ POSIX or GNU style options ] -f program-file [ -- ] file ...
+gawk [ POSIX or GNU style options ] [ -- ] program-text file ...
+Gawk  is the GNU Project's implementation of the AWK programming language.  It conforms to the definition
+AWK Programming Language, by Aho, Kernighan, and Weinberger.  Gawk provides the additional features found
+in the current version of Brian Kernighan's awk and a number of GNU-specific extensions.
+The command line consists of options to gawk itself, the AWK program text (if not supplied via the -f  or
+--file options), and values to be made available in the ARGC and ARGV pre-defined AWK variables.
+When  gawk is invoked with the --profile option, it starts gathering profiling statistics from the execu‐
+tion of the program.  Gawk runs more slowly in this mode, and automatically produces an execution profile
+%
+lookbib - search bibliographic databases
+lookbib [ -v ] [ -istring ] [ -tn ] filename...
+lookbib  prints  a prompt on the standard error (unless the standard input is not a terminal), reads from
+the standard input a line containing a set of keywords, searches the bibliographic databases  filename...
+for references containing those keywords, prints any references found on the standard output, and repeats
+this process until the end of input.  For each database filename to be searched, if an  index  filename.i
+It is possible to have whitespace between a command line option and its parameter.
+-v     Print the version number.
+%
+size - list section sizes and total size.
+size [-A|-B|--format=compatibility]
+[--help]
+[-d|-o|-x|--radix=number]
+[--common]
+[-t|--totals]
+[--target=bfdname] [-V|--version]
+[objfile...]
+The GNU size utility lists the section sizes---and the total size---for each of the object or archive
+files objfile in its argument list.  By default, one line of output is generated for each object file or
+each module in an archive.
+objfile... are the object files to be examined.  If none are specified, the file "a.out" will be used.
+%
+join - join lines of two files on a common field
+For  each  pair  of input lines with identical join fields, write a line to standard output.  The default
+join field is the first, delimited by blanks.
+-a FILENUM
+-e EMPTY
+replace missing input fields with EMPTY
+%
+idle - make process 0 idle
+#include <unistd.h>
+int idle(void);
+idle() is an internal system call used during bootstrap.  It marks the process's pages as swappable, low‐
+ers its priority, and enters the main scheduling loop.  idle() never returns.
+EPERM.
+RETURN VALUE
+%
+refer - preprocess bibliographic references for groff
+refer [ -benvCPRS ] [ -an ] [ -cfields ] [ -fn ] [ -ifields ] [ -kfield ] [ -lm,n ] [ -pfilename ]
+[ -sfields ] [ -tn ] [ -Bfield.macro ] [ filename... ]
+refer  copies the contents of filename... to the standard output, except that lines between .[ and .] are
+are to be processed.
+Each citation specifies a reference.  The citation can specify a reference that is contained in a biblio‐
+graphic database by giving a set of keywords that only that reference  contains.   Alternatively  it  can
+specify  a reference by supplying a database record in the citation.  A combination of these alternatives
+is also possible.
+%
+xzmore, lzmore - view xz or lzma compressed (text) files
+xzmore [file...]
+lzmore [file...]
+time on a soft-copy terminal.
+To use a pager other than the default more, set environment variable PAGER to the  name  of  the  desired
+program.  The name lzmore is provided for backward compatibility with LZMA Utils.
+e or q When the prompt --More--(Next file: file) is printed, this command causes xzmore to exit.
+s      When  the prompt --More--(Next file: file) is printed, this command causes xzmore to skip the next
+file and continue.
+%
+sserver [ -p port ] [ -S keytab ] [ server_port ]
+sserver, it performs a Kerberos authentication, and then sserver returns to sclient the Kerberos  princi‐
+pal which was used for the Kerberos authentication.  It makes a good test that Kerberos has been success‐
+fully installed on a machine.
+The service name used by sserver and sclient is sample.  Hence, sserver will  require  that  there  be  a
+The -S option allows for a different keytab than the default.
+%
+wc - print newline, word, and byte counts for each file
+wc [OPTION]... [FILE]...
+wc [OPTION]... --files0-from=F
+Print  newline, word, and byte counts for each FILE, and a total line if more than one FILE is specified.
+A word is a non-zero-length sequence of characters delimited by white space.
+With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.
+word, character, byte, maximum line length.
+-c, --bytes
+print the byte counts
+%
+calc_tickadj - Calculates optimal value for tick given ntp drift file.
+calc_tickadj [-flags] [-flag [value]] [--option-name[[=| ]value]]
+All arguments must be options.
+The  calc_tickadj script uses provided ntp drift file to generate optimal tick value. Generally, ntpd can
+do better job if the drift value is the smallest possible number.
+The example output of
+$ ./calc_tickadj
+9999 usec; 9999779 nsec
+$ cat /etc/ntp/drift
+%
+pcap-config - write libpcap compiler and linker flags to standard output
+pcap-config [ --static ] [ --cflags | --libs | --additional-libs ]
+When  run  with  the  --cflags  option,  pcap-config  writes to the standard output the -I compiler flags
+required to include libpcap's header files.  When run with the --libs option, pcap-config writes  to  the
+standard  output  the  -L  and  -l  linker  flags  required  to link with libpcap, including -l flags for
+libraries required by libpcap.  When run with the --additional-libs option,  pcap-config  writes  to  the
+standard  output  the  -L and -l flags for libraries required by libpcap, but not the -lpcap flag to link
+with libpcap itself.
+By default, it writes flags appropriate for compiling with a dynamically-linked version of  libpcap;  the
+--static  flag  causes  it  to  write flags appropriate for compiling with a statically-linked version of
+libpcap.
+%
+xfs_logprint - print the log of an XFS filesystem
+xfs_logprint [ options ] device
+the partition or logical volume containing the filesystem. The device can be a regular  file  if  the  -f
+option  is  used. The contents of the filesystem remain undisturbed.  There are two major modes of opera‐
+tion in xfs_logprint.
+One mode is better for filesystem operation debugging.  It  is  called  the  transactional  view  and  is
+enabled through the -t option. The transactional view prints only the portion of the log that pertains to
+tries to display each transaction without regard to how they are split across log records.
+The  second  mode starts printing out information from the beginning of the log.  Some error blocks might
+%
+kswitch - switch primary ticket cache
+kswitch {-c cachename|-p principal}
+kswitch  makes the specified credential cache the primary cache for the collection, if a cache collection
+is available.
+-c cachename
+Directly specifies the credential cache to be made primary.
+-p principal
+Causes the cache collection to be searched for a cache containing credentials for  principal.   If
+one is found, that collection is made primary.
+%
+hexdump - display file contents in hexadecimal, decimal, octal, or ascii
+hexdump [options] file...
+The  hexdump  utility  is  a filter which displays the specified files, or standard input if no files are
+specified, in a user-specified format.
+-b, --one-byte-octal
+One-byte octal display.  Display the input offset in hexadecimal, followed by sixteen  space-sepa‐
+rated, three-column, zero-filled bytes of input data, in octal, per line.
+%
+btrfs - a toolbox to manage btrfs filesystems
+btrfs <command> [<args>]
+The btrfs utility is a toolbox for managing btrfs filesystems. There are command groups to work with
+There are also standalone tools for some tasks like btrfs-convert or btrfstune that were separate
+historically and/or haven’t been merged to the main utility. See section STANDALONE TOOLS for more
+details.
+Any command name can be shortened as far as it stays unambiguous, however it is recommended to use full
+%
+xzdec, lzmadec - Small .xz and .lzma decompressors
+xzdec [option...]  [file...]
+lzmadec [option...]  [file...]
+xzdec is a liblzma-based decompression-only tool for .xz (and only .xz) files.  xzdec is intended to work
+xz  --decompress  --stdout  (and  possibly  a  few  other commonly used options) to decompress .xz files.
+lzmadec is identical to xzdec except that lzmadec supports .lzma files instead of .xz files.
+To reduce the size of the executable, xzdec doesn't support multithreading or localization,  and  doesn't
+read  options from XZ_DEFAULTS and XZ_OPT environment variables.  xzdec doesn't support displaying inter‐
+process instead of displaying progress information.
+%
+mii-tool - view, manipulate media-independent interface status
+mii-tool  [-v,  --verbose]  [-V,  --version] [-R, --reset] [-r, --restart] [-w, --watch] [-l, --log] [-A,
+--advertise=media,...]  [-F, --force=media] [-p, --phy=addr] interface ...
+Most fast ethernet adapters use an MII to autonegotiate link speed and duplex setting.
+Most  intelligent  network devices use an autonegotiation protocol to communicate what media technologies
+they support, and then select the fastest mutually supported media technology.   The  -A  or  --advertise
+options  can  be  used  to  tell  the  MII  to only advertise a subset of its capabilities.  Some passive
+devices, such as single-speed hubs, are unable to autonegotiate.  To handle such devices, the MII  proto‐
+-F or --force options can be used to force the MII to operate in one mode,  instead  of  autonegotiating.
+The -A and -F options are mutually exclusive.
+%
+lsblk - list block devices
+lsblk [options] [device...]
+lsblk  lists information about all available or the specified block devices.  The lsblk command reads the
+sysfs filesystem and udev db to gather information.
+The command prints all block devices (except RAM disks) in a tree-like  format  by  default.   Use  lsblk
+--help to get a list of all available columns.
+The  default  output,  as well as the default output from options like --fs and --topology, is subject to
+change.  So whenever possible, you should avoid using default outputs in your scripts.  Always explicitly
+define expected columns by using --output columns-list in environments where a stable output is required.
+%
+watch - execute a program periodically, showing output fullscreen
+watch [options] command
+run until interrupted.
+-d, --differences [permanent]
+Highlight  the  differences  between  successive updates.  Option will read optional argument that
+changes highlight to be permanent, allowing to see what has changed  at  least  once  since  first
+iteration.
+-n, --interval seconds
+%
+slattach - attach a network interface to a serial line
+slattach [-dehlLmnqv] [-c command] [-p proto] [-s speed] [tty]
+Slattach  is  a tiny little program that can be used to put a normal terminal ("serial") line into one of
+several "network" modes, thus allowing you to use it for point-to-point links to other computers.
+tty    Path to a serial device like /dev/ttyS*, /dev/cua* or /dev/ptmx to spawn a new pseudo tty.
+[-c command]
+tions when a link goes down.
+[-d]   Enable debugging output.  Useful when determining why a given setup doesn't work.
+%
+systemd-notify - Notify service manager about start-up completion and other daemon status changes
+used to send arbitrary information, encoded in an environment-block-like list of strings. Most
+importantly, it can be used for start-up completion notification.
+set for the service unit this command is called from.
+%
+xzgrep - search compressed files for a regular expression
+xzgrep [grep_options] [-e] pattern file...
+xzegrep ...
+xzfgrep ...
+lzgrep ...
+lzegrep ...
+lzfgrep ...
+%
+xfs_io - debug the I/O path of an XFS filesystem
+xfs_io [ -adfmrRstxT ] [ -c cmd ] ... [ -p prog ] file
+xfs_io -V
+than the raw XFS volume itself.  These code paths include not only the obvious read/write/mmap interfaces
+for manipulating files, but also cover all of the XFS extensions (such as space preallocation, additional
+inode flags, etc).
+gram exits.
+%
+pkttyagent - Textual authentication helper
+pkttyagent [--version] [--help]
+pkttyagent [--process { pid | pid,pid-start-time } | --system-bus-name busname] [--notify-fd fd]
+[--fallback]
+pkttyagent is used to start a textual authentication agent for the subject specified by either --process
+or --system-bus-name. If neither of these options are given, the parent process is used.
+To get notified when the authentication agent has been registered either listen to the Changed D-Bus
+signal or use --notify-fd to pass the number of a file descriptor that has been passed to the program.
+If --fallback is used, the textual authentication agent will not replace an existing authentication
+%
+more - file perusal filter for crt viewing
+more [options] file...
+Options are also taken from the environment variable MORE (make sure to precede them with a dash (-)) but
+command-line options will override those.
+-d     Prompt with "[Press space to continue, 'q' to quit.]", and display "[Press 'h' for instructions.]"
+instead of ringing the bell when an illegal key is pressed.
+-l     Do not pause after any line containing a ^L (form feed).
+%
+head - output the first part of files
+head [OPTION]... [FILE]...
+header giving the file name.
+With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.
+Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
+-c, --bytes=[-]NUM
+print the first NUM bytes of each file; with the leading '-', print all but the last NUM bytes  of
+each file
+%
+expr - evaluate expressions
+expr EXPRESSION
+expr OPTION
+--help display this help and exit
+--version
+output version information and exit
+Print  the  value  of  EXPRESSION to standard output.  A blank line below separates increasing precedence
+%
+ipset — administration tool for IP sets
+| version | - }
+-file filename }
+%
+objdump - display information from object files.
+objdump [-a|--archive-headers]
+[-b bfdname|--target=bfdname]
+[-C|--demangle[=style] ]
+[-d|--disassemble]
+[-D|--disassemble-all]
+[-z|--disassemble-zeroes]
+[-EB|-EL|--endian={big | little }]
+[-f|--file-headers]
+[-F|--file-offsets]
+[--file-start-context]
+[-g|--debugging]
+[-e|--debugging-tags]
+[-h|--section-headers|--headers]
+[-i|--info]
+%
+gresource - GResource tool
+gresource [--section SECTION] list FILE [PATH]
+gresource [--section SECTION] details FILE [PATH]
+gresource [--section SECTION] extract FILE PATH
+gresource sections FILE
+gresource offers a simple commandline interface to GResource. It lets you list and extract resources that
+have been compiled into a resource file or included in an elf file (a binary or a shared library).
+%
+lvmdiskscan scans all SCSI, (E)IDE disks, multiple devices and a bunch of other block devices in the sys‐
+tem looking for LVM physical volumes.  The size reported is the real device size.   Define  a  filter  in
+-l, --lvmpartition
+Only reports Physical Volumes.
+%
+numfmt - Convert numbers from/to human-readable strings
+numfmt [OPTION]... [NUMBER]...
+Reformat NUMBER(s), or the numbers from standard input if none are specified.
+Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
+--debug
+print warnings about invalid input
+-d, --delimiter=X
+use X instead of whitespace for field delimiter
+--field=FIELDS
+%
+logsave - save the output of a command in a logfile
+logsave [ -asv ] logfile cmd_prog [ ... ]
+The  logsave  program will execute cmd_prog with the specified argument(s), and save a copy of its output
+to logfile.  If the containing directory for logfile does not exist, logsave will accumulate  the  output
+in memory until it can be written out.  A copy of the output will also be written to standard output.
+If  cmd_prog  is  a single hyphen ('-'), then instead of executing a program, logsave will take its input
+from standard input and save it in logfile
+logsave is useful for saving the output of initial boot scripts until the /var partition is  mounted,  so
+the output can be written to /var/log.
+%
+certtool - GnuTLS certificate tool
+certtool [-flags] [-flag [value]] [--option-name[[=| ]value]]
+All arguments must be options.
+or non interactively by specifying the template command line option.
+provide it using the environment variables GNUTLS_PIN and GNUTLS_SO_PIN.
+-d number, --debug=number
+%
+systemd-socket-activate - Test socket activation of daemons
+connection.
+The daemon to launch and its options should be specified after options intended for
+systemd-socket-activate.
+If the --inetd option is given, the socket file descriptor will be used as the standard input and output
+of the launched process. Otherwise, standard input and output will be inherited, and sockets will be
+systemd-socket-activate will be passed through to the daemon, in the original positions. Other sockets
+%
+losetup - set up and control loop devices
+Get info:
+losetup loopdev
+losetup -l [-a]
+losetup -j file [-o offset]
+Detach a loop device:
+losetup -d loopdev...
+Detach all associated loop devices:
+%
+passwd - change user password
+passwd [options] [LOGIN]
+the account or associated password validity period.
+Password Changes
+and compared against the stored password. The user has only one chance to enter the correct password. The
+After the password has been entered, password aging information is checked to see if the user is
+permitted to change the password at this time. If not, passwd refuses to change the password and exits.
+%
+unicode_stop - revert keyboard and console from unicode mode
+unicode_stop
+The  unicode_stop  command  will  more-or-less undo the effect of unicode_start.  It puts the keyboard in
+%
+sudo, sudoedit — execute a command as another user
+sudo -h | -K | -k | -V
+sudo -v [-AknS] [-a type] [-g group] [-h host] [-p prompt] [-u user]
+sudo -l [-AknS] [-a type] [-g group] [-h host] [-p prompt] [-U user] [-u user] [command]
+sudo [-AbEHnPS] [-a type] [-C num] [-c class] [-g group] [-h host] [-p prompt] [-r role] [-t type]
+[-u user] [VAR=value] [-i | -s] [command]
+sudoedit [-AknS] [-a type] [-C num] [-c class] [-g group] [-h host] [-p prompt] [-u user] file ...
+sudo allows a permitted user to execute a command as the superuser or another user, as specified by the
+security policy.  The invoking user's real (not effective) user ID is used to determine the user name with
+which to query the security policy.
+sudo supports a plugin architecture for security policies and input/output logging.  Third parties can
+develop and distribute their own policy and I/O logging plugins to work seamlessly with the sudo front end.
+%
+groff - front-end for the groff document formatting system
+groff [-abcegijklpstzCEGNRSUVXZ] [-d cs] [-D arg] [-f fam] [-F dir] [-I dir] [-K arg] [-L arg] [-m name]
+[-M dir] [-n num] [-o list] [-P arg] [-r cn] [-T dev] [-w name] [-W name] [file ...]
+groff -h | --help
+groff -v | --version [option ...]
+The groff program and macro suite is the implementation of a roff(7) system within the free software col‐
+lection GNU ⟨http://www.gnu.org⟩.  The groff system has all features of the classical roff, but adds many
+extensions.
+%
+tzselect - select a timezone
+tzselect
+The  tzselect program asks the user for information about the current location, and outputs the resulting
+timezone description to standard output.  The output is suitable as a value for the TZ environment  vari‐
+able.
+All interaction with the user is done via standard input and standard error.
+The exit status is zero if a timezone was successfully obtained from the user, nonzero otherwise.
+ENVIRONMENT
+%
+modprobe - Add and remove modules from the Linux Kernel
+modprobe [-v] [-V] [-C config-file] [-n] [-i] [-q] [-b] [modulename] [module parameters...]
+modprobe [-r] [-v] [-n] [-i] [modulename...]
+modprobe [-c]
+modprobe [--dump-modversions] [filename]
+modprobe intelligently adds or removes a module from the Linux kernel: note that for convenience, there
+is no difference between _ and - in module names (automatic underscore conversion is performed).
+modprobe looks in the module directory /lib/modules/`uname -r` for all the modules and other files,
+modprobe will also use module options specified on the kernel command line in the form of
+%
+systemd-hwdb - hardware database management tool
+systemd-hwdb [options] update
+systemd-hwdb [options] query modalias
+systemd-hwdb expects a command and command specific arguments. It manages the binary hardware database.
+-h, --help
+Print help text.
+--usr
+Generate in /usr/lib/udev instead of /etc/udev.
+%
+named - Internet domain name server
+[-M option] [-m flag] [-n #cpus] [-p port] [-s] [-S #max-socks] [-t directory] [-U #listeners]
+[-u user] [-v] [-V] [-X lock-file] [-x cache-file]
+When invoked without arguments, named will read the default configuration file /etc/named.conf, read any
+initial data, and listen for queries.
+%
+systemctl - Control the systemd system and service manager
+manages.
+The following options are understood:
+-t, --type=
+The argument should be a comma-separated list of unit types such as service and socket.
+If one of the arguments is a unit type, when listing units, limit display to certain unit types.
+%
+geouplookup6 - look up country using IP Address or hostname
+geouplookup6 [-d directory] [-f filename] [-v] <ipaddress|hostname>
+geouplookup6 uses the GeoIP library and database to find the Country that an IP address or hostname orig‐
+inates from. You must install a database suitable for geoiplookup6. IE: GeoIPv6.dat
+For example:
+geoiplookup6 ipv6.google.com
+%
+external-journal ] [ -E extended_options ] [ -z undo_file ] device
+use  a  journal, if the system has been shut down uncleanly without any errors, normally, after replaying
+the committed transactions  in the journal, the file system should  be  marked  as  clean.    Hence,  for
+indicates that further checking is required.
+-n  option is specified, and -c, -l, or -L options are not specified.   However, even if it is safe to do
+%
+unshare - run program with some namespaces unshared from parent
+unshare [options] program [arguments]
+Unshares the indicated namespaces from the parent process and then executes the specified program.
+The namespaces can optionally be made persistent by bind mounting /proc/pid/ns/type files to a filesystem
+The namespaces to be unshared are indicated via options.  Unshareable namespaces are:
+mount namespace
+Mounting  and  unmounting  filesystems  will not affect the rest of the system (CLONE_NEWNS flag),
+except for filesystems which are explicitly  marked  as  shared  (with  mount  --make-shared;  see
+%
+mechanisms which use the standard libsasl database of user secrets.
+the -d (delete user) flag.
+%
+pinky - lightweight finger
+pinky [OPTION]... [USER]...
+-l     produce long format output for the specified USERs
+-b     omit the user's home directory and shell in long format
+-h     omit the user's project file in long format
+-p     omit the user's plan file in long format
+-s     do short format output, this is the default
+-f     omit the line of column headings in short format
+%
+tic - the terminfo entry-description compiler
+The  tic command translates a terminfo file from source format into compiled format.  The compiled format
+hashed  database (one record per entry).  The tic command writes only one type of entry, depending on how
+it was built:
+·   For directory trees, the top-level directory, e.g., /usr/share/terminfo, specifies  the  location  of
+the database.
+·   For  hashed databases, a filename is needed.  If the given file is not found by that name, but can be
+%
+python - an interpreted, interactive, object-oriented programming language
+python [ -B ] [ -b ] [ -d ] [ -E ] [ -h ] [ -i ] [ -I ]
+[ -m module-name ] [ -q ] [ -O ] [ -OO ] [ -s ] [ -S ] [ -u ]
+[ -v ] [ -V ] [ -W argument ] [ -x ] [ [ -X option ] -?  ]
+[ -c command | script | - ] [ arguments ]
+Python  is  an  interpreted,  interactive,  object-oriented programming language that combines remarkable
+power with very clear syntax.  For an introduction to programming in Python,  see  the  Python  Tutorial.
+The  Python  Library  Reference  documents built-in and standard types, constants, functions and modules.
+Finally, the Python Reference Manual describes the syntax and semantics of the core language in  (perhaps
+installed on your system as well.)
+Python's basic power can be extended with your own modules written in C or C++.   On  most  systems  such
+%
+troff - the troff processor of the groff text formatting system
+troff [-abcivzCERU] [-d cs] [-f fam] [-F dir] [-I dir] [-m name] [-M dir] [-n num] [-o list] [-r cn]
+[-T name] [-w name] [-W name] [file ...]
+appropriate order and with the appropriate options.
+It is possible to have whitespace between a command line option and its parameter.
+-a        Generate an ASCII approximation of the typeset output.
+%
+gtester - test running utility
+gtester [OPTION...] [testprogram]
+gtester is a utility to run unit tests that have been written using the GLib test framework.
+When called with the -o option, gtester writes an XML report of the test results, which can be converted
+into HTML using the gtester-report utility.
+-h, --help
+print help and exit
+-v, --version
+print version information and exit
+%
+lexgrog - parse header information in man pages
+lexgrog [-m|-c] [-dfw?V] [-E encoding] file ...
+lexgrog is an implementation of the traditional “groff guess” utility in lex.  It reads the list of files
+on its command line as either man page source files or preformatted “cat” pages, and displays their  name
+and description as used by apropos and whatis, the list of preprocessing filters required by the man page
+before it is passed to nroff or troff, or both.
+grams that need to check man pages for correctness.  If one of lexgrog's input files is “-”, it will read
+from standard input; if any input file is compressed, a decompressed version will be read automatically.
+-d, --debug
+%
+lvscan — scan (all disks) for Logical Volumes
+lockingfailure] [-P|--partial] [--reportformat {basic|json}] [-v|--verbose]
+lvscan scans all known volume groups or all supported LVM block devices in the system for defined Logical
+Volumes.  The output consists of one line for each Logical Volume indicating whether or not it is active,
+obtain more-comprehensive information about the Logical Volumes.
+--all  Include  information in the output about internal Logical Volumes that are components of normally-
+accessible Logical Volumes, such as mirrors, but which are not independently accessible (e.g.  not
+%
+msggrep - pattern matching on message catalog
+msggrep [OPTION] [INPUTFILE]
+Extracts  all messages of a translation catalog that match a given pattern or belong to some given source
+files.
+Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
+Input file location:
+INPUTFILE
+input PO file
+-D, --directory=DIRECTORY
+add DIRECTORY to list for input files search
+%
+lvmconf — LVM configuration modifier
+lvmconf  [--disable-cluster]  [--enable-cluster] [--enable-halvm] [--disable-halvm] [--file <configfile>]
+[--lockinglib <lib>] [--lockinglibdir <dir>] [--services] [--mirrorservice] [--startstopservices]
+lvmconf is a  script  that  modifies  the  locking  configuration  in  an  lvm  configuration  file.  See
+lvm configuration if needed.
+--disable-cluster
+Set locking_type to the default non-clustered type. Also reset lvmetad use to its default.
+--enable-cluster
+Set locking_type to the default clustered type on this system.  Also disable lvmetad use as it  is
+%
+colrm - remove columns from a file
+colrm [first [last]]
+colrm removes selected columns from a file.  Input is taken from standard input.  Output is sent to stan‐
+dard output.
+If called with one parameter the columns of each line will be removed starting with the  specified  first
+column.   If  called  with  two  parameters  the columns from the first column to the last column will be
+removed.
+-V, --version
+%
+ntpdc - vendor-specific NTPD control program
+ntpdc [-flags] [-flag [value]] [--option-name[[=| ]value]] [ host ...]
+using a much more sane interface.
+either in interactive mode or controlled using command line arguments.  Extensive  state  and  statistics
+information  is available through the ntpdc interface.  In addition, nearly all the configuration options
+ntpdc.
+%
+paste - merge lines of files
+paste [OPTION]... [FILE]...
+Write  lines  consisting  of  the  sequentially corresponding lines from each FILE, separated by TABs, to
+standard output.
+With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.
+Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
+-d, --delimiters=LIST
+reuse characters from LIST instead of TABs
+-s, --serial
+%
+vgsplit — split a volume group into two
+vgsplit  [--alloc AllocationPolicy] [-A|--autobackup {y|n}] [-c|--clustered {y|n}] [--commandprofile Pro‐
+[-p|--maxphysicalvolumes    MaxPhysicalVolumes]    [--[vg]metadatacopies    NumberOfCopies|unmanaged|all]
+[PhysicalVolumePath...]
+The physical volumes moved can be specified either explicitly via PhysicalVolumePath, or implicitly by -n
+moved.
+for the new volume group can be specified with --alloc, --clustered, --maxlogicalvolumes, --metadatatype,
+%
+makepkg - package build utility
+makepkg [options] [ENVVAR=value] [ENVVAR+=value] ...
+makepkg is a script to automate the building of packages. The requirements for using the script are a
+build-capable *nix platform and a custom build script for each package you wish to build (known as a
+The advantage to a script-based build is that the work is only done once. Once you have the build script
+for a package, makepkg will do the rest: download and validate source files, check dependencies,
+configure the build-time settings, build the package, install the package into a temporary root, make
+customizations, generate meta-info, and package the whole thing up for pacman to use.
+makepkg uses your current locale by default and does not unset it when building packages. If you wish
+%
+mev - a program to report mouse events
+mev [ options ]
+The  `mev' program is part of the gpm package.  The information below is extracted from the texinfo file,
+which is the preferred source of information.
+The mev program is modeled after xev. It prints to stdout the mouse console events it gets.
+mev's default behaviour is to get anything, but command line switches can be  used  to  set  the  various
+fields in the Gpm_Connect structure, in order to customize the program's behaviour. I'm using mev to han‐
+dle mouse events to Emacs.
+Command line switches for mev are the following:
+%
+last, lastb - show a listing of last logged in users
+last [options] [username...] [tty...]
+lastb [options] [username...] [tty...]
+last  searches back through the /var/log/wtmp file (or the file designated by the -f option) and displays
+a list of all users logged in (and out) since that file was created.  One or more usernames  and/or  ttys
+be abbreviated, thus last 0 is the same as last tty0.
+When catching a SIGINT signal (generated by the interrupt key, usually control-C) or  a  SIGQUIT  signal,
+terminate.
+The pseudo user reboot logs in each time the system is rebooted.  Thus last reboot will show a log of all
+%
+mandb - create or update the manual page index caches
+mandb [-dqsucpt?V] [-C file] [manpath]
+mandb [-dqsut] [-C file] -f filename ...
+mandb  is used to initialise or manually update index database caches that are usually maintained by man.
+The caches contain information relevant to the current state of the manual page system and  the  informa‐
+tion stored within them is used by the man-db utilities to enhance their speed and functionality.
+When creating or updating an index, mandb will warn of bad ROFF .so requests, bogus manual page filenames
+and manual pages from which the whatis cannot be parsed.
+Supplying mandb with an optional colon-delimited path will override the internal system manual page hier‐
+archy search path, determined from information found within the man-db configuration file.
+%
+showconsolefont - Show the current EGA/VGA console screen font
+showconsolefont [ -V ] [ -v ] [ -C console ]
+The  showconsolefont command outputs the current console font to stdout.  The option -v prints additional
+-C allows one to indicate the console involved. Its argument is a pathname.
+%
+lnstat - unified linux network statistics
+lnstat [options]
+lnstat  is a generalized and more feature-complete replacement for the old rtstat program. It is commonly
+used to periodically print a selection of statistical values exported by  the  kernel.   In  addition  to
+routing  cache  statistics,  it  supports  any  kind of statistics the linux kernel exports via a file in
+/proc/net/stat/.
+Each file in /proc/net/stat/ contains a header line listing the column names.  These names  are  used  by
+lnstat  as keys for selecting which statistics to print. For every CPU present in the system, a line fol‐
+lows which lists the actual values for each column of the file. lnstat sums these  values  up  (which  in
+fact  are  counters)  before printing them. After each interval, only the difference to the last value is
+%
+gzexe - compress executable files in place
+gzexe name ...
+The  gzexe utility allows you to compress executables in place and have them automatically uncompress and
+execute when you  run  them  (at  a  penalty  in  performance).   For  example  if  you  execute  ``gzexe
+/usr/bin/gdb'' it will create the following two files:
+/usr/bin/gdb~  is  the original file and /usr/bin/gdb is the self-uncompressing executable file.  You can
+remove /usr/bin/gdb~ once you are sure that /usr/bin/gdb works properly.
+%
+recode-sr-latin - convert Serbian text from Cyrillic to Latin script
+recode-sr-latin [OPTION]
+Recode Serbian text from Cyrillic to Latin script.  The input text is read from standard input.  The con‐
+verted text is output to standard output.
+Informative output:
+-h, --help
+display this help and exit
+-V, --version
+output version information and exit
+%
+nice - run a program with modified scheduling priority
+the process).
+Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
+-n, --adjustment=N
+--help display this help and exit
+%
+zforce - force a '.gz' extension on all gzip files
+zforce [ name ...  ]
+%
+lwresd - lightweight resolver daemon
+lwresd [-c config-file] [-C config-file] [-d debug-level] [-f] [-g] [-i pid-file] [-m flag] [-n #cpus]
+lwresd is the daemon providing name lookup services to clients that use the BIND 9 lightweight resolver
+library. It is essentially a stripped-down, caching-only name server that answers queries using the BIND
+9 lightweight resolver protocol rather than the DNS protocol.
+is used for lightweight resolver requests and responses.
+Incoming lightweight resolver requests are decoded by the server which then resolves them using the DNS
+protocol. When the DNS lookup completes, lwresd encodes the answers in the lightweight resolver format
+%
+tput, reset - initialize a terminal or query terminfo database
+tput [-Ttype] capname [parms ... ]
+tput [-Ttype] init
+tput [-Ttype] reset
+tput [-Ttype] longname
+tput -S  <<
+tput -V
+The  tput  utility  uses  the terminfo database to make the values of terminal-dependent capabilities and
+name of the requested terminal type.  The result depends upon the capability's type:
+string
+tput writes the string to the standard output.  No trailing newline is supplied.
+%
+xfs_estimate - estimate the space that an XFS filesystem will take
+xfs_estimate [ -h ] [ -b blocksize ] [ -i logsize ]
+[ -e logsize ] [ -v ] directory ...
+xfs_estimate -V
+For each directory argument, xfs_estimate estimates the space that directory would take if it were copied
+to an XFS filesystem.  xfs_estimate does not cross mount points.  The following definitions are used:
+The xfs_estimate options are:
+-b blocksize
+%
+request-key - Handle key instantiation callback requests from the kernel
+/sbin/request-key <op> <key> <uid> <gid> <threadring> <processring>      <sessionring> [<info>]
+available. The kernel creates a partially set up key and then calls out to this  program  to  instantiate
+it. It is not intended to be called directly.
+ERRORS
+All errors will be logged to the syslog.
+FILES
+/etc/request-key.conf Instantiation handler configuration file.
+/etc/request-key.d/<keytype>.conf Keytype specific configuration file.
+%
+vlock - Virtual Console lock program
+vlock
+vlock [ -a,--all ] [ -c,--current ] [ -h,--help ] [ -v,--version ]
+sion(s)  while  still  allowing other users to use the system on other virtual consoles.  If desired, the
+By default, only the current VC (virtual console) is locked.  With the -a,-all option all VCs are locked.
+The  locked VCs cannot be unlocked without the invoker's password.  And, for the paranoid, vlock makes it
+a trying experience for those attempting to guess the password, so unauthorized access to  session(s)  is
+highly unlikely.
+%
+psfxtable - handle Unicode character tables for console fonts
+psfxtable [-i infont] [-o outfont] [-it intable] [-ot outtable] [-nt]
+psfxtable handles the embedded Unicode character table for .psf format console fonts. It reads a font and
+are links to it.
+standard input.  If no -it or -o or -ot option is given, no input table is read or no output font or out‐
+put table is written.
+By default the output font (if any) will have a Unicode table when either the input font has one,  or  an
+explicit  table (which overrides an input font table) has been provided.  The option -nt causes output of
+%
+kmod - Program to manage Linux Kernel modules
+kmod is a multi-call binary which implements the programs used to control Linux Kernel modules. Most
+users will only run it using its other names.
+-V --version
+Show the program version and exit.
+-h --help
+Show the help message.
+%
+vimdiff - edit two, three or four versions of a file with Vim and show differences
+gvimdiff
+Vimdiff  starts  Vim  on  two  (or three or four) files.  Each file gets its own window.  The differences
+version to another version of the same file.
+When started as gvimdiff the GUI will be started, if available.
+In each window the 'diff' option will be set, which causes the differences to be highlighted.
+%
+dnssec-verify - DNSSEC zone verification tool
+dnssec-verify [-c class] [-E engine] [-I input-format] [-o origin] [-v level] [-V] [-x] [-z] {zonefile}
+dnssec-verify verifies that a zone is fully signed for each algorithm found in the DNSKEY RRset for the
+-c class
+Specifies the DNS class of the zone.
+-E engine
+Specifies the cryptographic hardware to use, when applicable.
+%
+vgcreate — create a volume group
+vgcreate [--addtag Tag] [--alloc AllocationPolicy] [-A|--autobackup {y|n}] [-c|--clustered {y|n}] [--com‐
+datacopies NumberOfCopies|unmanaged|all]  [-s|--physicalextentsize  PhysicalExtentSize[bBsSkKmMgGtTpPeE]]
+[--reportformat  {basic|json}]  [--shared]  [--systemid  SystemID] [-t|--test] [-v|--verbose] [--version]
+cePath.
+%
+expiry - check and enforce password expiration policy
+expiry option
+The expiry command checks (-c) the current password expiration and forces (-f) changes when required. It
+is callable as a normal user command.
+The options which apply to the expiry command are:
+-c, --check
+Check the password expiration of the current user.
+-f, --force
+Force a password change if the current user has an expired password.
+%
+vconfig [lots of long options]
+The  vconfig  program allows you to create and remove vlan-devices on a vlan enabled kernel. Vlan-devices
+are virtual ethernet devices which represents the virtual lans on the physical lan.
+add [interface-name] [vlan-id]
+Creates a vlan-device on [interface-name]. The resulting vlan-device will be called  according  to
+the nameing convention set.
+rem [vlan-device]
+Removes the named vlan-device.
+%
+lvmetad — LVM metadata cache daemon
+lvmetad [-l level[,level...]]  [-p pidfile_path] [-s socket_path] [-t timeout_value] [-f] [-h] [-V] [-?]
+The  lvmetad daemon caches LVM metadata so that LVM commands can read metadata from the cache rather than
+the normal work of the system.  lvmetad can be a disadvantage when disk event notifications from the sys‐
+tem are unreliable.
+lvmetad does not read metadata from disks itself.  Instead, it relies on  an  LVM  command,  like  pvscan
+--cache, to read metadata from disks and send it to lvmetad to be cached.
+New LVM disks that appear on the system must be scanned before lvmetad knows about them.  If lvmetad does
+not know about a disk, then LVM commands using lvmetad will also not know about it.  When disks are added
+or removed from the system, lvmetad must be updated.
+%
+repo-add - package database maintenance utility
+repo-add [options] <path-to-db> <package|delta> [<package|delta> ...]
+repo-remove [options] <path-to-db> <packagename|delta> [<packagename|delta> ...]
+repo-add and repo-remove are two scripts to help build a package database for packages built with
+repo-add will update a package database by reading a built package or package delta file. Multiple
+packages and/or deltas to add can be specified on the command line.
+If a matching “.sig” file is found alongside a package file, the signature will automatically be embedded
+into the database.
+%
+c++filt - Demangle C++ and Java symbols.
+c++filt [-_|--strip-underscore]
+[-n|--no-strip-underscore]
+[-p|--no-params]
+[-t|--types]
+[-i|--no-verbose]
+[-s format|--format=format]
+[--help]  [--version]  [symbol...]
+The C++ and Java languages provide function overloading, which means that you can write many functions
+with the same name, providing that each function takes parameters of different types.  In order to be
+able to distinguish these similarly named functions C++ and Java encode them into a low-level assembler
+%
+pkexec - Execute a command as another user
+pkexec [--version] [--disable-internal-agent] [--help]
+pkexec allows an authorized user to execute PROGRAM as another user. If PROGRAM is not specified, the
+default shell will be run. If username is not specified, then the program will be executed as the
+administrative super user, root.
+RETURN VALUE
+Upon successful completion, the return value is the return value of PROGRAM. If the calling process is
+not authorized or an authorization could not be obtained through authentication or an error occured,
+%
+du - estimate file space usage
+du [OPTION]... [FILE]...
+du [OPTION]... --files0-from=F
+Summarize disk usage of the set of FILEs, recursively for directories.
+Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
+-0, --null
+end each output line with NUL, not newline
+-a, --all
+write counts for all files, not just directories
+%
+There is an additional drawing command available:
+\D'R dh dv'
+Draw  a  rule (solid black rectangle), with one corner at the current position, and the diagonally
+opposite corner at the current position +(dh,dv).  Afterwards the current position will be at  the
+%
+gperl - groff preprocessor for Perl parts in roff files
+gperl [-] [--] [ filespec ....]
+gperl -h|--help
+gperl -v|--version
+Perl part can be stored in groff strings or numerical registers based on the arguments at a final line of
+a Perl part.
+So far, there are only filespec or breaking options.
+filespec are file names or the minus character - character for standard input.  As usual, the argument --
+can be used in order to let all fowllowing arguments mean file names, even if  the  names  begin  with  a
+%
+git - the stupid content tracker
+git [--version] [--help] [-C <path>] [-c <name>=<value>]
+[--exec-path[=<path>]] [--html-path] [--man-path] [--info-path]
+[-p|--paginate|--no-pager] [--no-replace-objects] [--bare]
+[--git-dir=<path>] [--work-tree=<path>] [--namespace=<name>]
+<command> [<args>]
+Git is a fast, scalable, distributed revision control system with an unusually rich command set that
+provides both high-level operations and full access to internals.
+See gittutorial(7) to get started, then see giteveryday(7) for a useful minimum set of commands. The Git
+After you mastered the basic concepts, you can come back to this page to learn what commands Git offers.
+%
+igawk - gawk with include files
+igawk [ all gawk options ] -f program-file [ -- ] file ...
+igawk [ all gawk options ] [ -- ] program-text file ...
+@include getopt.awk
+in  your  program  to  include  the file getopt.awk from either the current directory or one of the other
+directories in the search path.
+%
+nl-classid-lookup - Lookup classid definitions
+nl-classid-lookup [-hv] [-r] [--raw] name
+nl-classid-lookup  searches  the classid database for a matching entry. It is used to resolve qdisc/class
+names to classid values and vice versa.
+-h or --help
+Print help text to console and exit.
+-v or --version
+Print versioning information to console and exit.
+-r or --reverse
+%
+host - DNS lookup utility
+{name} [server]
+host is a simple utility for performing DNS lookups. It is normally used to convert names to IP addresses
+and vice versa. When no arguments or options are given, host prints a short summary of its command line
+arguments and options.
+address.  server is an optional argument which is either the name or IP address of the name server that
+host should query instead of the server or servers listed in /etc/resolv.conf.
+%
+stty - change and print terminal line settings
+stty [-F DEVICE | --file=DEVICE] [SETTING]...
+stty [-F DEVICE | --file=DEVICE] [-a|--all]
+stty [-F DEVICE | --file=DEVICE] [-g|--save]
+Print or change terminal characteristics.
+Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
+-a, --all
+print all current settings in human-readable form
+-g, --save
+print all current settings in a stty-readable form
+%
+rarpd - answer RARP REQUESTs
+arping [-aAvde] [-b bootdir] [interface]
+is found in /etc/ethers database and obtained host name is resolvable to an IP  address  appropriate  for
+attached network, rarpd answers to client with RARPD reply carrying an IP address.
+To  allow multiple boot servers on the network rarpd optionally checks for presence Sun-like bootable im‐
+WARNING
+%
+swapon, swapoff - enable/disable devices and files for paging and swapping
+swapon [options] [specialfile...]
+swapoff [-va] [specialfile...]
+swapon is used to specify devices on which paging and swapping are to take place.
+to indicate a device by label or uuid.
+Calls to swapon normally occur in the system boot scripts making all swap devices available, so that  the
+paging and swapping activity is interleaved across several devices and files.
+swapoff  disables  swapping  on  the specified devices and files.  When the -a flag is given, swapping is
+disabled on all known swap devices and files (as found in /proc/swaps or /etc/fstab).
+%
+dnssec-settime - set the key timing metadata for a DNSSEC key
+dnssec-settime [-f] [-K directory] [-L ttl] [-P date/offset] [-P sync date/offset] [-A date/offset]
+[-R date/offset] [-I date/offset] [-D date/offset] [-D sync date/offset] [-h] [-V]
+[-v level] [-E engine] {keyfile}
+dnssec-settime reads a DNSSEC private key file and sets the key timing metadata as specified by the -P,
+-A, -R, -I, and -D options. The metadata can then be used by dnssec-signzone or other signing software to
+determine when a key is to be published, whether it should be used for signing a zone, etc.
+If none of these options is set on the command line, then dnssec-settime simply prints the key timing
+metadata already stored in the key.
+When key metadata fields are changed, both files of a key pair (Knnnn.+aaa+iiiii.key and
+Knnnn.+aaa+iiiii.private) are regenerated. Metadata fields are stored in the private file. A
+%
+systemd-path - List and query system and user paths
+file-hierarchy(7) available for querying.
+When invoked without arguments, a list of known paths and their current values is shown. When at least
+one argument is passed, the path with this name is queried and its value shown. The variables whose name
+begins with "search-" do not refer to individual paths, but instead to a list of colon-separated search
+paths, in their order of precedence.
+The following options are understood:
+%
+cfdisk - display or manipulate a disk partition table
+cfdisk [options] [device]
+cfdisk is a curses-based program for partitioning any block device.  The default device is /dev/sda.
+functionality  for  CHS  (Cylinder-Head-Sector)  addressing.  CHS has never been important for Linux, and
+this addressing concept does not make any sense for new devices.
+%
+setsid - run a program in a new session
+setsid [options] program [arguments]
+setsid runs a program in a new session.
+-c, --ctty
+Set the controlling terminal to the current one.
+-w, --wait
+Wait  for  the  execution  of the program to end, and return the exit value of this program as the
+return value of setsid.
+-V, --version
+%
+xfs_freeze - suspend access to an XFS filesystem
+xfs_freeze [ -f | -u ] mount-point
+xfs_freeze -V
+xfs_freeze halts new access to the filesystem and creates a stable image on disk.  xfs_freeze is intended
+to be used with volume managers and hardware RAID devices that support the creation of snapshots.
+The mount-point argument is the pathname of the directory where the filesystem is mounted.  The  filesys‐
+The  -f  flag  requests  the  specified XFS filesystem to be frozen from new modifications.  When this is
+selected, all ongoing transactions in the filesystem are allowed to complete, new write system calls  are
+%
+dc - an arbitrary precision calculator
+dc [-V] [--version] [-h] [--help]
+[-e scriptexpression] [--expression=scriptexpression]
+[-f scriptfile] [--file=scriptfile]
+[file ...]
+dc is a reverse-polish desk calculator which supports unlimited precision arithmetic.  It also allows you
+to define and call macros.  Normally dc reads from the standard input; if any command arguments are given
+to  it, they are filenames, and dc reads and executes the contents of the files before reading from stan‐
+dard input.  All normal output is to standard output; all error output is to standard error.
+A reverse-polish calculator stores numbers on a stack.  Entering a number pushes it on the stack.  Arith‐
+metic operations pop arguments off the stack and push the results.
+%
+xfs_mdrestore - restores an XFS metadump image to a filesystem image
+xfs_mdrestore [ -g ] source target
+xfs_mdrestore -V
+filesystem. The source argument specifies the location of the metadump  image  and  the  target  argument
+specifies  the destination for the filesystem image.  If the source is -, then the metadata image is read
+rected to xfs_mdrestore.  The target can be either a file or a device.
+xfs_mdrestore  should  not  be  used  to restore metadata onto an existing filesystem unless you are com‐
+pletely certain the target can be destroyed.
+%
+ssh-keyscan — gather ssh public keys
+ssh-keyscan is a utility for gathering the public ssh host keys of a number of hosts.  It was designed to
+aid in building and verifying ssh_known_hosts files.  ssh-keyscan provides a minimal interface suitable for
+use by shell and perl scripts.
+ssh-keyscan uses non-blocking socket I/O to contact as many hosts as possible in parallel, so it is very
+those hosts are down or do not run ssh.  For scanning, one does not need login access to the machines that
+are being scanned, nor does the scanning process involve any encryption.
+The options are as follows:
+%
+RR in it and it will create a .ds file with the DS RR in it.
+It prints out the basename for this file (K<name>+<alg>+<id>).
+-f     Ignore SEP flag (i.e. make DS records for any key)
+-n     Write the result DS Resource Record to stdout instead of a file
+%
+rev - reverse lines characterwise
+rev [option] [file...]
+The rev utility copies the specified files to standard output, reversing the order of characters in every
+line.  If no files are specified, standard input is read.
+-V, --version
+Display version information and exit.
+-h, --help
+Display help text and exit.
+%
+hostnamectl - Control the system hostname
+all kinds of special characters (e.g. "Lennart's Laptop"), the static hostname which is used to
+initialize the kernel hostname at boot (e.g. "lennarts-laptop"), and the transient hostname which is a
+fallback value received from network configuration. If a static hostname is set, and is valid (something
+other than localhost), then the transient hostname is not used.
+transient hostnames are limited to the usually accepted characters of Internet domain names.
+%
+vim - Vi IMproved, a programmers text editor
+vim [options] [file ..]
+vim [options] -
+vim [options] -t tag
+vim [options] -q [errorfile]
+ex
+view
+gvim gview evim eview
+rvim rview rgvim rgview
+Vim  is  a text editor that is upwards compatible to Vi.  It can be used to edit all kinds of plain text.
+It is especially useful for editing programs.
+%
+dnssec-signzone - DNSSEC zone signing tool
+dnssec-signzone [-a] [-c class] [-d directory] [-D] [-E engine] [-e end-time] [-f output-file] [-g] [-h]
+[-K directory] [-k key] [-L serial] [-l domain] [-M domain] [-i interval]
+[-I input-format] [-j jitter] [-N soa-serial-format] [-o origin] [-O output-format] [-P]
+[-p] [-Q] [-R] [-r randomdev] [-S] [-s start-time] [-T ttl] [-t] [-u] [-v level] [-V]
+dnssec-signzone signs a zone. It generates NSEC and RRSIG records and produces a signed version of the
+zone. The security status of delegations from the signed zone (that is, whether the child zones are
+secure or not) is determined by the presence or absence of a keyset file for each child zone.
+-a
+Verify all generated signatures.
+%
+nl-pktloc-lookup - Lookup packet location definitions
+nl-pktloc-lookup name
+nl-pktloc-lookup --list
+nl-pktloc-lookup searches the packet location database for a matching entry. It is used to resolve packet
+location aliases to their definition, i.e. alignment, layer, offset, and mask.
+-h or --help
+Print help text to console and exit.
+-v or --version
+Print versioning information to console and exit.
+%
+strip - Discard symbols from object files.
+strip [-F bfdname |--target=bfdname]
+[-I bfdname |--input-target=bfdname]
+[-O bfdname |--output-target=bfdname]
+[-s|--strip-all]
+[-S|-g|-d|--strip-debug]
+[--strip-dwo]
+[-K symbolname |--keep-symbol=symbolname]
+[-N symbolname |--strip-symbol=symbolname]
+[-w|--wildcard]
+[-x|--discard-all] [-X |--discard-locals]
+[-R sectionname |--remove-section=sectionname]
+[-o file] [-p|--preserve-dates]
+[-D|--enable-deterministic-archives]
+[-U|--disable-deterministic-archives]
+%
+ldns-keyfetcher - retrieve the DNSSEC DNSKEYs for a zone
+ldns-keyfetcher is used to retrieve the DNSKEYs of a zone.
+First it finds all authoritative nameservers of the zone by tracing it from the root down. All authorita‐
+tive nameservers are then queried (using TCP) for the DNSKEY RRset of the zone apex. If the  results  are
+all the same, the key resource record set is printed.
+-6 Only use IPv6
+%
+makepkg-template - package build templating utility
+makepkg-template [options]
+makepkg-template is a script to ease the work of maintaining multiple similar PKGBUILDs. It allows you to
+move most of the code from the PKGBUILD into a template file and uses markers to allow in-place updating
+of existing PKGBUILDs if the template has been changed.
+Template files can contain any code allowed in a PKGBUILD. You can think of them like external files
+included with "." or "source", but they will be inlined into the PKGBUILD by makepkg-template so you do
+not depend on the template file when building the package.
+Markers are bash comments in the form of:
+%
+chpasswd - update passwords in batch mode
+chpasswd [options]
+The chpasswd command reads a list of user name and password pairs from standard input and uses this
+information to update a group of existing users. Each line is of the format:
+user_name:password
+By default the passwords must be supplied in clear-text, and are encrypted by chpasswd. Also the password
+age will be updated, if present.
+By default, passwords are encrypted by PAM, but (even if not recommended) you can select a different
+encryption method with the -e, -m, or -c options.
+%
+autoheader - Create a template header for configure
+autoheader [OPTION]... [TEMPLATE-FILE]
+Create  a  template  file  of  C  `#define'  statements  for  `configure' to use.  To this end, scan TEM‐
+PLATE-FILE, or `configure.ac' if present, or else `configure.in'.
+-h, --help
+print this help, then exit
+-V, --version
+print version number, then exit
+-v, --verbose
+verbosely report processing
+%
+ldns-gen-zone - read a zonefile and print it while adding DS records and extra RR's
+ldns-gen-zone ZONEFILE
+ldns-gen-zone reads a DNS zone file and prints it.
+It  is  build  for  speed,  not for a nice formatting. The output has one resource record per line and no
+pretty-printing makeup.
+Existing DS records are also not stripped.
+The  idea  is  to  use  this tool for quickly generating a representative artificial zonefile from a real
+zonefile, to use it for testing purposes.
+%
+infocmp - compare or print out terminfo descriptions
+[-v n] [-s d| i| l| c] [-R subset]
+[-w width] [-A directory] [-B directory]
+[termname...]
+infocmp  can  be  used to compare a binary terminfo entry with other terminfo entries, rewrite a terminfo
+description to take advantage of the use= terminfo field, or print out a terminfo  description  from  the
+lowed by the numeric fields, followed by the string fields.
+Default Options
+If no options are specified and zero or one termnames are specified, the -I option will be  assumed.   If
+more than one termname is specified, the -d option will be assumed.
+%
+xz, unxz, xzcat, lzma, unlzma, lzcat - Compress or decompress .xz and .lzma files
+xz [option...]  [file...]
+unxz is equivalent to xz --decompress.
+xzcat is equivalent to xz --decompress --stdout.
+lzma is equivalent to xz --format=lzma.
+unlzma is equivalent to xz --format=lzma --decompress.
+lzcat is equivalent to xz --format=lzma --decompress --stdout.
+When  writing  scripts  that  need  to decompress files, it is recommended to always use the name xz with
+appropriate arguments (xz -d or xz -dc) instead of the names unxz and xzcat.
+%
+damaged filesystem.
+requirement  can be overridden using the -f option, but the resulting image file is very likely not going
+%
+cksum - checksum and count the bytes in a file
+cksum [FILE]...
+cksum [OPTION]
+Print CRC checksum and byte counts of each FILE.
+--help display this help and exit
+--version
+output version information and exit
+Written by Q. Frank Xia.
+%
+the system.
+See the various sub commands below. The following global options can be used:
+-v, --verbose
+Run in verbose mode with debug output.
+-q, --quiet
+%
+-a number
+-s salt
+Use the given salt for the hash calculation. Salt value should be in hexadecimal format.
+-t count
+Use count iterations for the hash calculation.
+%
+pkgdelta - package delta generation utility
+pkgdelta is used to create package delta files between two versions of the same package. These files are
+with the previous versions of packages (in the package cache) to synthesize the upgraded version of the
+--max-delta-size <ratio>
+Only create delta files if the delta is smaller than ratio * package_size. Possible values: 0.0 to
+%
+visudo — edit the sudoers file
+visudo [-chqsV] [-f sudoers] [-x output_file]
+against multiple simultaneous edits, provides basic sanity checks, and checks for parse errors.  If the
+sudoers file is currently being edited you will receive a message to try again later.
+honor the VISUAL or EDITOR environment variables unless they contain an editor in the aforementioned edi‐
+tors list.  However, if visudo is configured with the --with-env-editor option or the env_editor Default
+be a security hole since it allows the user to execute any program they wish simply by setting VISUAL or
+EDITOR.
+%
+fsck - check and repair a Linux filesystem
+fsck [-lsAVRTMNP] [-r [fd]] [-C [fd]] [-t fstype] [filesystem...] [--] [fs-specific-options]
+fsck  is used to check and optionally repair one or more Linux filesystems.  filesys can be a device name
+handle filesystems on different physical disk drives in parallel to  reduce  the  total  amount  of  time
+needed to check all of them.
+If  no  filesystems  are  specified  on  the  command line, and the -A option is not specified, fsck will
+The exit code returned by fsck is the sum of the following conditions:
+%
+zcmp, zdiff - compare compressed files
+Zcmp  and zdiff are used to invoke the cmp or the diff program on files compressed via gzip.  All options
+fed to cmp or diff.  The input files are not modified.  The exit status from cmp or diff is preserved.
+BUGS
+%
+chattr - change file attributes on a Linux file system
+chattr [ -RVf ] [ -v version ] [ -p project ] [ mode ] files...
+chattr changes the file attributes on a Linux file system.
+The format of a symbolic mode is +-=[aAcCdDeijsStTu].
+The  operator '+' causes the selected attributes to be added to the existing attributes of the files; '-'
+causes them to be removed; and '=' causes them to be the only attributes that the files have.
+The letters 'aAcCdDeijsStTu' select the new attributes for the files: append only (a), no  atime  updates
+(A),  compressed (c), no copy on write (C), no dump (d), synchronous directory updates (D), extent format
+(e), immutable (i), data journalling (j), project hierarchy (P), secure deletion (s), synchronous updates
+(S), no tail-merging (t), top of directory hierarchy (T), and undeletable (u).
+%
+scmp_sys_resolver - Resolve system calls
+in the optional ARCH argument.  If the architecture is not supplied on the command line then  the  native
+architecture  is  used.  If the "-t" argument is specified along with a system call name, then the system
+call will be translated as necessary for the given architecture.  The "-t" argument has no  effect  if  a
+system call number is specified.
+In some combinations of architecture and system call, a negative system call number will be displayed.  A
+negative system call number indicates that the system call is not defined for the given architecture  and
+is treated in a special manner by libseccomp depending on the operation.
+-a ARCH
+%
+pfbtops - translate a PostScript font in .pfb format to ASCII
+pfbtops [ -v ] [ pfb_file ]
+pfbtops  translates  a  PostScript font in .pfb format to ASCII, splitting overlong lines in text packets
+into smaller chunks.  If pfb_file is omitted the pfb file will be read  from  the  standard  input.   The
+ASCII  format  PostScript  font  will be written on the standard output.  PostScript fonts for MS-DOS are
+normally supplied in .pfb format.
+The resulting ASCII format PostScript font  can  be  used  with  groff.   It  must  first  be  listed  in
+-v     Print the version number.
+%
+fsck.xfs - do nothing, successfully
+fsck.xfs [ filesys ... ]
+exits with a zero exit status.
+If you wish to check the consistency of an XFS filesystem, or repair a damaged or corrupt XFS filesystem,
+FILES
+/etc/fstab.
+%
+getfattr - get extended attributes of filesystem objects
+getfattr [-hRLP] -n name [-e en] pathname...
+getfattr [-hRLP] -d [-e en] [-m pattern] pathname...
+For  each  file, getfattr displays the file name, and the set of extended attribute names (and optionally
+values) which are associated with that file.
+The output format of getfattr -d is as follows:
+%
+gdbmtool - examine and modify a GDBM database
+gdbmtool [-lmNnqrs] [-b SIZE] [-c SIZE] [-f FILE] [--block-size=SIZE]
+[--cache-size=SIZE] [--file FILE]  [--newdb] [--no-lock]
+[--no-mmap] [--norc]
+[--quiet] [--read-only] [--synchronize] [DBFILE]
+gdbmtool [-Vh] ][--help] [--usage] [--version]
+The gdbmtool utility allows you to view and modify an existing GDBM database or to create a new one.
+The  DBFILE  argument  supplies  the  name  of  the  database to open.  If not supplied, the default name
+junk.gdbm is used instead.  If the named database does not exist, it will be created.  An existing  data‐
+base can be cleared (i.e. all records removed from it) using the --newdb option (see below).
+%
+logrotate ‐ rotates, compresses, and mails system logs
+logrotate [-dv] [-f|--force] [-s|--state file] config_file ..
+logrotate  is  designed  to  ease administration of systems that generate large numbers of log files.  It
+daily, weekly, monthly, or when it grows too large.
+Normally,  logrotate  is  run  as  a  daily cron job.  It will not modify a log more than once in one day
+unless the criterion for that log is based on the log's size and logrotate is being run  more  than  once
+each day, or unless the -f or --force option is used.
+given in earlier files, so the order in which the logrotate config files are listed is  important.   Nor‐
+mally,  a  single config file which includes any other config files which are needed should be used.  See
+%
+kadmin  [-O|-N]  [-r realm] [-p principal] [-q query] [[-c cache_name]|[-k [-t keytab]]|-n] [-w password]
+[-s admin_server[:port]]
+kadmin.local [-r realm] [-p principal] [-q query] [-d dbname] [-e enc:salt ...]  [-m] [-x db_args]
+vide  nearly  identical  functionalities;  the  difference is that kadmin.local directly accesses the KDC
+man  page  will  use "kadmin" to refer to both versions.  kadmin provides for the maintenance of Kerberos
+principals, password policies, and service key tables (keytabs).
+The remote kadmin client uses Kerberos to authenticate  to  kadmind  using  the  service  principal  kad‐
+min/ADMINHOST  (where ADMINHOST is the fully-qualified hostname of the admin server) or kadmin/admin.  If
+%
+grub-editenv - edit GRUB environment block
+Tool to edit environment block.
+Commands:
+create Create a blank environment block file.
+list   List the current variables.
+Set variables.
+%
+pwd - print name of current/working directory
+pwd [OPTION]...
+Print the full filename of the current working directory.
+-L, --logical
+use PWD from environment, even if it contains symlinks
+-P, --physical
+avoid all symlinks
+--help display this help and exit
+--version
+%
+setleds - set the keyboard leds
+setleds [-v] [-L] [-D] [-F] [{+|-}num] [{+|-}caps] [{+|-}scroll]
+Setleds  reports  and  changes  the  led flag settings of a VT (namely NumLock, CapsLock and ScrollLock).
+Without arguments, setleds prints the current settings.  With arguments, it sets or clears the  indicated
+flags  (and leaves the others unchanged). The settings before and after the change are reported if the -v
+flag is given.
+The led flag settings are specific for each VT (and the VT corresponding to stdin is used).
+by the keyboard leds).
+With  option  -D,  setleds will change both the VT flags and their default settings (so that a subsequent
+%
+jfs_mkfs - create a JFS formatted partition
+jfs_mkfs [options] device [ blocks ]
+jfs_mkfs is used to create (format) a JFS partition.  jfs_mkfs must be run as root.
+system and/or JFS journal will be created.  blocks is the number of blocks to be used for the  file  sys‐
+tem.  If omitted, jfs_mkfs automatically figures the file system size.
+WARNING
+jfs_mkfs will destroy all data on the specified device!
+%
+getopt - parse command options (enhanced)
+getopt optstring parameters
+getopt [options] [--] optstring parameters
+getopt [options] -o|--options optstring [options] [--] parameters
+getopt  is used to break up (parse) options in command lines for easy parsing by shell procedures, and to
+The parameters getopt is called with can be divided into two parts: options which modify the  way  getopt
+is  not  an  option argument, or after the first occurrence of '--'.  If no '-o' or '--options' option is
+found in the first part, the first parameter of the second part is used as the short options string.
+%
+lvchange — change attributes of a logical volume
+lvchange [-a|--activate [a][e|s|l]{y|n}] [--activationmode {complete|degraded|partial}] [--addtag Tag]
+[-K|--ignoreactivationskip] [-k|--setactivationskip {y|n}] [--alloc AllocationPolicy] [-A|--autobackup
+{y|n}] [--rebuild PhysicalVolume] [--cachemode {passthrough|writeback|writethrough}] [--cachepolicy Pol‐
+[--deltag Tag] [--detachprofile] [--discards {ignore|nopassdown|passdown}] [--errorwhenfull {y|n}]
+[-h|-?|--help] [--ignorelockingfailure] [--ignoremonitoring] [--ignoreskippedcluster] [--metadataprofile
+{y|n} [--major Major] [--minor Minor]] [--poll {y|n}] [--[raid]maxrecoveryrate Rate] [--[raid]minrecov‐
+eryrate Rate] [--[raid]syncaction {check|repair}] [--[raid]writebehind IOCount] [--[raid]writemostly
+PhysicalVolume[:{y|n|t}]] [-r|--readahead {ReadAheadSectors|auto|none}] [--refresh] [--reportformat
+{basic|json}] [--resync] [-S|--select Selection] [--sysinit] [-t|--test] [-v|--verbose] [-Z|--zero {y|n}]
+[LogicalVolumePath...]
+%
+df - report file system disk space usage
+df [OPTION]... [FILE]...
+file system containing each file name argument.  If no file name is given, the  space  available  on  all
+If an argument is the absolute file name of a disk device node containing a mounted file system, df shows
+version of df cannot show the space available on unmounted file systems, because on most kinds of systems
+doing so requires very nonportable intimate knowledge of file system structures.
+%
+depmod - Generate modules.dep and map files.
+depmod [-b basedir] [-e] [-E Module.symvers] [-F System.map] [-n] [-v] [-A] [-P prefix] [-w] [version]
+depmod [-e] [-E Module.symvers] [-F System.map] [-m] [-n] [-v] [-P prefix] [-w] [version] [filename...]
+Linux kernel modules can provide services (called "symbols") for other modules to use (using one of the
+EXPORT_SYMBOL variants in the code). If a second module uses this symbol, that second module clearly
+depends on the first module. These dependencies can get quite complex.
+depmod creates a list of module dependencies by reading each module under /lib/modules/version and
+determining what symbols it exports and what symbols it needs. By default, this list is written to
+modules.dep, and a binary hashed version named modules.dep.bin, in the same directory. If filenames are
+given on the command line, only those modules are examined (which is rarely useful unless all modules are
+listed).  depmod also creates a list of symbols provided by modules in the file named modules.symbols and
+%
+peekfd - peek at file descriptors of running processes
+[-h,--help] pid [fd] [fd] ...
+peekfd attaches to a running process and intercepts all reads and writes to file  descriptors.   You  can
+specify the desired file descriptor numbers or dump all of them.
+-n     Do not display headers indicating the source of the bytes dumped.
+-c     Also dump the requested file descriptor activity in any new child processes that are created.
+%
+faillog - display faillog records or set login failure limits
+faillog [options]
+faillog displays the contents of the failure log database (/var/log/faillog). It can also set the failure
+counters and limits. When faillog is run without arguments, it only displays the faillog records of the
+users who had a login failure.
+The options which apply to the faillog command are:
+-a, --all
+Display (or act on) faillog records for all users having an entry in the faillog database.
+The range of users can be restricted with the -u option.
+%
+btrfs-inspect-internal - query various internal information
+btrfs inspect-internal <subcommand> <args>
+simple UI to an ioctl or a more complex query that assembles the result from several internal structures.
+The latter usually requires calls to privileged ioctls.
+dump-super [options] <device> [device...]
+(replaces the standalone tool btrfs-show-super)
+Show btrfs superblock information stored on given devices in textual form. By default the first
+superblock is printed, more details about all copies or additional backup data can be printed.
+%
+login - begin session on the system
+login [ -p ] [ -h host ] [ -H ] [ -f username | username ]
+login is used when signing onto a system.  If no argument is given, login prompts for the username.
+The user is then prompted for a password, where approprate.  Echoing is disabled to prevent revealing the
+password.  Only a small number of password failures are permitted before login exits and  the  communica‐
+tions link is severed.
+proceeding.  He will be forced to provide his old  password  and  the  new  password  before  continuing.
+The user and group ID will be set according to their values in the /etc/passwd file.  There is one excep‐
+%
+grub-mknetdir - prepare a GRUB netboot directory.
+grub-mknetdir [OPTION...]
+--compress=no|xz|gz|lzo
+compress GRUB files [optional]
+-d, --directory=DIR
+use images and modules under DIR [default=/usr/lib/grub/<platform>]
+--fonts=FONTS
+install FONTS [default=unicode]
+--install-modules=MODULES
+install only MODULES and their dependencies [default=all]
+%
+Reads  an EQN equation (one line) as input; produces an image file (by default in Portable Network Graph‐
+ics format) suitable for the Web as output.
+macros; nor do you need to have dollar-sign or other delimiters around the equation.
+The  output  image will be clipped to the smallest possible bounding box that contains all the black pix‐
+border, force the background transparent, set the image's pixel density, or perform other  useful  trans‐
+formations.
+%
+shutdown - Halt, power-off or reboot the machine
+wall message to be sent to all logged-in users before going down.
+specified number of minutes m from now.  "now" is an alias for "+0", i.e. for triggering an immediate
+%
+hddtemp - Utility to monitor hard drive temperature
+hddtemp [options] [type:]disk...
+hddtemp  will give you the temperature of your hard drive by reading Self-Monitoring Analysis and Report‐
+ing Technology (S.M.A.R.T.)  information on drives that support this feature.  Only  modern  hard  drives
+have  a  temperature  sensor.   hddtemp  supports  reading  S.M.A.R.T.  information from SCSI drives too.
+hddtemp can work as simple command line tool or as a daemon.
+You can specify one or more device drive path, where each path can be prefixed with  a  type  like  PATA,
+SATA or SCSI to force hddtemp too use one of these type (because detection can fail).
+The  program follows the usual GNU command line syntax, with long options starting with two dashes (`-').
+A summary of options is included below.
+%
+dhcpcd — a DHCP client
+[-F, --fqdn FQDN] [-f, --config file] [-h, --hostname hostname] [-I, --clientid clientid]
+[-i, --vendorclassid vendorclassid] [-j, --logfile logfile] [-l, --leasetime seconds]
+[-m, --metric metric] [-O, --nooption option] [-o, --option option] [-Q, --require option]
+[-r, --request address] [-S, --static value] [-s, --inform address[/cidr]] [--inform6]
+[-t, --timeout seconds] [-u, --userclass class] [-v, --vendor code, value]
+[-X, --blacklist address[/cidr]] [-Z, --denyinterfaces pattern] [-z, --allowinterfaces pattern]
+[--inactive] [interface] [...]
+dhcpcd -n, --rebind [interface]
+dhcpcd -k, --release [interface]
+dhcpcd -U, --dumplease interface
+dhcpcd --version
+dhcpcd -x, --exit [interface]
+%
+grodvi - convert groff output to TeX dvi format
+grodvi [ -dlv ] [ -Fdir ] [ -ppapersize ] [ -wn ] [ files... ]
+It is possible to have whitespace between a command line option and its parameter.
+grodvi is a driver for groff that produces TeX dvi format.  Normally it should be run by groff -Tdvi.
+The dvi file generated by grodvi can be printed by any correctly-written dvi driver.  The troff drawing
+\D commands will not produce any output.
+There is an additional drawing command available:
+%
+znew -   recompress .Z files to .gz files
+znew [ -ftv9PK] [ name.Z ...  ]
+Znew recompresses files from .Z (compress) format to .gz (gzip) format.  If you want to recompress a file
+already in gzip format, rename the file to force a .Z extension then apply znew.
+-f     Force recompression from .Z to .gz format even if a .gz file already exists.
+-t     Tests the new files before deleting originals.
+-v     Verbose. Display the name and percentage reduction for each file compressed.
+-9     Use the slowest compression method (optimal compression).
+%
+od - dump files in octal and other formats
+od [OPTION]... [FILE]...
+od [-abcdfilosx]... [FILE] [[+]OFFSET[.][b]]
+od --traditional [OPTION]... [FILE] [[+]OFFSET[.][b] [+][LABEL][.][b]]
+Write  an unambiguous representation, octal bytes by default, of FILE to standard output.  With more than
+one FILE argument, concatenate them in the listed order to form the input.
+With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.
+If first and second call formats both apply, the second format is assumed if the last operand begins with
+at first byte printed, incremented when dump is progressing.  For OFFSET and LABEL, a  0x  or  0X  prefix
+%
+thin_ls - List thin volumes within a pool.
+thin_ls [options] {metadata device}
+thin_ls  Displays infomation about thin volumes in a pool.  Pass the metadata device on the command line,
+not the pool device.
+-o, --format
+Give a comma separated list of the fields to be output.  Valid  fields  are:  DEV,  MAPPED_BLOCKS,
+EXCLUSIVE_BLOCKS,  SHARED_BLOCKS, MAPPED_SECTORS, EXCLUSIVE_SECTORS, SHARED_SECTORS, MAPPED_BYTES,
+EXCLUSIVE_BYTES, SHARED_BYTES, MAPPED, EXCLUSIVE, SHARED, TRANSACTION CREATE_TIME, SNAP_TIME
+%
+pwconv, pwunconv, grpconv, grpunconv - convert to and from shadow passwords and groups
+pwconv [options]
+pwunconv [options]
+grpconv [options]
+grpunconv [options]
+The pwconv command creates shadow from passwd and an optionally existing shadow.
+The pwunconv command creates passwd from passwd and shadow and then removes shadow.
+The grpconv command creates gshadow from group and an optionally existing gshadow.
+%
+pivot_root - change the root filesystem
+pivot_root new_root put_old
+pivot_root  moves the root file system of the current process to the directory put_old and makes new_root
+the latter for further details.
+pivot_root and chroot are in the current PATH:
+cd new_root
+pivot_root . put_old
+exec chroot . command
+%
+| --defcktname | --cflags | --libs [libraries]]
+installed Kerberos libraries.
+--all  prints the version, vendor, prefix, and exec-prefix.
+--version
+prints the version number of the Kerberos installation.
+%
+chcon - change file security context
+chcon [OPTION]... CONTEXT FILE...
+chcon [OPTION]... [-u USER] [-r ROLE] [-l RANGE] [-t TYPE] FILE...
+chcon [OPTION]... --reference=RFILE FILE...
+Change  the SELinux security context of each FILE to CONTEXT.  With --reference, change the security con‐
+text of each FILE to that of RFILE.
+Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
+--dereference
+affect the referent of each symbolic link (this is the default), rather  than  the  symbolic  link
+itself
+%
+curl - transfer a URL
+curl [options] [URL...]
+curl  is  a  tool to transfer data from or to a server, using one of the supported protocols (DICT, FILE,
+SMTP, SMTPS, TELNET and TFTP). The command is designed to work without user interaction.
+curl  offers  a  busload of useful tricks like proxy support, user authentication, FTP upload, HTTP post,
+SSL connections, cookies, file transfer resume, Metalink, and more. As you will see below, the number  of
+features will make your head spin!
+URL
+%
+setkeycodes - load kernel scancode-to-keycode mapping table entries
+setkeycodes scancode keycode ...
+The  setkeycodes  command reads its arguments two at a time, each pair of arguments consisting of a scan‐
+code (given in hexadecimal) and a keycode (given in decimal). For each such pair,  it  tells  the  kernel
+keyboard driver to map the specified scancode to the specified keycode.
+duce scancodes that the kernel does not recognize.
+THEORY
+The usual PC keyboard produces a series of scancodes for each key press and key release.  (Scancodes  are
+stream of keycodes (key press/release events).  (Keycodes are shown by showkey.)  Apart from a few  scan‐
+%
+tar — manipulate tape archives
+tar [bundled-flags ⟨args⟩] [⟨file⟩ | ⟨pattern⟩ ...]
+tar {-c} [options] [files | directories]
+tar {-r | -u} -f archive-file [options] [files | directories]
+tar {-t | -x} [options] [patterns]
+zip, jar, ar, xar, rpm, 7-zip, and ISO 9660 cdrom images and can create tar, pax, cpio, ar, zip, 7-zip, and
+shar archives.
+torical implementations.  See COMPATIBILITY below for details.
+The other synopsis forms show the preferred usage.  The first option to tar is a mode indicator from the
+%
+idnconv - codeset converter for named.conf and zone master files
+idnconv [options..] [file...]
+idnconv  is  a  codeset  converter for named configuration files and zone master files.  idnconv performs
+codeset conversion specified either by the command-line arguments  or  by  the  configuration  file,  and
+writes the converted text to stdout.
+If file name is specified, idnconv converts the contents of the file.  Otherwise, idnconv converts stdin.
+able as a general codeset converter.
+OPERATION MODES
+idnconv has two operation modes.
+%
+pkcheck - Check whether a process is authorized
+pkcheck [--version] [--help]
+pkcheck [--list-temp]
+pkcheck [--revoke-temp]
+pkcheck --action-id action {--process { pid | pid,pid-start-time | pid,pid-start-time,uid } |
+--system-bus-name busname} [--allow-user-interaction] [--enable-internal-agent]
+[--detail key value...]
+pkcheck is used to check whether a process, specified by either --process (see below) or
+--system-bus-name, is authorized for action. The --detail option can be used zero or more times to pass
+details about action. If --allow-user-interaction is passed, pkcheck blocks while waiting for
+%
+ldns-walk - Retrieve the contents of a DNSSEC signed zone
+ldns-walk [ OPTION ] ZONE
+ldns-walk  is  used  to retrieve the contents of a DNSSEC signed zone.  It does this through NSEC-walking
+(following the chain of NSEC records) and 'guessing' the next non-existent owner name for each NSEC.
+can be circumvented by querying the authoritative nameserver directly (with the @ argument).
+Of course the nameserver that is used must be DNSSEC-aware.
+%
+ddns-confgen - ddns key generation tool
+tsig-keygen [-a algorithm] [-h] [-r randomfile] [name]
+ddns-confgen [-a algorithm] [-h] [-k keyname] [-q] [-r randomfile] [-s name | -z zone]
+tsig-keygen and ddns-confgen are invocation methods for a utility that generates keys for use in TSIG
+signing. The resulting keys can be used, for example, to secure dynamic DNS updates to a zone or for the
+rndc command channel.
+When run as tsig-keygen, a domain name can be specified on the command line which will be used as the
+name of the generated key. If no name is specified, the default is tsig-key.
+When run as ddns-confgen, the generated key is accompanied by configuration text and instructions that
+can be used with nsupdate and named when setting up dynamic DNS, including an example update-policy
+%
+gio - GIO commandline tool
+gio version
+gio cat LOCATION...
+gio copy [OPTION...] SOURCE... DESTINATION
+gio info [OPTION...] LOCATION...
+gio list [OPTION...] [LOCATION...]
+gio mime MIMETYPE [HANDLER]
+%
+dbus-daemon - Message bus daemon
+dbus-daemon
+dbus-daemon [--version] [--session] [--system] [--config-file=FILE] [--print-address [=DESCRIPTOR]]
+[--print-pid [=DESCRIPTOR]] [--fork]
+dbus-daemon is the D-Bus message bus daemon. See http://www.freedesktop.org/software/dbus/ for more
+information about the big picture. D-Bus is first a library that provides one-to-one communication
+between any two applications; dbus-daemon is an application that uses this library to implement a message
+bus daemon. Multiple programs connect to the message bus daemon and can exchange messages with one
+another.
+There are two standard message bus instances: the systemwide message bus (installed on many systems as
+the "messagebus" init service) and the per-user-login-session message bus (started each time a user logs
+%
+thin_check - validate thin provisioning metadata on device or file
+thin_check [options] {device|file}
+thin_check  checks  thin provisioning metadata created by the device-mapper thin provisioning target on a
+device or file.
+-q, --quiet
+Suppress output messages, return only exit code.
+-h, --help
+Print help and exit.
+%
+jfs_fsck - initiate replay of the JFS transaction log, and check and repair a JFS formatted device
+jfs_fsck [ -afnpvV ] [ -j journal_device ] [ --omit_journal_replay ] [ --replay_journal_only ] device
+jfs_fsck  is used to replay the JFS transaction log, check a JFS formatted device for errors, and fix any
+errors found.
+jfs_fsck must be run as root.
+WARNING
+jfs_fsck should only be used to check an unmounted file system or a file  system  that  is  mounted  READ
+ONLY.  Using jfs_fsck to check a file system mounted other than READ ONLY could seriously damage the file
+system!
+%
+cache_restore - restore cache metadata file to device or file
+cache_restore [options] -i {device|file} -o {device|file}
+cache_restore  restores  cache metadata created by the respective device-mapper target dumped into an XML
+device  or  file.   If restored to a metadata device , the metadata can be processed by the device-mapper
+target.
+-i, --input {device|file}
+Input file or device with metadata.
+-o, --output {device|file}
+%
+btrfstune - tune various filesystem parameters
+btrfstune [options] <dev> [<dev>...]
+btrfstune can be used to enable, disable or set various filesystem parameters. The filesystem must be
+unmounted.
+have kernel support for the features. You can find a complete list of features and kernel version of
+their introduction at https://btrfs.wiki.kernel.org/index.php/Changelog#By_feature . Also, the manual
+Some of the features could be enabled on a mounted filesystem. Please refer to the respective section in
+%
+script - make typescript of terminal session
+script [options] [file]
+script makes a typescript of everything displayed on your terminal.  It is useful for students who need a
+hardcopy record of an interactive session as proof of an  assignment,  as  the  typescript  file  can  be
+If the argument file is given, script saves the dialogue in this file.  If no filename is given, the dia‐
+logue is saved in the file typescript.
+-a, --append
+Append the output to file or to typescript, retaining the prior contents.
+%
+btrfs-find-root - filter to find btrfs root
+btrfs-find-root [options] <dev>
+btrfs-find-root is used to find the satisfied root, you can filter by root tree’s objectid, generation,
+level.
+-a
+Search through all the metadata extents, even the root is already found.
+-g <generation>
+Filter root tree by it’s original transaction id, tree root’s generation in default.
+-o <objectid>
+%
+rshd - Remote shell server
+rshd [OPTION...]
+Remote shell server.
+-a, --verify-hostname
+ask hostname for verification
+-l, --no-rhosts
+ignore .rhosts file
+-L, --log-sessions
+log successful logins
+%
+free - Display amount of free and used memory in the system
+free [options]
+free  displays  the  total amount of free and used physical and swap memory in the system, as well as the
+buffers and caches used by the kernel. The information is gathered by  parsing  /proc/meminfo.  The  dis‐
+played columns are:
+total  Total installed memory (MemTotal and SwapTotal in /proc/meminfo)
+used   Used memory (calculated as total - free - buffers - cache)
+free   Unused memory (MemFree and SwapFree in /proc/meminfo)
+shared Memory used (mostly) by tmpfs (Shmem in /proc/meminfo)
+%
+tfmtodit - create font files for use with groff -Tdvi
+tfmtodit [ -sv ] [ -ggf_file ] [ -kskewchar ] tfm_file map_file font
+tfmtodit creates a font file for use with groff -Tdvi.  tfm_file is the name of the TeX font metric file
+for the font.  map_file is a file giving the groff names for characters in the font; this file should
+consist of a sequence of lines of the form:
+groff names of the character.  If a character has no groff names but exists in the tfm file, then it will
+be put in the groff font file as an unnamed character.  font is the name of the groff font file.  The
+groff font file is written to font.
+%
+smartd - SMART Disk Monitoring Daemon
+smartd [options]
+other platforms.]
+smartd is a daemon that monitors the Self-Monitoring, Analysis and Reporting  Technology  (SMART)  system
+built  into  most  ATA/SATA  and SCSI/SAS hard drives and solid-state drives.  The purpose of SMART is to
+monitor the reliability of the hard drive and predict drive failures, and to carry out different types of
+lier standards (see REFERENCES below).
+smartd will attempt to enable SMART monitoring on ATA devices (equivalent to smartctl -s  on)  and  polls
+%
+lscpu - display information about the CPU architecture
+lscpu [-a|-b|-c] [-x] [-s directory] [-e[=list]|-p[=list]]
+lscpu -h|-V
+lscpu gathers CPU architecture information from sysfs, /proc/cpuinfo and any applicable architecture-spe‐
+cific libraries (e.g. librtas on Powerpc).  The command output can be optimized for parsing or  for  easy
+readability  by humans.  The information includes, for example, the number of CPUs, threads, cores, sock‐
+ets, and Non-Uniform Memory Access (NUMA) nodes.  There is also information  about  the  CPU  caches  and
+cache sharing, family, model, bogoMIPS, byte order, and stepping.
+In virtualized environments, the CPU architecture information displayed reflects the configuration of the
+guest operating system which is typically different from the physical (host)  system.   On  architectures
+that  support  retrieving physical topology information, lscpu also displays the number of physical sock‐
+ets, chips, cores in the host system.
+%
+ldns-mx - print out the mx record(s) for a domain
+ldns-mx DOMAIN
+ldns-mx is used to print out mx information of a domain.
+ldns-mx has no options.
+Written by the ldns team as an example for ldns usage.
+REPORTING BUGS
+Report bugs to <ldns-team@nlnetlabs.nl>.
+%
+bash - GNU Bourne-Again SHell
+bash [options] [command_string | file]
+Bash is an sh-compatible command language interpreter that executes commands read from the standard input
+or from a file.  Bash also incorporates useful features from the Korn and C shells (ksh and csh).
+Bash is intended to be a conformant implementation of the Shell and Utilities portion of the  IEEE  POSIX
+All  of  the  single-character shell options documented in the description of the set builtin command can
+%
+fortune - print a random, hopefully interesting, adage
+fortune [-acefilosw] [-n length] [ -m pattern] [[n%] file/dir/all]
+When  fortune  is run with no arguments it prints out a random epigram. Epigrams are divided into several
+categories, where each category is sub-divided into those which are potentially offensive and those which
+are not.
+Options
+The options are as follows:
+-a     Choose  from all lists of maxims, both offensive and not.  (See the -o option for more information
+on offensive fortunes.)
+-c     Show the cookie file from which the fortune came.
+%
+ldns-chaos - give some information about a nameserver
+ldns-chaos  retrieves  all  the  addresses  of  the nameserver and then queries each address for its ver‐
+sion.bind and hostname.bind.
+ldns-chaos is a bit more complex than ldns-mx.
+ldns-chaos has no options.
+Written by the ldns team as an example for ldns usage.
+%
+utmpdump - dump UTMP and WTMP files in raw format
+utmpdump [options] [filename]
+utmpdump  is  a simple program to dump UTMP and WTMP files in raw format, so they can be examined.  utmp‐
+dump reads from stdin unless a filename is passed.
+-f, --follow
+Output appended data as the file grows.
+-o, --output file
+Write command output to file instead of standard output.
+-r, --reverse
+%
+halt, poweroff, reboot - Halt, power-off or reboot the machine
+The following options are understood:
+--help
+Print a short help text and exit.
+%
+dmesg - print or control the kernel ring buffer
+dmesg [options]
+dmesg --clear
+dmesg --read-clear [options]
+dmesg --console-level level
+dmesg --console-on
+dmesg --console-off
+dmesg is used to examine or control the kernel ring buffer.
+The default action is to display all messages from the kernel ring buffer.
+%
+git-receive-pack - Receive what is pushed into the repository
+git-receive-pack <directory>
+Invoked by git send-pack and updates the repository with the information fed from the remote end.
+send-pack side, and the program pair is meant to be used to push updates to remote repository. For pull
+speaking, it is the local end git-receive-pack runs, but to the user who is sitting at the send-pack end,
+it is updating the remote. Confused?)
+There are other real-world examples of using update and post-update hooks found in the
+%
+efibootmgr - manipulate the EFI Boot Manager
+... ] [ -O ] [ -p PART ] [ -q ] [ -t seconds ] [ -T ] [ -u ] [ -v ] [ -V ] [ -w ] [ -@ file ]
+efibootmgr  is  a userspace application used to modify the Intel Extensible Firmware Interface (EFI) Boot
+running boot option, and more.
+<URL:http://developer.intel.com>
+/sys/firmware/efi/vars or /sys/firmware/efi/efivars/.
+%
+link - call the link function to create a link to a file
+link OPTION
+--help display this help and exit
+--version
+output version information and exit
+Written by Michael Stone.
+%
+external-journal ] [ -E extended_options ] [ -z undo_file ] device
+use  a  journal, if the system has been shut down uncleanly without any errors, normally, after replaying
+the committed transactions  in the journal, the file system should  be  marked  as  clean.    Hence,  for
+indicates that further checking is required.
+-n  option is specified, and -c, -l, or -L options are not specified.   However, even if it is safe to do
+%
+which - shows the full path of (shell) commands.
+which [options] [--] programname [...]
+Which takes one or more arguments. For each of its arguments it prints to stdout the full path of the
+executables that would have been executed when this argument had been entered at the shell prompt. It
+does this by searching for an executable or script in the directories listed in the environment variable
+--all, -a
+Print all matching executables in PATH, not just the first.
+%
+git-shell - Restricted login shell for Git-only SSH access
+chsh -s $(command -v git-shell) <user>
+git clone <user>@localhost:/path/to/repo.git
+ssh <user>@localhost
+server-side Git commands implementing the pull/push functionality, plus custom commands present in a
+subdirectory named git-shell-commands in the user’s home directory.
+git shell accepts the following commands after the -c option:
+git receive-pack <argument>, git upload-pack <argument>, git upload-archive <argument>
+Call the corresponding server-side command to support the client’s git push, git fetch, or git
+%
+lnstat - unified linux network statistics
+lnstat [options]
+lnstat  is a generalized and more feature-complete replacement for the old rtstat program. It is commonly
+used to periodically print a selection of statistical values exported by  the  kernel.   In  addition  to
+routing  cache  statistics,  it  supports  any  kind of statistics the linux kernel exports via a file in
+/proc/net/stat/.
+Each file in /proc/net/stat/ contains a header line listing the column names.  These names  are  used  by
+lnstat  as keys for selecting which statistics to print. For every CPU present in the system, a line fol‐
+lows which lists the actual values for each column of the file. lnstat sums these  values  up  (which  in
+fact  are  counters)  before printing them. After each interval, only the difference to the last value is
+%
+update-leap - leap-seconds file manager/updater
+update-leap [-flags] [-flag [value]] [--option-name[[=| ]value]]
+All arguments must be options.
+update-leap  will  validate  the file currently on the local system and if necessary, updates leap-second
+definition file.
+tion can be specified on the command line.
+If  the  file  does  not  exist, is not valid, has expired, or is expiring soon, a new copy will be down‐
+loaded.  If the new copy validates, it is installed and NTP is (optionally) restarted.
+%
+idn [OPTION]... [STRINGS]...
+Command line interface to the internationalized domain name library.
+All  strings  are  expected to be encoded in the preferred charset used by your locale.  Use `--debug' to
+find out what this charset is.  You can  override  the  charset  used  by  setting  environment  variable
+CHARSET.
+To  process  a string that starts with `-', for example `-foo', use `--' to signal the end of parameters,
+as in `idn --quiet -a -- -foo'.
+%
+will NOT list all the  users  in  /etc/passwd,  shadow,  PAM,  etc.  only  those  created  by  SASL  (via
+-f file
+use file for sasldb
+%
+xzdec, lzmadec - Small .xz and .lzma decompressors
+xzdec [option...]  [file...]
+lzmadec [option...]  [file...]
+xzdec is a liblzma-based decompression-only tool for .xz (and only .xz) files.  xzdec is intended to work
+xz  --decompress  --stdout  (and  possibly  a  few  other commonly used options) to decompress .xz files.
+lzmadec is identical to xzdec except that lzmadec supports .lzma files instead of .xz files.
+To reduce the size of the executable, xzdec doesn't support multithreading or localization,  and  doesn't
+read  options from XZ_DEFAULTS and XZ_OPT environment variables.  xzdec doesn't support displaying inter‐
+process instead of displaying progress information.
+%
+hdparm - get/set SATA/IDE device parameters
+hdparm [options] [device ...]
+hdparm  provides  a  command  line  interface  to  various  kernel  interfaces  supported  by  the  Linux
+rectly only with the latest kernels.
+When  no  options  are  given, -acdgkmur is assumed.  For "Get/set" options, a query without the optional
+parameter (e.g. -d) will query (get) the device state, and with a parameter  (e.g.,  -d0)  will  set  the
+device state.
+%
+mkreiserfs - The create tool for the Linux ReiserFS filesystem.
+mkreiserfs  [  -dfV  ]  [  -b | --block-size N ] [ -h | --hash HASH ] [ -u | --uuid UUID ] [ -l | --label
+LABEL ] [ --format FORMAT ] [ -q | --quiet ] [ -j | --journal-device FILE ] [ -s | --journal-size N  ]  [
+-o  | --journal-offset N ] [ -t | --transaction-max-size N ] [ -B | --badblocks file ]  device [ filesys‐
+tem-size ]
+mkreiserfs creates a Linux ReiserFS filesystem on a device (usually a disk partition).
+device is the special file corresponding to a device or to a partition (e.g /dev/hdXX  for  an  IDE  disk
+partition or /dev/sdXX for a SCSI disk partition).
+filesystem-size
+is the size in blocks of the filesystem. If omitted, mkreiserfs will automatically set it.
+%
+isc-config.sh - Get information about the installed version of ISC BIND
+isc-config.sh [--cflags] [--exec-prefix] [--libs] [--prefix] [--version] [libraries...]
+isc-config.sh prints information related to the installed version of ISC BIND, such as the compiler and
+linker flags required to compile and link programs that use ISC BIND libraries.
+The optional libraries are used to report specific details for compiling and linking for the listed
+listed on the command line. (Some libraries require other libraries, so are implied.)
+--cflags
+Prints the compiler command line options required to compile files that use ISC BIND. Use the
+libraries command line argument(s) to print additional specific flags to pass to the C compiler.
+%
+ping - send ICMP ECHO_REQUEST to network hosts
+[-M pmtudisc_option] [-N nodeinfo_option] [-w deadline] [-W timeout] [-p pattern] [-Q tos] [-s
+packetsize] [-S sndbuf] [-t ttl] [-T timestamp option] [hop]... {destination}
+ping uses the ICMP protocol's mandatory ECHO_REQUEST datagram to elicit an ICMP ECHO_RESPONSE from a host
+or gateway.  ECHO_REQUEST datagrams (``pings'') have an IP and ICMP header, followed by a struct  timeval
+and then an arbitrary number of ``pad'' bytes used to fill out the packet.
+-6.
+%
+and GNUTLS_SO_PIN.
+%
+grops - PostScript driver for groff
+grops [-glmv] [-b n] [-c n] [-F dir] [-I dir] [-p papersize] [-P prologue] [-w n] [files ...]
+grops  translates  the  output of GNU troff to PostScript.  Normally grops should be invoked by using the
+groff command with a -Tps option.  (Actually, this is the default for groff.)  If  no  files  are  given,
+grops  reads  the  standard  input.  A filename of - also causes grops to read the standard input.  Post‐
+Script output is written to the standard output.  When grops is run by groff options  can  be  passed  to
+grops using groff's -P option.
+vention) if called with multiple file arguments.  To print such concatenated output it  is  necessary  to
+deactivate  DSC handling in the printing program or previewer.  See section FONT INSTALLATION below for a
+guide how to install fonts for grops.
+%
+setarch - change reported architecture in new program environment and set personality flags
+setarch arch [options] [program [argument...]]
+arch [options] [program [argument...]]
+setarch --list|-h|-V
+various personality options.  The default program is /bin/sh.
+--list List  the  architectures that setarch knows about.  Whether setarch can actually set each of these
+architectures depends on the running kernel.
+%
+reiserfsck - The checking tool for the ReiserFS filesystem.
+reiserfsck  [ -aprVy ] [ --rebuild-sb | --check | --fix-fixable | --rebuild-tree | --clean-attributes ] [
+-j | --journal device ] [ -z | --adjust-size ] [ -n | --nolog ] [ -B | --badblocks file ] [ -l  |  --log‐
+file file ] [ -q | --quiet ] [ -y | --yes ] [ -f | --force ] [ -S | --scan-whole-partition ] [ --no-jour‐
+nal-available ] device
+Reiserfsck searches for a Reiserfs filesystem on a device, replays any necessary transactions, and either
+checks or repairs the file system.
+device is  the  special  file  corresponding to a device or to a partition (e.g /dev/hdXX for an IDE disk
+partition or /dev/sdXX for a SCSI disk partition).
+--rebuild-sb
+%
+autoreconf - Update generated configuration files
+autoreconf [OPTION]... [DIRECTORY]...
+Run  `autoconf'  (and  `autoheader',  `aclocal',  `automake',  `autopoint'  (formerly  `gettextize'), and
+`libtoolize' where appropriate) repeatedly to remake the GNU Build System files in specified  DIRECTORIES
+and their subdirectories (defaulting to `.').
+By  default,  it only remakes those files that are older than their sources.  If you install new versions
+of the GNU Build System, you can make `autoreconf' remake all of the files by  giving  it  the  `--force'
+option.
+Operation modes:
+-h, --help
+print this help, then exit
+%
+crond - daemon to execute scheduled commands
+crond [-c | -h | -i | -n | -p | -P | -s | -m<mailcommand>]
+crond -x [ext,sch,proc,pars,load,misc,test,bit]
+systemd is enabled, then unit file is installed  into  /lib/systemd/system/crond.service  and  daemon  is
+started  by systemctl start crond.service command. It returns immediately, thus, there is no need to need
+to start it with the '&' parameter.
+Cron searches /var/spool/cron for crontab files which are named after accounts in /etc/passwd; The  found
+crontabs  are  loaded  into  the  memory.   Cron  also  searches for /etc/anacrontab and any files in the
+and  checks  each  job  to see if it needs to be run in the current minute.  When executing commands, any
+output is mailed to the owner of the crontab (or to the user specified in the MAILTO environment variable
+%
+rmdir - remove empty directories
+rmdir [OPTION]... DIRECTORY...
+Remove the DIRECTORY(ies), if they are empty.
+--ignore-fail-on-non-empty
+ignore each failure that is solely because a directory
+is non-empty
+-p, --parents
+remove DIRECTORY and its ancestors; e.g., 'rmdir -p a/b/c' is similar to 'rmdir a/b/c a/b a'
+%
+addftinfo - add information to troff font files for use with groff
+addftinfo [ -v ] [ param-option value....  ] res unitwidth font
+addftinfo  reads  a  troff font file and adds some additional font-metric information that is used by the
+groff system.  The font file with the information added is written on the standard output.  The  informa‐
+tion  added  is guessed using some parametric information about the font and assumptions about the tradi‐
+tional troff names for characters.  The main information added is the heights and depths  of  characters.
+The res and unitwidth arguments should be the same as the corresponding parameters in the DESC file; font
+is the name of the file describing the font; if font ends with I the font will be assumed to be italic.
+–v prints the version number.
+All other options change one of the parameters that are used to derive the heights and depths.  Like  the
+%
+write - send a message to another user
+write user [ttyname]
+write allows you to communicate with other users, by copying lines from your terminal to theirs.
+When you run the write command, the user you are writing to gets a message of the form:
+Message from yourname@yourhost on yourtty at hh:mm ...
+Any  further lines you enter will be copied to the specified user's terminal.  If the other user wants to
+reply, they must run write as well.
+When you are done, type an end-of-file or interrupt character.  The other user will see the  message  EOF
+indicating that the conversation is over.
+%
+msgexec - process translations of message catalog
+reads a translation from standard input.  It is invoked once for each translation.   Its  output  becomes
+msgexec's output.  msgexec's return code is the maximum return code across all invocations.
+A  special  builtin  command  called '0' outputs the translation, followed by a null byte.  The output of
+"msgexec 0" is suitable as input for "xargs -0".
+Command input:
+--newline
+add newline at the end of input
+%
+code.  The tool has originally been developed as a second implementation for Libgcrypt to allow comparing
+against the primary implementation and to be used for internal consistency checks.  It should not be used
+for sensitive data because no mechanisms to clear the stack etc are used.
+The code has been written in a highly portable manner and requires only a few standard definitions to  be
+provided in a config.h file.
+%
+[-b bfdname|--target=bfdname]
+[-C|--demangle[=style]]
+[-e filename|--exe=filename]
+[-f|--functions] [-s|--basename]
+[-i|--inlines]
+[-p|--pretty-print]
+[-j|--section=name]
+[-H|--help] [-V|--version]
+[addr addr ...]
+offset in a section of a relocatable object, it uses the debugging information to figure out which file
+%
+systemd-ask-password - Query the user for a system password
+message specified on the command line. When run from a TTY it will query a password on the TTY and print
+it to standard output. When run with no TTY or with --no-tty it will query the password system-wide and
+allow active users to respond via several agents. The latter is only available to privileged processes.
+The purpose of this tool is to query system-wide passwords — that is passwords not attached to a specific
+user account. Examples include: unlocking encrypted hard disks when they are plugged in or at boot,
+entering an SSL certificate passphrase for web and VPN servers.
+Existing agents are:
+%
+pkg-config - Return metainformation about installed libraries
+[--short-errors] [--silence-errors] [--errors-to-stdout] [--debug]  [--cflags]  [--libs]  [--libs-only-L]
+provides] [--print-requires] [--print-requires-private] [LIBRARIES...]
+The pkg-config program is used to retrieve information about installed libraries in the  system.   It  is
+typically  used to compile and link against one or more libraries.  Here is a typical usage scenario in a
+Makefile:
+program: program.c
+cc program.c $(pkg-config --cflags --libs gnomeui)
+%
+pwconv, pwunconv, grpconv, grpunconv - convert to and from shadow passwords and groups
+pwconv [options]
+pwunconv [options]
+grpconv [options]
+grpunconv [options]
+The pwconv command creates shadow from passwd and an optionally existing shadow.
+The pwunconv command creates passwd from passwd and shadow and then removes shadow.
+The grpconv command creates gshadow from group and an optionally existing gshadow.
+%
+pacman-key - manage pacman's list of trusted keys
+pacman-key [options] operation [targets]
+pacman-key is a wrapper script for GnuPG used to manage pacman’s keyring, which is the collection of PGP
+keys used to check signed packages and databases. It provides the ability to import and export keys,
+fetch keys from keyservers and update the key trust database.
+More complex keyring management can be achieved using GnuPG directly combined with the --homedir option
+pointing at the pacman keyring (located in /etc/pacman.d/gnupg by default).
+Invoking pacman-key consists of supplying an operation with any potential options and targets to operate
+OPERATIONS
+%
+umount - unmount file systems
+umount -a [-dflnrv] [-t fstype] [-O option...]
+umount [-dflnrv] {directory|device}...
+umount -h|-V
+The umount command detaches the mentioned file system(s) from the file hierarchy.  A file system is spec‐
+ified by giving the directory where it has been mounted.  Giving the special device  on  which  the  file
+on more than one directory.
+it,  or  when  some  process  has  its working directory there, or when a swap file on it is in use.  The
+%
+pam_tally - The login counter (tallying) module
+pam_tally.so [file=/path/to/counter] [onerr=[fail|succeed]] [magic_root] [even_deny_root_account]
+[deny=n] [lock_time=n] [unlock_time=n] [per_user] [no_lock_time] [no_reset] [audit] [silent]
+[no_log_info]
+pam_tally [--file /path/to/counter] [--user username] [--reset[=n]] [--quiet]
+many attempts fail.
+deprecated and will be removed in a future release.
+pam_tally comes in two parts: pam_tally.so and pam_tally. The former is the PAM module and the latter, a
+%
+psfaddtable - add a Unicode character table to a console font
+psfaddtable fontfile tablefile outfile
+psfaddtable  takes a console font in .psf format given by fontfile and merges it with the Unicode charac‐
+ter table given by tablefile to produce a font file with an embedded character table, which is written to
+outfile.   An input file name of "-" denotes standard input, and an output file name of "-" denotes stan‐
+dard output.  If the fontfile already contains an embedded character table, it is ignored.
+TABLE FILE FORMAT
+Each line in the tablefile should be either blank, contain a  comment  (preceded  by  #),  or  contain  a
+sequence  of  numbers in either decimal (default), octal (preceded by 0), or hexadecimal (preceded by 0x)
+format, separated by spaces or tabs.  The first number on each line indicates the glyph slot in the  font
+%
+fstrim - discard unused blocks on a mounted filesystem
+fstrim [-a] [-o offset] [-l length] [-m minimum-size] [-v] mountpoint
+fstrim is used on a mounted filesystem to discard (or "trim") blocks which are not in use by the filesys‐
+behavior based on range or size, as explained below.
+The mountpoint argument is the pathname of the directory where the filesystem is mounted.
+Running  fstrim frequently, or even using mount -o discard, might negatively affect the lifetime of poor-
+quality SSD devices.  For most desktop and server systems a sufficient trimming frequency is once a week.
+%
+rm - remove files or directories
+rm [OPTION]... [FILE]...
+not remove directories.
+If the -I or --interactive=once option is given, and there are more than three files or the  -r,  -R,  or
+--recursive are given, then rm prompts the user for whether to proceed with the entire operation.  If the
+response is not affirmative, the entire command is aborted.
+Otherwise, if a file is unwritable, standard input is a terminal, and the -f or  --force  option  is  not
+given,  or  the -i or --interactive=always option is given, rm prompts the user for whether to remove the
+file.  If the response is not affirmative, the file is skipped.
+%
+ddns-confgen - ddns key generation tool
+tsig-keygen [-a algorithm] [-h] [-r randomfile] [name]
+ddns-confgen [-a algorithm] [-h] [-k keyname] [-q] [-r randomfile] [-s name | -z zone]
+tsig-keygen and ddns-confgen are invocation methods for a utility that generates keys for use in TSIG
+signing. The resulting keys can be used, for example, to secure dynamic DNS updates to a zone or for the
+rndc command channel.
+When run as tsig-keygen, a domain name can be specified on the command line which will be used as the
+name of the generated key. If no name is specified, the default is tsig-key.
+When run as ddns-confgen, the generated key is accompanied by configuration text and instructions that
+can be used with nsupdate and named when setting up dynamic DNS, including an example update-policy
+%
+mklost+found - create a lost+found directory on a mounted Linux second extended file system
+mklost+found
+mklost+found  is used to create a lost+found directory in the current working directory on a Linux second
+extended file system.  There is normally a lost+found directory in the root directory of each filesystem.
+recover  a  filesystem,  it does not need to allocate blocks in the filesystem to store a large number of
+recovery.
+There are none.
+%
+efivar - Tool to manipulate UEFI variables
+efivar [OPTION...]
+-L, --list-guids
+list guids efivar knows about
+-l, --list
+list current variables
+-p, --print
+print variable specified by --name
+-n, --name=<guid-name>
+%
+pr - convert text files for printing
+pr [OPTION]... [FILE]...
+Paginate or columnate FILE(s) for printing.
+With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.
+Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
++FIRST_PAGE[:LAST_PAGE], --pages=FIRST_PAGE[:LAST_PAGE]
+begin [stop] printing with page FIRST_[LAST_]PAGE
+-COLUMN, --columns=COLUMN
+output  COLUMN  columns  and print columns down, unless -a is used. Balance number of lines in the
+%
+netctl - Control the netctl network profile manager
+netctl [--help | --version]
+manager.
+The following commands are understood:
+list
+List all available profiles. Active profiles will be marked with a ‘*’.
+%
+vgmknodes — recreate volume group directory and logical volume special files
+ones and removes unused ones.
+--refresh
+manually without a clustered lock manager.
+%
+killall - kill processes by name
+killall [-Z, --context pattern] [-e, --exact] [-g, --process-group] [-i, --interactive] [-o, --older-than
+TIME] [-q, --quiet] [-r, --regexp] [-s, --signal SIGNAL, -SIGNAL] [-u, --user user] [-v, --verbose]
+killall -l
+killall -V, --version
+killall  sends  a  signal  to  all processes running any of the specified commands.  If no signal name is
+specified, SIGTERM is sent.
+If the command name is not regular expression (option -r) and contains a slash (/),  processes  executing
+that particular file will be selected for killing, independent of their name.
+%
+ebrowse - create a class hierarchy database
+ebrowse [options] [FILES...]
+format.
+ebrowse is used to create the database used by the class browser in Emacs.
+The program follows the usual GNU command line syntax, with long options starting with two dashes ("-").
+-a, --append
+append output to existing file
+%
+prlimit - get and set process resource limits
+prlimit [options] [--resource[=limits] [--pid PID]
+prlimit [options] [--resource[=limits] command [argument...]
+Given a process id and one or more resources, prlimit tries to retrieve and/or modify the limits.
+When command is given, prlimit will run this command with the given arguments.
+The limits parameter is composed of a soft and a hard value, separated by a colon (:), in order to modify
+the existing values.  If no limits are given, prlimit will display the current values.   If  one  of  the
+values  is  not  given,  then  the existing one will be used.  To specify the unlimited or infinity limit
+%
+zsoelim - satisfy .so requests in roff input
+zsoelim [-CVh] [file ...]
+zsoelim parses file arguments, or if none are specified, its standard input for lines of the form:
+.so <filename>
+These  requests  are  replaced  by the contents of the filename specified.  If the request cannot be met,
+ported depending upon compile time options.  If the request can be met by a compressed file, this file is
+decompressed using an appropriate decompressor and its output is used to satisfy the request.
+Traditionally, soelim programs were used to allow roff preprocessors to be able to preprocess  the  files
+%
+[lock_time=n] [unlock_time=n] [root_unlock_time=n] [serialize] [audit] [silent]
+[no_log_info] [debug]
+many attempts fail.
+manipulate the counter file. It can display user counts, set individual counts, or clear all counts.
+%
+etags, ctags - generate tag file for Emacs, vi
+etags [-aCDGIQRVh] [-i file] [-l language]
+[-o tagfile] [-r regexp] [--parse-stdin=file]
+[--append] [--no-defines] [--globals] [--no-globals] [--no-line-directive] [--include=file]
+[--ignore-indentation] [--language=language] [--members] [--no-members] [--output=tagfile]
+[--class-qualify] [--regex=regexp] [--no-regex] [--help] [--version] file ...
+ctags [-aCdgIQRVh] [-BtTuvwx] [-l language]
+[-o tagfile] [-r regexp] [--parse-stdin=file]
+[--append] [--backward-search] [--cxref] [--no-defines] [--globals] [--no-globals] [--no-line-directive]
+[--ignore-indentation] [--language=language] [--members] [--no-members] [--class-qualify]
+[--output=tagfile] [--regex=regexp] [--update] [--help] [--version] file ...
+%
+Compare three files line by line.
+Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
+-A, --show-all
+output all changes, bracketing conflicts
+-e, --ed
+output ed script incorporating changes from OLDFILE to YOURFILE into MYFILE
+-E, --show-overlap
+%
+iconvconfig - create iconv module configuration cache
+iconvconfig [options] [directory]...
+tion file is used to determine the needed modules for a conversion.  Loading and parsing such a  configu‐
+The  iconvconfig  program  reads  iconv module configuration files and writes a fast-loading gconv module
+configuration cache file.
+In addition to the system provided gconv modules, the user can specify custom  gconv  module  directories
+with  the environment variable GCONV_PATH.  However, iconv module configuration caching is used only when
+the environment variable GCONV_PATH is not set.
+%
+msginit - initialize a message catalog
+msginit [OPTION]
+Creates a new PO file, initializing the meta information with values from the user's environment.
+Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
+Input file location:
+-i, --input=INPUTFILE
+input POT file
+If  no  input  file  is  given, the current directory is searched for the POT file.  If it is -, standard
+input is read.
+%
+autoconf - Generate configuration scripts
+autoconf [OPTION]... [TEMPLATE-FILE]
+Generate  a  configuration  script  from  a TEMPLATE-FILE if given, or `configure.ac' if present, or else
+`configure.in'.  Output is sent to the standard output if TEMPLATE-FILE is given, else into `configure'.
+Operation modes:
+-h, --help
+print this help, then exit
+-V, --version
+print version number, then exit
+-v, --verbose
+%
+update-ca-trust - manage consolidated and dynamic configuration of CA certificates and associated trust
+Authority (CA) certificates and associated trust.
+The feature is available for new applications that read the consolidated configuration files found in the
+Parts of the new feature are also provided in a way to make it useful for legacy applications.
+Many legacy applications expect CA certificates and trust configuration in a fixed location, contained in
+%
+resizepart - tell the kernel about the new size of a partition
+resizepart device partition length
+resizepart tells the Linux kernel about the new size of the specified partition.  The command is a simple
+wrapper around the "resize partition" ioctl.
+PARAMETERS
+device The disk device.
+partition
+The partition number.
+%
+unix_chkpwd [...]
+unix_chkpwd is a helper program for the pam_unix module that verifies the password of the current user.
+It also checks password and account expiration dates in shadow. It is not intended to be run directly
+from the command line and logs a security violation if done so.
+It is typically installed setuid root or setgid shadow.
+The interface of the helper - command line options, and input/output data format are internal to the
+pam_unix module and it should not be called directly from applications.
+%
+getfacl - get file access control lists
+getfacl [-aceEsRLPtpndvh] file ...
+getfacl [-aceEsRLPtpndvh] -
+For  each file, getfacl displays the file name, owner, the group, and the Access Control List (ACL). If a
+directory has a default ACL, getfacl also displays the default ACL. Non-directories cannot  have  default
+ACLs.
+If  getfacl  is used on a file system that does not support ACLs, getfacl displays the access permissions
+defined by the traditional file mode permission bits.
+The output format of getfacl is as follows:
+%
+vimtutor - the Vim tutor
+vimtutor [-g] [language]
+Vimtutor starts the Vim tutor.  It copies the tutor file first, so that it can be modified without chang‐
+ing the original file.
+The Vimtutor is useful for people that want to learn their first Vim commands.
+The optional argument -g starts vimtutor with gvim rather than vim, if the GUI version of vim  is  avail‐
+able, or falls back to Vim if gvim is not found.
+The  optional  [language] argument is the two-letter name of a language, like "it" or "es".  If the [lan‐
+guage] argument is missing, the language of the current locale will be used.  If a tutor in this language
+is available, it will be used.  Otherwise the English version will be used.
+%
+partx - tell the kernel about the presence and numbering of on-disk partitions
+partx [-a|-d|-P|-r|-s|-u] [-t type] [-n M:N] [-] disk
+partx [-a|-d|-P|-r|-s|-u] [-t type] partition [disk]
+Given  a  device  or  disk-image, partx tries to parse the partition table and list its contents.  It can
+also tell the kernel to add or remove partitions from its bookkeeping.
+The disk argument is optional when a partition argument is provided.  To force scanning a partition as if
+it  were  a  whole  disk (for example to list nested subpartitions), use the argument "-" (hyphen-minus).
+For example:
+%
+glib-compile-schemas - GSettings schema compiler
+glib-compile-schemas [OPTION...] {DIRECTORY}
+glib-compile-schemas compiles all the GSettings XML schema files in DIRECTORY into a binary file with the
+name gschemas.compiled that can be used by GSettings. The XML schema files must have the filename
+extension .gschema.xml. For a detailed description of the XML file format, see the GSettings
+documentation.
+specified in the XDG_DATA_DIRS environment variable. The usual location to install schema files is
+In addition to schema files, glib-compile-schemas reads 'vendor override' files, which are key files that
+can override default values for keys in the schemas. The group names in the key files are the schema id,
+%
+nl-qdisc-{add|list|delete} - Manage queueing disciplines
+The nl-qdisc tools allow to manage and configure queueing disciplines (qdiscs) in the kernel.
+-h or --help
+Print help text to console and exit.
+-v or --version
+%
+top - display Linux processes
+top -hv|-bcHiOSs -d secs -n max -u|U user -p pid -o fld -w [cols]
+The traditional switches `-' and whitespace are optional.
+The  top  program  provides  a dynamic real-time view of a running system.  It can display system summary
+information as well as a list of processes or threads currently being managed by the Linux  kernel.   The
+types of system summary information shown and the types, order and size of information displayed for pro‐
+cesses are all user configurable and that configuration can be made persistent across restarts.
+The program provides a limited interactive interface for process manipulation as  well  as  a  much  more
+extensive  interface  for  personal  configuration   --  encompassing every aspect of its operation.  And
+while top is referred to throughout this document, you are free to name the program  anything  you  wish.
+That new name, possibly an alias, will then be reflected on top's display and used when reading and writ‐
+%
+systemd-nspawn - Spawn a namespace container for debugging, testing and building
+as the process tree, the various IPC subsystems and the host and domain name.
+--directory= command line option. By using the --machine= option an OS tree is automatically searched for
+in a couple of locations, most importantly in /var/lib/machines, the suggested directory to place
+container images installed on the system.
+%
+readlink - print resolved symbolic links or canonical file names
+readlink [OPTION]... FILE...
+Print value of a symbolic link or canonical file name
+-f, --canonicalize
+canonicalize  by following every symlink in every component of the given name recursively; all but
+the last component must exist
+-e, --canonicalize-existing
+canonicalize by following every symlink in every component of the given name recursively, all com‐
+ponents must exist
+-m, --canonicalize-missing
+%
+insmod - Simple program to insert a module into the Linux Kernel
+insmod [filename] [module options...]
+instead, which is more clever and can handle module dependencies.
+Only the most general of error messages are reported: as the work of trying to link the module is now
+done inside the kernel, the dmesg usually gives more information about errors.
+others.
+%
+bashbug - report a bug in bash
+bashbug [--version] [--help] [email-address]
+bashbug  is  a  shell  script to help the user compose and mail bug reports concerning bash in a standard
+format.  bashbug invokes the editor specified by the environment variable EDITOR on a temporary  copy  of
+the bug report format outline. The user must fill in the appropriate fields and exit the editor.  bashbug
+then mails the completed report to bug-bash@gnu.org, or email-address.  If the report cannot  be  mailed,
+it is saved in the file dead.bashbug in the invoking user's home directory.
+The bug report format outline consists of several sections.  The first section provides information about
+the machine, operating system, the bash version, and the compilation  environment.   The  second  section
+should  be  filled in with a description of the bug.  The third section should be a description of how to
+reproduce the bug.  The optional fourth section is for a proposed fix.  Fixes are encouraged.
+%
+comm - compare two sorted files line by line
+%
+xargs - build and execute command lines from standard input
+xargs  [-0prtx]  [-E  eof-str]  [-e[eof-str]]  [--eof[=eof-str]]  [--null]  [-d  delimiter]  [--delimiter
+delimiter] [-I replace-str] [-i[replace-str]] [--replace[=replace-str]]  [-l[max-lines]]  [-L  max-lines]
+[--max-lines[=max-lines]]  [-n max-args] [--max-args=max-args] [-s max-chars] [--max-chars=max-chars] [-P
+max-procs]  [--max-procs=max-procs]  [--process-slot-var=name]   [--interactive]   [--verbose]   [--exit]
+[--no-run-if-empty] [--arg-file=file] [--show-limits] [--version] [--help] [command [initial-arguments]]
+ed by blanks (which can be protected with double or single quotes or a backslash) or newlines,  and  exe‐
+cutes  the  command (default is /bin/echo) one or more times with any initial-arguments followed by items
+read from standard input.  Blank lines on the standard input are ignored.
+The command line for command is built up until it reaches a system-defined limit (unless the  -n  and  -L
+options  are  used).  The specified command will be invoked as many times as necessary to use up the list
+%
+blkdeactivate — utility to deactivate block devices
+blkdeactivate [-d dm_options] [-e] [-h] [-l lvm_options] [-m mpath_options] [-u] [-v] [device]
+blkdeactivate utility deactivates block devices. If a device is mounted, the utility can unmount it auto‐
+matically before trying to deactivate. The utility currently supports device-mapper devices (DM), includ‐
+-d, --dmoption dm_options
+%
+usb-devices - print USB device details
+usb-devices
+usb-devices  is  a (bash) shell script that can be used to display details of USB buses in the system and
+the devices connected to them.
+The output of the script is similar to the usb/devices file available either under /proc/bus (if usbfs is
+mounted),  or  under /sys/kernel/debug (if debugfs is mounted there). The script is primarily intended to
+be used if the file is not available.
+In contrast to the usb/devices file, this script only lists active interfaces (those marked with a "*" in
+the usb/devices file) and their endpoints.
+Be  advised  that  there can be differences in the way information is sorted, as well as in the format of
+%
+systemd-tty-ask-password-agent - List or process pending systemd password requests
+systemd-tty-ask-password-agent is a password agent that handles password requests of the system, for
+example for hard disk encryption passwords or SSL certificate passwords that need to be queried at
+boot-time or during runtime.
+The following options are understood:
+--list
+Lists all currently pending system password requests.
+%
+tail - output the last part of files
+tail [OPTION]... [FILE]...
+header giving the file name.
+With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.
+Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
+-c, --bytes=[+]NUM
+output the last NUM bytes; or use -c +NUM to output starting with byte NUM of each file
+-f, --follow[={name|descriptor}]
+%
+dmstats — device-mapper statistics management
+dmsetup stats command [options]
+dmstats command [device_name |--uuid uuid|--major major --minor minor]
+dmstats clear device_name [--allprograms|--programid id] [--allregions|--regionid id]
+dmstats create [device_name...  |file_path...]  [--alldevices] [--areas nr_areas|--areasize area_size]
+[--bounds histogram_boundaries] [--filemap] [--nogroup] [--precise] [--start start_sector --length
+length|--segments] [--userdata user_data] [--programid id]
+dmstats delete [device_name] [--alldevices] [--allprograms|--programid id] [--allregions|--regionid id]
+dmstats group [device_name] [--alias name] [--alldevices] [--regions regions]
+dmstats help [-c|-C|--columns]
+dmstats list [device_name] [--histogram] [--allprograms|--programid id] [--units units] [--area]
+[--region] [--group] [--nosuffix] [--notimesuffix] [-v|--verbose[-v|--verbose]]
+dmstats print [device_name] [--clear] [--allprograms|--programid id] [--allregions|--regionid id]
+dmstats report [device_name] [--interval seconds] [--count count] [--units units] [--histogram]
+%
+systemd-cgls - Recursively show control group contents
+systemd-cgls recursively shows the contents of the selected Linux control group hierarchy in a tree. If
+arguments are specified, shows all member processes of the specified control groups plus all their
+assumed in the systemd control group hierarchy. If no argument is specified and the current working
+directory is beneath the control group mount point /sys/fs/cgroup, shows the contents of the control
+group the working directory refers to. Otherwise, the full systemd control group hierarchy is shown.
+By default, empty control groups are not shown.
+The following options are understood:
+%
+groupdel - delete a group
+groupdel [options] GROUP
+The groupdel command modifies the system account files, deleting all entries that refer to GROUP. The
+named group must exist.
+The options which apply to the groupdel command are:
+-h, --help
+Display help message and exit.
+-R, --root CHROOT_DIR
+Apply changes in the CHROOT_DIR directory and use the configuration files from the CHROOT_DIR
+%
+tftpd - Trivial File Transfer Protocol server
+tftpd {directory}
+requested via TFTP protocol, effectively chrooting tftpd to this directory.  File names are validated not
+It is in difference of variants of tftpd usually distributed with unix-like systems, which take a list of
+directories  and  match file names to start from one of given prefixes or to some random default, when no
+arguments were given. There are two reasons not to behave in this way: first, it is inconvenient, clients
+are  not expected to know something about layout of filesystem on server host.  And second, TFTP protocol
+%
+git-upload-pack - Send objects packed back to git-fetch-pack
+git-upload-pack [--[no-]strict] [--timeout=<n>] [--stateless-rpc]
+[--advertise-refs] <directory>
+Invoked by 'git fetch-pack', learns what
+objects the other side is missing, and sends them after packing.
+The UI for the protocol is on the 'git fetch-pack' side, and the
+program pair is meant to be used to pull updates from a remote
+repository.  For push operations, see 'git send-pack'.
+%
+shuf - generate random permutations
+shuf [OPTION]... [FILE]
+shuf -e [OPTION]... [ARG]...
+shuf -i LO-HI [OPTION]...
+Write a random permutation of the input lines to standard output.
+With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.
+Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
+-e, --echo
+treat each ARG as an input line
+%
+lsattr - list file attributes on a Linux second extended file system
+lsattr [ -RVadlpv ] [ files...  ]
+the attributes and what they mean.
+-R     Recursively list attributes of directories and their contents.
+-V     Display the program version.
+-a     List all files in directories, including files that start with `.'.
+-d     List directories like other files, rather than listing their contents.
+%
+thin_delta - Print the differences in the mappings between two thin devices.
+thin_delta [options] {device|file}
+thin_delta  allows you to compare the mappings in two thin volumes (snapshots allow common blocks between
+thin volumes).
+The numeric identifier for the first thin volume to diff.
+The numeric identifier for the second thin volume to diff.
+%
+test - check file types and compare values
+test EXPRESSION
+test
+[ EXPRESSION ]
+[ ]
+[ OPTION
+Exit with the status determined by EXPRESSION.
+--help display this help and exit
+--version
+output version information and exit
+%
+The  options  -v  and --version print the version information of the program to standard output and exit.
+The options -h and --help print a usage information of the program to standard output and stop  the  pro‐
+gram instantly.
+All  other options are assumed to be groffer options.  They are internally passed to groffer.  They over‐
+ride the behavior of the program.  The options are optional, they can be omitted.
+The filespec arguments correspond to the filespec arguments of groffer.  So they are either the names  of
+%
+resolvconf — a framework for managing multiple DNS configurations
+resolvconf -I
+resolvconf [-m metric] [-p] [-x] -a interface[.protocol] <file
+resolvconf [-f] -d interface[.protocol]
+resolvconf [-x] -il pattern
+resolvconf -u
+ally, the host runs just one client and that updates /etc/resolv.conf.  More modern systems frequently have
+wired and wireless interfaces and there is no guarantee both are on the same network.  With the advent of
+VPN and other types of networking daemons, many things now contend for the contents of /etc/resolv.conf.
+the argument -a interface[.protocol] instead of the filesystem.  resolvconf then updates /etc/resolv.conf
+%
+chfn - change your finger information
+chfn [-f full-name] [-o office] [-p office-phone] [-h home-phone] [-u] [-v] [username]
+is displayed by the finger program.  The Linux finger command will display  four  pieces  of  information
+that can be changed by chfn: your real name, your work room and phone, and your home phone.
+Any  of  the four pieces of information can be specified on the command line.  If no information is given
+on the command line, chfn enters interactive mode.
+In interactive mode, chfn will prompt for each field.  At a prompt, you can enter the new information, or
+just press return to leave the field unchanged.  Enter the keyword "none" to make the field blank.
+chfn  supports  non-local  entries  (kerberos,  LDAP, etc.) if linked with libuser, otherwise use ypchfn,
+%
+vgexport - make volume groups unknown to the system
+ignore exported Volume Groups.  vgexport clears the VG system ID, and vgimport sets the VG system  ID  to
+match the host running vgimport (if the host has a system ID).
+-a, --all
+Export all inactive Volume Groups.
+%
+gitk - The Git repository browser
+gitk [<options>] [<revision range>] [--] [<path>...]
+graph, showing information related to each commit, and the files in the trees of each revision.
+To control which revisions to show, gitk supports most options applicable to the git rev-list command. It
+also supports a few options applicable to the git diff-* commands to control how the changes each commit
+introduces are shown. Finally, it supports some gitk-specific options.
+gitk generally only understands options with arguments in the sticked form (see gitcli(7)) due to
+limitations in the command-line parser.
+%
+device.
+label.
+%
+fsck.minix - check consistency of Minix filesystem
+fsck.minix [options] device
+fsck.minix performs a consistency check for the Linux MINIX filesystem.
+The  program  assumes  the  filesystem  is  quiescent.  fsck.minix should not be used on a mounted device
+unless you can be sure nobody is writing to it.  Remember that the kernel can write  to  device  when  it
+searches for files.
+The device name will usually have the following form:
+%
+lslogins - display information about known users in the system
+lslogins [options] [-s|-u[=UID]] [-g groups] [-l logins]
+Examine the wtmp and btmp logs, /etc/shadow (if necessary) and /etc/passwd and output the desired data.
+The default action is to list info about all the users in the system.
+Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
+-a, --acc-expiration
+for more info).  (Requires root privileges.)
+%
+w - Show who is logged on and what they are doing.
+w [options] user [...]
+w  displays information about the users currently on the machine, and their processes.  The header shows,
+in this order, the current time, how long the system has been  running,  how  many  users  are  currently
+The following entries are displayed for each user: login name, the tty name, the remote host, login time,
+idle time, JCPU, PCPU, and the command line of their current process.
+The JCPU time is the time used by all processes attached to the tty.  It does not include past background
+jobs, but does include currently running background jobs.
+The PCPU time is the time used by the current process, named in the "what" field.
+%
+compile_et - error table compiler
+compile_et file
+Compile_et  converts  a table listing error-code names and associated messages into a C source file suit‐
+The source file name must end with a suffix of ``.et''; the file consists of a declaration supplying  the
+name (up to four characters long) of the error-code table:
+error_table name
+error_code name, " string "
+%
+gzip, gunzip, zcat - compress or expand files
+gunzip [ -acfhklLnNrtvV ] [-S suffix] [ name ...  ]
+zcat [ -fhLV ] [ name ...  ]
+Gzip reduces the size of the named files using Lempel-Ziv coding (LZ77).  Whenever possible, each file is
+replaced by one with the extension .gz, while keeping the same ownership modes, access  and  modification
+files are specified, or if a file name is "-", the standard input is compressed to the  standard  output.
+Gzip will only attempt to compress regular files.  In particular, it will ignore symbolic links.
+If  the  compressed file name is too long for its file system, gzip truncates it.  Gzip attempts to trun‐
+name  consists  of small parts only, the longest parts are truncated. For example, if file names are lim‐
+%
+attr - extended attributes on XFS filesystem objects
+attr [ -LRSq ] -s attrname [ -V attrvalue ] pathname
+attr [ -LRSq ] -g attrname pathname
+attr [ -LRSq ] -r attrname pathname
+attr [ -LRSq ] -l pathname
+Extended attributes implement the ability for a user to attach name:value pairs to objects within the XFS
+filesystem.
+name.  It is thus aimed specifically at users of the XFS filesystem - for filesystem independent extended
+%
+genl-ctrl-list - List available kernel-side Generic Netlink families
+genl-ctrl-list [-d]
+Queries the Generic Netlink controller in kernel and prints a list of all registered Generic Netlink fam‐
+ilies including the version of the interface that has been registered.
+-h or --help
+Print help text to console and exit.
+-v or --version
+Print versioning information to console and exit.
+-d or --details
+%
+ldns-test-edns - test if dns cache supports EDNS and DNSSEC.
+ldns-test-edns [ -i ] { ip }
+ldns-test-edns  tests a DNS cache and checks if it supports EDNS0 and DNSSEC types so that it can be used
+as a dnssec-enabled DNS cache.  It sends two queries to the cache, one for the root key and one for a  DS
+record.  These must succeed, the answer must have EDNS, that type and signatures.
+If  the  IP address is good for DNSSEC, it is printed with 'OK'.  Otherwise short description is given of
+the failure.  If OK is given, the cache should be good to use as a cache for a  local  configured  DNSSEC
+validator.
+The  tool  assumes the root is signed and Sweden is signed.  Also, the queries are sent with the CD flag,
+the tool does not check that the results are validated, but that they can be validated.
+%
+ldns-update - send a dynamic update packet
+ldns-update [ zone ] ip [ tsig_name tsig_als tsig_hmac ]
+ldns-update is used to send a dynamic update packet.
+zone   Use this zone instead of trying to read it from the zonefile's SOA record.
+ip     Send the update to this IP address
+tsig_name tsig_alg tsig_hmac
+%
+kprop [-r realm] [-f file] [-d] [-P port] [-s keytab] slave_host
+-r realm
+Specifies the realm of the master server.
+-f file
+Specifies the filename where the dumped principal database file is to be  found;  by  default  the
+%
+zmore - file perusal filter for crt viewing of compressed text
+zmore [ name ...  ]
+Zmore is a filter which allows examination of compressed or plain text files one screenful at a time on a
+soft-copy terminal.  zmore works on files compressed with compress, pack or  gzip,  and  also  on  uncom‐
+pressed  files.  If a file does not exist, zmore looks for a file of the same name with the addition of a
+.gz, .z or .Z suffix.
+Zmore normally pauses after each screenful, printing --More-- at the bottom of the screen.  If  the  user
+then types a carriage return, one more line is displayed.  If the user hits a space, another screenful is
+displayed.  Other possibilities are enumerated later.
+Zmore looks in the file /etc/termcap to determine terminal characteristics, and to determine the  default
+%
+aclocal [OPTION]...
+--automake-acdir=DIR
+--system-acdir=DIR
+directory holding third-party system-wide files
+%
+thin_rmap - output reverse map of a thin provisioned region of blocks from metadata device or file
+thin_rmap [options] {device|file}
+thin_rmap outputs the reverse mapping stored in the metadata on a device or file between a region of thin
+provisioned pool blocks and the associated thin provisioned devices.
+--region <block range>
+output reverse map
+-h, --help
+Print help and exit.
+%
+msgunfmt - uncompile message catalog from binary format
+msgunfmt [OPTION] [FILE]...
+Convert binary message catalog to Uniforum style .po file.
+Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
+Operation mode:
+-j, --java
+Java mode: input is a Java ResourceBundle class
+--csharp
+C# mode: input is a .NET .dll file
+%
+external-journal ] [ -E extended_options ] [ -z undo_file ] device
+use  a  journal, if the system has been shut down uncleanly without any errors, normally, after replaying
+the committed transactions  in the journal, the file system should  be  marked  as  clean.    Hence,  for
+indicates that further checking is required.
+-n  option is specified, and -c, -l, or -L options are not specified.   However, even if it is safe to do
+%
+tsort - perform topological sort
+tsort [OPTION] [FILE]
+Write totally ordered list consistent with the partial ordering in FILE.
+With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.
+--help display this help and exit
+--version
+output version information and exit
+Written by Mark Kettenis.
+%
+gpgsm - CMS encryption and signing tool
+gpgsm [--homedir dir] [--options file] [options] command [args]
+and the CMS protocol.  It is mainly used as a backend for S/MIME mail processing.  gpgsm includes a  full
+featured certificate management and complies with all rules defined for the German Sphinx project.
+Commands are not distinguished from options except for the fact that only one command is allowed.
+Commands not specific to the function
+--version
+%
+fsadm — utility to resize or check filesystem on a device
+fsadm [options] check device
+fsadm [options] resize device [new_size]
+-e|--ext-offline
+-f|--force
+Bypass some sanity checks.
+%
+pgrep, pkill - look up or signal processes based on name and other attributes
+pgrep [options] pattern
+pkill [options] pattern
+pgrep  looks  through the currently running processes and lists the process IDs which match the selection
+criteria to stdout.  All the criteria have to match.  For example,
+$ pgrep -u root sshd
+will only list the processes called sshd AND owned by root.  On the other hand,
+$ pgrep -u root,daemon
+will list the processes owned by root OR daemon.
+%
+Process macros in FILEs.  If no FILE or if FILE is `-', standard input is read.
+Mandatory or optional arguments to long options are mandatory or optional for short options too.
+Operation modes:
+--help display this help and exit
+--version
+output version information and exit
+-E, --fatal-warnings
+%
+xzcmp, xzdiff, lzcmp, lzdiff - compare compressed files
+from which the compression format suffix has been stripped.  If two files are specified,  then  they  are
+served.
+The names lzcmp and lzdiff are provided for backward compatibility with LZMA Utils.
+%
+msgfmt - compile message catalog to binary format
+msgfmt [OPTION] filename.po ...
+Generate binary message catalog from textual translation description.
+Mandatory  arguments  to  long options are mandatory for short options too.  Similarly for optional argu‐
+ments.
+Input file location:
+filename.po ...
+input files
+-D, --directory=DIRECTORY
+add DIRECTORY to list for input files search
+%
+nscd - name service cache daemon
+Nscd is a daemon that provides a cache for the most common name service requests.  The default configura‐
+There are two caches for each database: a positive one for items found, and a negative one for items  not
+--help will give you a list with all options and what they do.
+%
+xzless, lzless - view xz or lzma compressed (text) files
+xzless [file...]
+lzless [file...]
+xzless  is a filter that displays text from compressed files to a terminal.  It works on files compressed
+The command named lzless is provided for backward compatibility with LZMA Utils.
+ENVIRONMENT
+%
+and improves the file access speed.
+mount point of it and reduces fragmentation of all files in this mount point.
+-c     Get  a  current  fragmentation count and an ideal fragmentation count, and calculate fragmentation
+%
+factor - factor numbers
+factor [NUMBER]...
+factor OPTION
+Print  the  prime  factors  of each specified integer NUMBER.  If none are specified on the command line,
+read them from standard input.
+--help display this help and exit
+--version
+output version information and exit
+Written by Paul Rubin, Torbjorn Granlund, and Niels Moller.
+%
+strfile - create a random access file for storing strings
+unstr - dump strings in pointer order
+strfile [-iorsx] [-c char] sourcefile [outputfile]
+unstr [-c char] datafile[.ext] [outputfile]
+strfile  reads a file containing groups of lines separated by a line containing a single percent `%' sign
+(or other specified delimiter character) and creates a data file which contains a header structure and  a
+The output file, if not specified on the command line, is named sourcefile.dat.
+The  purpose of unstr is to undo the work of strfile.  It prints out the strings contained in the source‐
+file, which is datafile.ext without its extension, or datafile if no  extension  is  specified  (in  this
+%
+rtcwake - enter a system sleep state until specified wakeup time
+rtcwake [options] [-d device] [-m standby_mode] {-s seconds|-t time_t}
+specified time.  It uses any RTC framework driver that supports standard driver model wakeup flags.
+disk).  Not all systems have persistent media that are appropriate for such suspend modes.
+%
+grog — guess options for a following groff command
+grog [-C] [--run] [--warnings] [--ligatures] [ groff-option ....]  [--] [ filespec ....]
+grog -h | --help
+grog -v | --version
+to perform the input with the groff program.
+The corresponding groff command is usually displayed in standard output.  With the  option  --run,
+the  generated  line  is  output into standard error and the generated groff command is run on the
+standard output.
+The option -v or --version prints information on the version number.  Also  -h  or  --help  prints  usage
+%
+blocks-per-group ] [ -G number-of-groups ] [ -i bytes-per-inode ] [ -I inode-size ] [ -j ] [ -J  journal-
+options ] [ -N number-of-inodes ] [ -n ] [ -m reserved-blocks-percentage ] [ -o creator-os ] [ -O [^]fea‐
+ture[,...]  ] [ -q ] [ -r fs-revision-level ] [ -E extended-options ] [ -v ] [ -F ] [ -L volume-label ] [
+-M last-mounted-directory ] [ -S ] [ -t fs-type ] [ -T usage-type ] [ -U UUID ] [ -V ] [ -e errors-behav‐
+ior ] [ -z undo_file ] device [ fs-size ]
+size ]
+by device.
+%
+nl - number lines of files
+nl [OPTION]... [FILE]...
+Write each FILE to standard output, with line numbers added.
+With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.
+Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
+-b, --body-numbering=STYLE
+use STYLE for numbering body lines
+-d, --section-delimiter=CC
+use CC for separating logical pages
+%
+git-cvsserver - A CVS server emulator for Git
+SSH:
+export CVS_SERVER="git cvsserver"
+cvs -d :ext:user@server/path/repo.git co <HEAD_name>
+pserver (/etc/inetd.conf):
+cvspserver stream tcp nowait nobody /usr/bin/git-cvsserver git-cvsserver pserver
+git-cvsserver [options] [pserver|server] [<directory> ...]
+%
+ocsptool - GnuTLS OCSP tool
+ocsptool [-flags] [-flag [value]] [--option-name[[=| ]value]]
+All arguments must be options.
+Ocsptool  is  a  program  that  can  parse  and print information about OCSP requests/responses, generate
+requests and verify responses.
+-d number, --debug=number
+constrained to being:
+in the range  0 through 9999
+%
+grub-macbless - bless a mac file/directory
+Mac-style bless on HFS or HFS+
+-p, --ppc
+bless for ppc-based macs
+-v, --verbose
+print verbose messages.
+%
+iptables-restore — Restore IP Tables
+ip6tables-restore — Restore IPv6 Tables
+iptables-restore [-chntv] [-M modprobe] [-T name] [file]
+ip6tables-restore [-chntv] [-M modprobe] [-T name] [file]
+iptables-restore  and  ip6tables-restore  are  used  to restore IP and IPv6 Tables from data specified on
+STDIN or in file. Use I/O redirection provided by your shell to read from a file or specify  file  as  an
+argument.
+-c, --counters
+restore the values of all packet and byte counters
+%
+tbl - format tables for troff
+tbl [-Cv] [files ...]
+tbl compiles descriptions of tables embedded within troff input files into commands that  are  understood
+by  troff.   Normally,  it  should be invoked using the -t option of groff.  It is highly compatible with
+Unix tbl.  The output generated by GNU tbl cannot be processed with Unix troff; it must be processed with
+GNU  troff.  If no files are given on the command line or a filename of - is given, the standard input is
+read.
+-C     Enable compatibility mode to recognize .TS and .TE even when followed by a  character  other  than
+space or newline.  Leader characters (\a) are handled as interpreted.
+%
+networkctl - Query the status of network links
+configuration syntax.
+The following options are understood:
+-a --all
+Show all links with status.
+-h, --help
+%
+gtester-report - test report formatting utility
+gtester-report [option...] [gtester-log]
+gtester-report is a script which converts the XML output generated by gtester into HTML.
+-h, --help
+print help and exit
+-v, --version
+print version information and exit
+-s, --subunit
+Output subunit. Needs python-subunit.
+%
+bzcat - decompresses files to stdout
+bzcat [ -s ] [ filenames ...  ]
+coding.   Compression  is  generally  considerably  better  than  that  achieved  by  more   conventional
+The command-line options are deliberately very similar to those of GNU gzip, but they are not identical.
+%
+watchgnupg - Read and print logs from a socket
+watchgnupg [--force] [--verbose] socketname
+Most  of  the main utilities are able to write their log files to a Unix Domain socket if configured that
+way.  watchgnupg is a simple listener for such a socket.  It ameliorates the output with a time stamp and
+available for Windows.
+watchgnupg is commonly invoked as
+watchgnupg --force ~/.gnupg/S.log
+watchgnupg understands these options:
+%
+sudo, sudoedit — execute a command as another user
+sudo -h | -K | -k | -V
+sudo -v [-AknS] [-a type] [-g group] [-h host] [-p prompt] [-u user]
+sudo -l [-AknS] [-a type] [-g group] [-h host] [-p prompt] [-U user] [-u user] [command]
+sudo [-AbEHnPS] [-a type] [-C num] [-c class] [-g group] [-h host] [-p prompt] [-r role] [-t type]
+[-u user] [VAR=value] [-i | -s] [command]
+sudoedit [-AknS] [-a type] [-C num] [-c class] [-g group] [-h host] [-p prompt] [-u user] file ...
+sudo allows a permitted user to execute a command as the superuser or another user, as specified by the
+security policy.  The invoking user's real (not effective) user ID is used to determine the user name with
+which to query the security policy.
+sudo supports a plugin architecture for security policies and input/output logging.  Third parties can
+develop and distribute their own policy and I/O logging plugins to work seamlessly with the sudo front end.
+%
+vercmp - version comparison utility
+vercmp is used to determine the relationship between two given version numbers. It outputs values as
+follows:
+Version comparison operates as follows:
+%
+xxd - make a hexdump or do the reverse.
+xxd -h[elp]
+xxd [options] [infile [outfile]]
+xxd -r[evert] [options] [infile [outfile]]
+xxd  creates  a  hex  dump of a given file or standard input.  It can also convert a hex dump back to its
+`mail-safe' ASCII representation, but has the advantage of decoding to standard output.  Moreover, it can
+be used to perform binary file patching.
+If no infile is given, standard input is read.  If infile is specified as a `-' character, then input  is
+taken from standard input.  If no outfile is given (or a `-' character is in its place), results are sent
+to standard output.
+%
+tailf - follow the growth of a log file
+tailf [option] file
+days it's safe to use tail -f (from coreutils), in contrast to  what  the  original  documentation  below
+says.
+updating  the  access  time  for  the file, so a filesystem flush does not occur periodically when no log
+activity is happening.
+tailf is extremely useful for monitoring log files on a laptop when logging is infrequent  and  the  user
+wishes the hard disk to spin down to conserve battery life.
+%
+fallocate - preallocate or deallocate space to a file
+fallocate [-c|-p|-z] [-o offset] -l length [-n] filename
+fallocate -d [-o offset] [-l length] filename
+fallocate  is used to manipulate the allocated disk space for a file, either to deallocate or preallocate
+it.  For filesystems which support the fallocate system call, preallocation is done quickly by allocating
+creating a file by filling it with zeroes.
+%
+colcrt - filter nroff output for CRT previewing
+colcrt [options] [file...]
+colcrt  provides virtual half-line and reverse line feed sequences for terminals without such capability,
+and on which overstriking is destructive.  Half-line characters and underlining (changed to dashing  `-')
+are placed on new lines in between the normal output lines.
+-, --no-underlining
+Causes all half-lines to be printed, effectively double spacing the output.  Normally,  a  minimal
+%
+halt, poweroff, reboot - Halt, power-off or reboot the machine
+The following options are understood:
+--help
+Print a short help text and exit.
+%
+mkfs.bfs - make an SCO bfs filesystem
+mkfs.bfs [options] device [block-count]
+mkfs.bfs creates an SCO bfs filesystem on a block device (usually a disk partition or a file accessed via
+the loop device).
+The block-count parameter is the desired size of the filesystem, in blocks.  If nothing is specified, the
+entire partition will be used.
+-N, --inodes number
+%
+vipw, vigr - edit the password or group file
+vipw [options]
+vigr [options]
+vipw edits the password file after setting the appropriate locks, and does any necessary processing after
+the password file is unlocked.  If the password file is already locked for editing by another user,  vipw
+file in the same manner as vipw does the passwd file.
+ENVIRONMENT
+If the following environment variable exists, it will be utilized by vipw and vigr:
+%
+gapplication - D-Bus application launcher
+gapplication version
+gapplication list-apps
+gapplication launch APPID
+gapplication launch APPID [FILE...]
+gapplication list-actions APPID
+gapplication action APPID ACTION [PARAMETER]
+%
+gettext - translate message
+gettext [OPTION] [[TEXTDOMAIN] MSGID]
+gettext [OPTION] -s [MSGID]...
+The  gettext  program  translates  a natural language message into the user's language, by looking up the
+translation in a message catalog.
+Display native language translation of a textual message.
+-d, --domain=TEXTDOMAIN
+retrieve translated messages from TEXTDOMAIN
+-e     enable expansion of some escape sequences
+%
+veritysetup - manage dm-verity (block level verification) volumes
+veritysetup <options> <action> <action args>
+Veritysetup is used to configure dm-verity managed device-mapper mappings.
+Device-mapper verity target provides read-only transparent integrity checking of block devices using ker‐
+nel crypto API.
+The dm-verity devices are always read-only.
+Veritysetup supports these operations:
+format <data_device> <hash_device>
+%
+btrfs-map-logical - map btrfs logical extent to physical extent
+btrfs-map-logical <options> <device>
+btrfs-map-logical can be used to find out what the physical offsets are on the mirrors, the result is
+dumped into stdout in default.
+Mainly used for debug purpose.
+-l|--logical <logical_num>
+Logical extent to map.
+-c|--copy <copy>
+%
+diff - compare files line by line
+diff [OPTION]... FILES
+Compare FILES line by line.
+Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
+--normal
+output a normal diff (the default)
+-q, --brief
+report only when files differ
+-s, --report-identical-files
+%
+psktool - GnuTLS PSK tool
+psktool [-flags] [-flag [value]] [--option-name[[=| ]value]]
+All arguments must be options.
+Program   that generates random keys for use with TLS-PSK. The keys are stored in hexadecimal format in a
+key file.
+-d number, --debug=number
+constrained to being:
+in the range  0 through 9999
+%
+AS - the portable GNU assembler.
+as [-a[cdghlns][=file]] [--alternate] [-D]
+[--compress-debug-sections]  [--nocompress-debug-sections]
+[--debug-prefix-map old=new]
+[--defsym sym=val] [-f] [-g] [--gstabs]
+[--help] [-I dir] [-J]
+[-K] [-L] [--listing-lhs-width=NUM]
+[--listing-cont-lines=NUM] [--keep-locals]
+[--no-pad-sections]
+[-o objfile] [-R]
+[--hash-size=NUM] [--reduce-memory-overheads]
+[--statistics]
+[-v] [-version] [--version]
+%
+mkfs.minix - make a Minix filesystem
+mkfs.minix [options] device [size-in-blocks]
+mkfs.minix creates a Linux MINIX filesystem on a device (usually a disk partition).
+The device is usually of the following form:
+on a character device :-).
+%
+id - print real and effective user and group IDs
+id [OPTION]... [USER]
+Print user and group information for the specified USER, or (when USER omitted) for the current user.
+-a     ignore, for compatibility with other versions
+-Z, --context
+print only the security context of the process
+-g, --group
+print only the effective group ID
+-G, --groups
+%
+xmlwf - Determines if an XML document is well-formed
+xmlwf [-s] [-n] [-p] [-x] [-e encoding] [-w] [-d output-dir] [-c] [-m] [-r] [-t] [-v] [file ...]
+xmlwf uses the Expat library to determine if an XML document is well-formed. It is non-validating.
+If  you  do  not specify any files on the command-line, and you have a recent version of xmlwf, the input
+file will be read from standard input.
+A well-formed document must adhere to the following rules:
+xmlwf does not currently check for a valid XML declaration.
+%
+wipefs - wipe a signature from a device
+wipefs [-ahnpqtV] [-o offset] device...
+wipefs can erase filesystem, raid or partition-table signatures (magic strings) from the specified device
+to make the signatures invisible for libblkid.
+wipefs does not erase the filesystem itself nor any other data from the device.  When  used  without  any
+options, wipefs lists all visible filesystems and the offsets of their basic signatures.
+wipefs  calls  the  BLKRRPART  ioctl  when it has erased a partition-table signature to inform the kernel
+about the change.
+command  lists  only  the first offset where a magic string has been detected.  The device is not scanned
+%
+Wget - The non-interactive network downloader.
+wget [option]... [URL]...
+GNU Wget is a free utility for non-interactive download of files from the Web.  It supports HTTP, HTTPS,
+and FTP protocols, as well as retrieval through HTTP proxies.
+Wget is non-interactive, meaning that it can work in the background, while the user is not logged on.
+contrast, most of the Web browsers require constant user's presence, which can be a great hindrance when
+transferring a lot of data.
+Wget can follow links in HTML, XHTML, and CSS pages, to create local versions of remote web sites, fully
+downloading."  While doing that, Wget respects the Robot Exclusion Standard (/robots.txt).  Wget can be
+%
+vgs — report information about volume groups
+[-d|--debug]  [-h|-?|--help]  [--ignorelockingfailure]  [--ignoreskippedcluster]  [--logonly] [--namepre‐
+fixes] [--noheadings] [--nosuffix] [-P|--partial]  [--reportformat  {basic|json}]  [--rows]  [--separator
+Separator]  [--unbuffered]  [--units  hHbBsSkKmMgGtTpPeE]  [--unquoted]  [-v|--verbose] [--version] [Vol‐
+vgs produces formatted output about volume groups.
+--all  List all volume groups.  Equivalent to not specifying any volume groups.
+%
+hwclock - read or set the hardware clock (RTC)
+hwclock [function] [option...]
+hwclock  is  a  tool  for accessing the Hardware Clock.  It can: display the Hardware Clock time; set the
+Hardware Clock to a specified time; set the Hardware Clock from the System Clock; set  the  System  Clock
+from the Hardware Clock; compensate for Hardware Clock drift; correct the System Clock timescale; set the
+kernel's timezone, NTP timescale, and epoch (Alpha only); compare the System  and  Hardware  Clocks;  and
+predict future Hardware Clock values based on its drift rate.
+option --update-drift was added.  See their respective descriptions below.
+FUNCTIONS
+The following functions are mutually exclusive, only one can be given at a time.  If none is  given,  the
+%
+xfs_rtcp - XFS realtime copy command
+xfs_rtcp [ -e extsize ] [ -p ] source ... target
+xfs_rtcp -V
+xfs_rtcp  copies a file to the realtime partition on an XFS filesystem.  If there is more than one source
+and target, the final argument (the target) must be a directory which already exists.
+-e extsize
+Sets the extent size of the destination realtime file.
+-p     Use if the size of the source file is not an even multiple of the block size  of  the  destination
+filesystem. When -p is specified xfs_rtcp will pad the destination file to a size which is an even
+%
+iptables [-t table] {-A|-C|-D} chain rule-specification
+ip6tables [-t table] {-A|-C|-D} chain rule-specification
+iptables [-t table] -I chain [rulenum] rule-specification
+iptables [-t table] -R chain rulenum rule-specification
+iptables [-t table] -D chain rulenum
+iptables [-t table] -S [chain [rulenum]]
+iptables [-t table] {-F|-L|-Z} [chain [rulenum]] [options...]
+%
+texindex - sort Texinfo index files
+texindex [OPTION]... FILE...
+Generate  a  sorted index for each TeX output FILE.  Usually FILE... is specified as `foo.??' for a docu‐
+ment `foo.texi'.
+-h, --help
+display this help and exit
+--version
+display version information and exit
+--     end option processing
+%
+xfs_mkfile - create an XFS file
+xfs_mkfile [ -v ] [ -n ] [ -p ] size[k|b|m|g] filename ...
+xfs_mkfile -V
+xfs_mkfile  creates one or more files. The file is padded with zeroes by default.  The default size is in
+bytes, but it can be flagged as kilobytes, blocks, megabytes, or gigabytes with the k, b, m,  or  g  suf‐
+fixes, respectively.
+-v     Verbose. Report the names and sizes of created files.
+-n     No  bytes.  Create a holey file - that is, do not write out any data, just seek to end of file and
+write a block.
+%
+autopoint - copies standard gettext infrastructure
+autopoint [OPTION]...
+Copies standard gettext infrastructure files into a source package.
+--help print this help and exit
+--version
+print version information and exit
+-f, --force
+force overwriting of files that already exist
+%
+kbd_mode - report or set the keyboard mode
+kbd_mode [ -a | -u | -k | -s ] [ -C CONSOLE ]
+Without argument, kbd_mode prints the current keyboard mode (RAW, MEDIUMRAW or XLATE).  With argument, it
+sets the keyboard mode as indicated:
+-s: scancode mode (RAW),
+-k: keycode mode (MEDIUMRAW),
+-a: ASCII mode (XLATE),
+%
+pam_timestamp_check - Check to see if the default timestamp is valid
+pam_timestamp_check [-k] [-d] [target_user]
+With no arguments pam_timestamp_check will check to see if the default timestamp is valid, or optionally
+remove it.
+-k
+-d
+Instead of returning validity using an exit status, loop indefinitely, polling regularly and printing
+the status on standard output.
+%
+chroot - run command or interactive shell with special root directory
+chroot OPTION
+--groups=G_LIST
+--userspec=USER:GROUP
+specify user and group (ID or name) to use
+--skip-chdir
+do not change working directory to '/'
+%
+lsns - list namespaces
+lsns [options] [namespace]
+lsns  lists  information about all the currently accessible namespaces or about the given namespace.  The
+namespace identifier is an inode number.
+The default output is subject to change.  So whenever possible, you should avoid using default outputs in
+your  scripts.   Always  explicitly  define expected columns by using the --output option together with a
+columns list in environments where a stable output is required.
+(see unshare --mount-proc for more details).  lsns is not able to see persistent namespaces without  pro‐
+%
+lvmsadc — LVM system activity data collector
+lvmsadc
+%
+lzmainfo - show information stored in the .lzma file header
+lzmainfo [--help] [--version] [file...]
+fied file, decodes the header, and prints it to standard output in human readable format.   If  no  files
+are given or file is -, standard input is read.
+Usually  the most interesting information is the uncompressed size and the dictionary size.  Uncompressed
+size can be shown only if the file is in the non-streamed .lzma format variant.   The  amount  of  memory
+required to decompress the file is a few dozen kilobytes plus the dictionary size.
+lzmainfo is included in XZ Utils primarily for backward compatibility with LZMA Utils.
+%
+lnstat - unified linux network statistics
+lnstat [options]
+lnstat  is a generalized and more feature-complete replacement for the old rtstat program. It is commonly
+used to periodically print a selection of statistical values exported by  the  kernel.   In  addition  to
+routing  cache  statistics,  it  supports  any  kind of statistics the linux kernel exports via a file in
+/proc/net/stat/.
+Each file in /proc/net/stat/ contains a header line listing the column names.  These names  are  used  by
+lnstat  as keys for selecting which statistics to print. For every CPU present in the system, a line fol‐
+lows which lists the actual values for each column of the file. lnstat sums these  values  up  (which  in
+fact  are  counters)  before printing them. After each interval, only the difference to the last value is
+%
+envsubst - substitutes environment variables in shell format strings
+envsubst [OPTION] [SHELL-FORMAT]
+Substitutes the values of environment variables.
+Operation mode:
+-v, --variables
+output the variables occurring in SHELL-FORMAT
+Informative output:
+-h, --help
+display this help and exit
+-V, --version
+%
+iconv - convert text from one character encoding to another
+iconv [options] [-f from-encoding] [-t to-encoding] [inputfile]...
+The  iconv  program  reads in text in one encoding and outputs the text in another encoding.  If no input
+files are given, or if it is given as a dash (-), iconv reads from standard input.  If no output file  is
+given, iconv writes to standard output.
+If no from-encoding is given, the default is derived from the current locale's character encoding.  If no
+to-encoding is given, the default is derived from the current locale's character encoding.
+-f from-encoding, --from-code=from-encoding
+Use from-encoding for input characters.
+%
+kpropd  [-r  realm]  [-A  admin_server]  [-a  acl_file]  [-f  slave_dumpfile] [-F principal_database] [-p
+program.   If  incremental  propagation is enabled, it periodically requests incremental updates from the
+master KDC.
+When the slave receives a kprop request from the master, kpropd  accepts  the  dumped  KDC  database  and
+database  to  the slave servers.  Upon a successful download of the KDC database file, the slave Kerberos
+server will have an up-to-date KDC database.
+%
+pgrep, pkill - look up or signal processes based on name and other attributes
+pgrep [options] pattern
+pkill [options] pattern
+pgrep  looks  through the currently running processes and lists the process IDs which match the selection
+criteria to stdout.  All the criteria have to match.  For example,
+$ pgrep -u root sshd
+will only list the processes called sshd AND owned by root.  On the other hand,
+$ pgrep -u root,daemon
+will list the processes owned by root OR daemon.
+%
+fold - wrap each input line to fit in specified width
+fold [OPTION]... [FILE]...
+Wrap input lines in each FILE, writing to standard output.
+With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.
+Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
+-b, --bytes
+count bytes rather than columns
+-s, --spaces
+break at spaces
+%
+chrt - manipulate the real-time attributes of a process
+chrt [options] priority command [argument...]
+chrt [options] -p [priority] pid
+chrt  sets  or retrieves the real-time scheduling attributes of an existing pid, or runs command with the
+given attributes.
+POLICIES
+-o, --other
+-f, --fifo
+Set scheduling policy to SCHED_FIFO.
+%
+sync - Synchronize cached writes to persistent storage
+sync [OPTION] [FILE]...
+Synchronize cached writes to persistent storage
+If one or more files are specified, sync only them, or their containing file systems.
+-d, --data
+sync only file data, no unneeded metadata
+-f, --file-system
+sync the file systems that contain the files
+--help display this help and exit
+%
+lvconvert — change LV type and other utilities
+lvconvert [OPTION]...  VolumeGroup/LogicalVolume
+-b, --background
+--cachepolicy Policy
+--cachesettings Key=Value
+-c, --chunksize ChunkSize[b|B|s|S|k|K|m|M|g|G]
+--corelog
+--discards {ignore|nopassdown|passdown}
+-i, --interval Seconds
+--merge
+--mirrorlog {disk|core|mirrored}
+-m, --mirrors Number
+%
+dpa - DNS Packet Analyzer. Analyze DNS packets in ip trace files
+dpa [ OPTION ] TRACEFILE
+uniques (i.e. count all different occurences).
+-c expressionlist
+Count occurrences of matching expressions
+-f expression
+Filter: only process packets that match the expression
+-h     Show usage
+%
+unlink - call the unlink function to remove the specified file
+unlink FILE
+unlink OPTION
+Call the unlink function to remove the specified FILE.
+--help display this help and exit
+--version
+output version information and exit
+Written by Michael Stone.
+%
+ss - another utility to investigate sockets
+ss [options] [ FILTER ]
+ss  is  used to dump socket statistics. It allows showing information similar to netstat.  It can display
+more TCP and state informations than other tools.
+established connection.
+-h, --help
+Show summary of options.
+-V, --version
+%
+split - split a file into pieces
+split [OPTION]... [FILE [PREFIX]]
+With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.
+Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
+-a, --suffix-length=N
+--additional-suffix=SUFFIX
+append an additional SUFFIX to file names
+%
+dconf - Simple tool for manipulating a dconf database
+dconf read KEY
+dconf list DIR
+dconf write KEY VALUE
+dconf reset [-f] PATH
+dconf compile OUTPUT KEYFILEDIR
+dconf update
+dconf watch PATH
+%
+iptables-restore — Restore IP Tables
+ip6tables-restore — Restore IPv6 Tables
+iptables-restore [-chntv] [-M modprobe] [-T name] [file]
+ip6tables-restore [-chntv] [-M modprobe] [-T name] [file]
+iptables-restore  and  ip6tables-restore  are  used  to restore IP and IPv6 Tables from data specified on
+STDIN or in file. Use I/O redirection provided by your shell to read from a file or specify  file  as  an
+argument.
+-c, --counters
+restore the values of all packet and byte counters
+%
+tset, reset - terminal initialization
+tset [-IQVcqrsw] [-] [-e ch] [-i ch] [-k ch] [-m mapping] [terminal]
+reset [-IQVcqrsw] [-] [-e ch] [-i ch] [-k ch] [-m mapping] [terminal]
+mination is done as follows, using the first terminal type found.
+ting TERM according to the type passed to it by /etc/inittab.)
+%
+getent [option]... database key...
+are configured in /etc/nsswitch.conf.  If one or more key arguments are provided, then only  the  entries
+that  match  the  supplied keys will be displayed.  Otherwise, if no key is provided, all entries will be
+displayed (unless the database does not support enumeration).
+enumerating each socket address structure returned.
+%
+rndc - name server control utility
+rndc [-b source-address] [-c config-file] [-k key-file] [-s server] [-p port] [-q] [-r] [-V] [-y key_id]
+{command}
+rndc controls the operation of a name server. It supersedes the ndc utility that was provided in old BIND
+releases. If rndc is invoked with no command line options or arguments, it prints a short summary of the
+supported commands and the available options and their arguments.
+rndc communicates with the name server over a TCP connection, sending commands authenticated with digital
+signatures. In the current versions of rndc and named, the only supported authentication algorithms are
+command request and the name server's response. All commands sent over the channel must be signed by a
+key_id known to the server.
+%
+arping - send ARP REQUEST to a neighbour host
+arping [-AbDfhqUV] [-c count] [-w deadline] [-s source] {-I interface} {destination}
+Ping destination on device interface by ARP packets, using source address source.
+-A     The same as -U, but ARP REPLY packets used instead of ARP REQUEST.
+-b     Send  only MAC level broadcasts. Normally arping starts from sending broadcast, and switch to uni‐
+cast after reply received.
+Stop after sending count ARP REQUEST
+timeout expires.
+%
+gobject-query - display a tree of types
+gobject-query froots [OPTION...]
+gobject-query tree [OPTION...]
+gobject-query is a small utility that draws a tree of types.
+gobject-query takes a mandatory argument that specifies whether it should iterate over the fundamental
+types or print a type tree.
+froots
+iterate over fundamental roots
+%
+dbus-cleanup-sockets - clean up leftover sockets in a directory
+dbus-cleanup-sockets [DIRECTORY]
+The dbus-cleanup-sockets command cleans up unused D-Bus connection sockets. See
+http://www.freedesktop.org/software/dbus/ for more information about the big picture.
+If given no arguments, dbus-cleanup-sockets cleans up sockets in the standard default socket directory
+for the per-user-login-session message bus; this is usually /tmp. Optionally, you can pass a different
+directory on the command line.
+On Linux, this program is essentially useless, because D-Bus defaults to using "abstract sockets" that
+exist only in memory and don't have a corresponding file in /tmp.
+%
+lvrename — rename a logical volume
+[-v|--verbose] [--version]  [-f|--force]  [--noudevsync]  [--reportformat  {basic|json}]  {OldLogicalVol‐
+lvrename  renames an existing logical volume or an existing historical logical volume from OldLogicalVol‐
+--noudevsync
+Disable udev synchronisation. The process will not wait for notification from udev.  It will  con‐
+tinue irrespective of any possible udev processing in the background.  You should only use this if
+%
+msgattrib - attribute matching and manipulation on message catalog
+msgattrib [OPTION] [INPUTFILE]
+Filters  the  messages  of  a  translation  catalog  according  to  their attributes, and manipulates the
+attributes.
+Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
+Input file location:
+INPUTFILE
+input PO file
+-D, --directory=DIRECTORY
+add DIRECTORY to list for input files search
+%
+isc-hmac-fixup - fixes HMAC keys generated by older versions of BIND
+isc-hmac-fixup {algorithm} {secret}
+Versions of BIND 9 up to and including BIND 9.6 had a bug causing HMAC-SHA* TSIG keys which were longer
+incompatible with other DNS implementations.
+versions of BIND, when using long keys.  isc-hmac-fixup modifies those keys to restore compatibility.
+To modify a key, run isc-hmac-fixup and specify the key's algorithm and secret on the command line. If
+%
+rcp - Remote copy
+rcp [OPTION...] SOURCE DEST
+rcp [OPTION...] SOURCE... DIRECTORY
+rcp [OPTION...] --target-directory=DIRECTORY SOURCE...
+Remote copy SOURCE to DEST, or multiple SOURCE(s) to DIRECTORY.
+-6, --ipv6
+use only IPv6
+-d, --target-directory[=DIRECTORY]
+%
+sed - stream editor for filtering and transforming text
+sed [OPTION]... {script-only-if-no-other-script} [input-file]...
+Sed is a stream editor.  A stream editor is used to perform basic text transformations on an input stream
+(a file or input from a pipeline).  While in some ways similar to an editor which permits scripted  edits
+(such  as  ed),  sed works by making only one pass over the input(s), and is consequently more efficient.
+But it is sed's ability to filter text in a pipeline which particularly distinguishes it from other types
+of editors.
+-n, --quiet, --silent
+suppress automatic printing of pattern space
+-e script, --expression=script
+%
+run-parts - run scripts or programs in a directory
+run-parts  [--test]  [--verbose]  [--report] [--lsbsysinit] [--regex=RE] [--umask=umask] [--arg=argument]
+[--exit-on-error] [--help] [--version] [--list] [--reverse] [--] DIRECTORY
+run-parts -V
+run-parts runs all the executable files named within constraints  described  below,  found  in  directory
+directory.  Other files and directories are silently ignored.
+If  neither  the --lsbsysinit option nor the --regex option is given then the names must consist entirely
+If the --lsbsysinit option is given, then the names must not end in .dpkg-old  or .dpkg-dist or .dpkg-new
+or  .dpkg-tmp,  and must belong to one or more of the following namespaces: the LANANA-assigned namespace
+%
+ssh — OpenSSH SSH client (remote login program)
+[-l login_name] [-m mac_spec] [-O ctl_cmd] [-o option] [-p port] [-Q query_option] [-R address]
+[-S ctl_path] [-W host:port] [-w local_tun[:remote_tun]] [user@]hostname [command]
+ssh (SSH client) is a program for logging into a remote machine and for executing commands on a remote
+machine.  It is intended to provide secure encrypted communications between two untrusted hosts over an
+the secure channel.
+ssh connects and logs into the specified hostname (with optional user name).  The user must prove his/her
+identity to the remote machine using one of several methods (see below).
+%
+flex - the fast lexical analyser generator
+Generates programs that perform pattern-matching on text.
+Table Compression:
+-Ca, --align
+trade off larger tables for better memory alignment
+-Ce, --ecs
+construct equivalence classes
+-Cf    do not compress tables; use -f representation
+%
+trust - Tool for operating on the trust policy store
+trust list
+trust extract --filter=<what> --format=<type> /path/to/destination
+trust anchor /path/to/certificate.crt
+trust is a command line tool to examine and modify the shared trust policy store.
+See the various sub commands below. The following global options can be used:
+-v, --verbose
+Run in verbose mode with debug output.
+%
+preconv - convert encoding of input files to something GNU troff understands
+preconv [-dr] [-e encoding] [files ...]
+preconv -h | --help
+preconv -v | --version
+It is possible to have whitespace between the -e command line option and its parameter.
+standard output.  Currently, this means ASCII characters and ‘\[uXXXX]’ entities, where ‘XXXX’ is a hexa‐
+decimal  number  with four to six digits, representing a Unicode input code.  Normally, preconv should be
+invoked with the -k and -K options of groff.
+-d     Emit debugging messages to standard error (mainly the used encoding).
+%
+dircolors - color setup for ls
+dircolors [OPTION]... [FILE]
+Output commands to set the LS_COLORS environment variable.
+Determine format of output:
+-b, --sh, --bourne-shell
+output Bourne shell code to set LS_COLORS
+-c, --csh, --c-shell
+output C shell code to set LS_COLORS
+-p, --print-database
+output defaults
+%
+thin_dump - dump thin provisioning metadata from device or file to standard output
+thin_dump [options] {device|file}
+thin_dump  dumps  binary  thin provisioning metadata (optionally from alternate block; see option --meta‐
+data-snap) created by the device-mapper thin provisioning target on a device or file to  standard  output
+for  analysis or postprocessing in either XML or human readable format.  XML formated metadata can be fed
+device-mapper target) or file.
+-f, --format {xml|human_readable}
+Print output in XML or human readable format.
+%
+iptables-save — dump iptables rules to stdout
+ip6tables-save — dump iptables rules to stdout
+iptables-save [-M modprobe] [-c] [-t table]
+ip6tables-save [-M modprobe] [-c] [-t table]
+iptables-save  and  ip6tables-save  are used to dump the contents of IP or IPv6 Table in easily parseable
+format to STDOUT. Use I/O-redirection provided by your shell to write to a file.
+-M, --modprobe modprobe_program
+Specify the path to the modprobe program. By default, iptables-save  will  inspect  /proc/sys/ker‐
+nel/modprobe to determine the executable's path.
+%
+thin_repair - repair thin provisioning binary metadata from device/file to device/file
+thin_repair [options] -i {device|file} -o {device|file}
+thin_repair  reads  binary thin provisioning metadata created by the respective device-mapper target from
+one device or file , repairs it and writes it to another device or file.  If written to a metadata device
+, the metadata can be processed by the device-mapper target.
+-i, --input {device|file}
+Input file or device with binary metadata.
+-o, --output {device|file}
+Output  file  or  device for repaired binary metadata.  If a file is used then it must be preallo‐
+%
+msgcat - combines several message catalogs
+msgcat [OPTION] [INPUTFILE]...
+Concatenates  and  merges  the  specified PO files.  Find messages which are common to two or more of the
+extracted  comments,  and file positions will be cumulated, except that if --use-first is specified, they
+will be taken from the first PO file to define them.
+Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
+Input file location:
+INPUTFILE ...
+%
+whatis - display one-line manual page descriptions
+whatis [-dlv?V] [-r|-w] [-s list] [-m system[,...]] [-M path] [-L locale] [-C file] name ...
+Each  manual page has a short description available within it.  whatis searches the manual page names and
+displays the manual page descriptions of any name matched.
+sary to quote the name or escape (\) the special characters to stop the shell from interpreting them.
+index  databases  are  used  during  the search, and are updated by the mandb program.  Depending on your
+pages  have  been  installed.  To produce an old style text whatis database from the relative index data‐
+base, issue the command:
+%
+dnssec-importkey - import DNSKEY records from external systems so they can be managed
+dnssec-importkey [-K directory] [-L ttl] [-P date/offset] [-P sync date/offset] [-D date/offset]
+[-D sync date/offset] [-h] [-v level] [-V] {keyfile}
+dnssec-importkey {-f filename} [-K directory] [-L ttl] [-P date/offset] [-P sync date/offset]
+[-D date/offset] [-D sync date/offset] [-h] [-v level] [-V] [dnsname]
+dnssec-importkey reads a public DNSKEY record and generates a pair of .key/.private files. The DNSKEY
+.private files will be generated.
+The newly-created .private file does not contain private key data, and cannot be used for signing.
+However, having a .private file makes it possible to set publication (-P) and deletion (-D) times for the
+%
+logname - print user's login name
+logname [OPTION]
+Print the name of the current user.
+--help display this help and exit
+--version
+output version information and exit
+Written by FIXME: unknown.
+REPORTING BUGS
+%
+cat - concatenate files and print on the standard output
+cat [OPTION]... [FILE]...
+Concatenate FILE(s) to standard output.
+With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.
+-A, --show-all
+equivalent to -vET
+-b, --number-nonblank
+number nonempty output lines, overrides -n
+-e     equivalent to -vE
+%
+openvt - start a program on a new virtual terminal (VT).
+openvt  will find the first available VT, and run on it the given command with the given command options,
+standard input, output and error are directed to that terminal. The current search path ($PATH)  is  used
+to find the requested command. If no command is specified then the environment variable $SHELL is used.
+-c, --console=VTNUMBER
+plied VT for this to work;
+-f, --force
+Force opening a VT without checking whether it is already in use;
+%
+msgmerge - merge message catalog and template
+msgmerge [OPTION] def.po ref.pot
+Merges  two  Uniforum style .po files together.  The def.po file is an existing PO file with translations
+which will be taken over to the newly created file as long as they still match;  comments  will  be  pre‐
+served,  but  extracted comments and file positions will be discarded.  The ref.pot file is the last cre‐
+ated PO file with up-to-date source references but old translations, or a  PO  Template  file  (generally
+created  by  xgettext);  any translations or comments in the file will be discarded, however dot comments
+and file positions will be preserved.  Where an exact match cannot be found, fuzzy matching  is  used  to
+produce better results.
+Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
+Input file location:
+%
+grep, egrep, fgrep - print lines matching a pattern
+grep  searches  the named input FILEs for lines containing a match to the given PATTERN.  If no files are
+specified, or if the file “-” is given, grep searches  standard  input.   By  default,  grep  prints  the
+matching lines.
+In  addition,  the  variant  programs  egrep and fgrep are the same as grep -E and grep -F, respectively.
+These variants are deprecated, but are provided for backward compatibility.
+Generic Program Information
+--help Output a usage message and exit.
+%
+tc - show / manipulate traffic control settings
+dle qdisc-id ] qdisc [ qdisc specific parameters ]
+qdisc [ qdisc specific parameters ]
+protocol prio priority filtertype [ filtertype specific parameters ] flowid flow-id
+%
+systemd-inhibit - Execute a program with an inhibition lock taken
+lock will be acquired before the specified command line is executed and released afterwards.
+being recorded, or similar operations that should not be interrupted.
+%
+thin_trim - Issue discard requests for free pool space (offline tool).
+thin_trim [options] {device|file}
+thin_trim sends discard requests to the pool device for unprovisioned areas.
+--pool-inactive
+Indicates you are aware the pool should be inactive.  Suppresses a warning message and prompt.
+-h, --help
+Print help and exit.
+%
+Run  each  Texinfo  or (La)TeX FILE through TeX in turn until all cross-references are resolved, building
+all indices.  The directory containing each FILE is searched for included files.  The suffix of  FILE  is
+used  to determine its language ((La)TeX or Texinfo).  To process (e)plain TeX files, set the environment
+variable LATEX=tex.
+General options:
+-b, --batch
+%
+users - print the user names of users currently logged in to the current host
+users [OPTION]... [FILE]
+Output  who  is  currently  logged  in  according  to FILE.  If FILE is not specified, use /var/run/utmp.
+/var/log/wtmp as FILE is common.
+--help display this help and exit
+--version
+output version information and exit
+Written by Joseph Arceneaux and David MacKenzie.
+%
+nsenter - run program with namespaces of other processes
+nsenter [options] [program [arguments]]
+Enters  the namespaces of one or more other processes and then executes the specified program.  Enterable
+namespaces are:
+mount namespace
+Mounting and unmounting filesystems will not affect the rest of  the  system  (CLONE_NEWNS  flag),
+except  for filesystems which are explicitly marked as shared (with mount --make-shared; see /proc
+/self/mountinfo for the shared flag).
+UTS namespace
+Setting hostname or domainname will not affect the rest of the system.  (CLONE_NEWUTS flag)
+%
+tion  to  check  how many free blocks are present as contiguous and aligned free space. The percentage of
+contiguous free blocks of size and of alignment chunk_kb is reported.  It also displays the minimum/maxi‐
+tion can be used to gauge the level of free space fragmentation in the filesystem.
+-c chunk_kb
+available  in  units  of kilobytes (Kb).  The chunk size must be a power of two and be larger than
+%
+bzcat - decompresses files to stdout
+bzcat [ -s ] [ filenames ...  ]
+coding.   Compression  is  generally  considerably  better  than  that  achieved  by  more   conventional
+The command-line options are deliberately very similar to those of GNU gzip, but they are not identical.
+%
+cache_repair - repair cache binary metadata from device/file to device/file
+cache_repair [options] -i {device|file} -o {device|file}
+cache_repair  reads  binary cache metadata created by the respective device-mapper target from one device
+or file , repairs it and writes it to another device or file.  If written to  a  metadata  device  ,  the
+metadata can be processed by the device-mapper target.
+-i, --input {device|file}
+Input file or device with binary metadata.
+-o, --output {device|file}
+Output  file  or  device for repaired binary metadata.  If a file is used then it must be preallo‐
+%
+GNU Parted - a partition manipulation program
+parted [options] [device [command [options...]...]]
+parted is a program to manipulate disk partitions.  It supports multiple partition table formats, includ‐
+ing MS-DOS and GPT.  It is useful for creating space for new operating systems, reorganising disk  usage,
+and copying data to new hard disks.
+Info format.
+-h, --help
+displays a help message
+%
+dig - DNS lookup utility
+dig [@server] [-b address] [-c class] [-f filename] [-k filename] [-m] [-p port#] [-q name] [-t type]
+dig [-h]
+dig [global-queryopt...] [query...]
+dig (domain information groper) is a flexible tool for interrogating DNS name servers. It performs DNS
+lookups and displays the answers that are returned from the name server(s) that were queried. Most DNS
+administrators use dig to troubleshoot DNS problems because of its flexibility, ease of use and clarity
+of output. Other lookup tools tend to have less functionality than dig.
+Although dig is normally used with command-line arguments, it also has a batch mode of operation for
+%
+dmsetup — low level logical volume management
+dmsetup clear device_name
+dmsetup create device_name [-u|--uuid uuid] [--addnodeoncreate|--addnodeonresume] [-n|--notable|--table
+{table|table_file}] [--readahead {[+]sectors|auto|none}]
+dmsetup deps [-o options] [device_name]
+dmsetup help [-c|-C|--columns]
+dmsetup info [device_name]
+dmsetup info -c|-C|--columns [--count count] [--interval seconds] [--nameprefixes] [--noheadings] [-o
+fields] [-O|--sort sort_fields] [--separator separator] [device_name]
+dmsetup load device_name [--table {table|table_file}]
+dmsetup ls [--target target_type] [--exec command] [--tree] [-o options]
+dmsetup mangle [device_name]
+dmsetup message device_name sector message
+dmsetup mknodes [device_name]
+dmsetup reload device_name [--table {table|table_file}]
+%
+mv - move (rename) files
+mv [OPTION]... [-T] SOURCE DEST
+mv [OPTION]... SOURCE... DIRECTORY
+mv [OPTION]... -t DIRECTORY SOURCE...
+Rename SOURCE to DEST, or move SOURCE(s) to DIRECTORY.
+Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
+--backup[=CONTROL]
+make a backup of each existing destination file
+-b     like --backup but does not accept an argument
+%
+grub-reboot - set the default boot entry for GRUB, for the next boot only
+grub-reboot [OPTION] MENU_ENTRY
+Set the default boot menu entry for GRUB, for the next boot only.
+-h, --help
+print this message and exit
+-V, --version
+print the version information and exit
+--boot-directory=DIR
+expect GRUB images under the directory DIR/grub instead of the /boot/grub directory
+%
+pldd - display dynamic shared objects linked into a process
+pldd pid
+pldd option
+The  pldd command displays a list of the dynamic shared objects that are linked into the process with the
+-?, --help
+Display program help message.
+--usage
+Display a short usage message.
+%
+ldns-zsplit - split up a zone file
+-n NUMBER
+Split after NUMBER RRs, ldns-zsplit will not split in the middle of an RRs.
+Each part is saved with a numerical suffix, starting with .000. The largest suffix is thus .999.
+-o ORIGIN
+use ORIGIN as origin when reading the zonefile.
+-z     Sort the zone before splitting.
+%
+gsettings - GSettings configuration tool
+gsettings get SCHEMA [:PATH]  KEY
+gsettings monitor SCHEMA [:PATH]  [KEY]
+gsettings writable SCHEMA [:PATH]  KEY
+gsettings range SCHEMA [:PATH]  KEY
+gsettings describe SCHEMA [:PATH]  KEY
+gsettings set SCHEMA [:PATH]  KEY VALUE
+gsettings reset SCHEMA [:PATH]  KEY
+%
+lsipc - show information on IPC facilities currently employed in the system
+lsipc [options]
+lsipc  shows  information on the inter-process communication facilities for which the calling process has
+read access.
+-i, --id id
+bined  with  one  of  the  three  resource  options: -m, -q or -s.  It is possible to override the
+default output format for this option with the --list, --raw, --json or --export option.
+-g, --global
+%
+resize_reiserfs - resizer tool for the ReiserFS filesystem
+resize_reiserfs [ -s [+|-]size[K|M|G] ] [ -j dev ] [ -fqv ] device
+The  resize_reiserfs  tool resizes an unmounted reiserfs file system.  It enlarges or shrinks an reiserfs
+file system located on a device so that it will have size bytes or size=old_size +(-) size bytes if the +
+or - prefix is used.  If the -s option is not specified, the filesystem will be resized to fill the given
+ter is given in kilo-, mega-, gigabytes respectively.
+The resize_reiserfs program does not manipulate the size of the device. If you wish to enlarge a filesys‐
+titions,  by  deleting  the  partition and recreating it with a larger size (assuming there is free space
+after the partition in question).  Make sure you re-create it with the same  starting  disk  cylinder  as
+%
+ldns-keygen - generate a DNSSEC key pair
+ldns-keygen [ OPTION ] DOMAIN
+with the public DNSKEY, a .private file with the private keydata and a .ds with  the  DS  record  of  the
+DNSKEY record.
+ldns-keygen  can also be used to create symmetric keys (for TSIG) by selecting the appropriate algorithm:
+file.
+ldns-keygen prints the basename for the key files: K<name>+<alg>+<id>
+%
+-c, --iteration-count=NUM
+-l, --buflen=NUM
+Length of generated hash
+-s, --salt=NUM
+Length of salt
+%
+The  options  -v  and --version print the version information of the program to standard output and exit.
+The options -h and --help print a usage information of the program to standard output and stop  the  pro‐
+gram instantly.
+All  other options are assumed to be groffer options.  They are internally passed to groffer.  They over‐
+ride the behavior of the program.  The options are optional, they can be omitted.
+The filespec arguments correspond to the filespec arguments of groffer.  So they are either the names  of
+%
+nameif - name network interfaces based on MAC addresses
+nameif [-c configfile] [-s]
+nameif [-c configfile] [-s] {interface macaddress}
+nameif  renames  network  interfaces  based  on mac addresses. When no arguments are given /etc/mactab is
+read. Each line  of it contains an interface name and a Ethernet MAC address. Comments are allowed start‐
+ing  with #.  Otherwise the interfaces specified on the command line are processed.  nameif looks for the
+interface with the given MAC address and renames it to the name given.
+When the -s argument is given all error messages go to the syslog.
+When the -c argument is given with a file name that file is read instead of /etc/mactab.
+%
+ranlib - generate index to archive.
+ranlib [--plugin name] [-DhHvVt] archive
+ranlib generates an index to the contents of an archive and stores it in the archive.  The index lists
+each symbol defined by a member of an archive that is a relocatable object file.
+An archive with such an index speeds up linking to the library and allows routines in the library to call
+each other without regard to their placement in the archive.
+The GNU ranlib program is another form of GNU ar; running ranlib is completely equivalent to executing ar
+-s.
+%
+jfs_fscklog - extract a JFS fsck service log into a file and/or format and display the extracted file
+jfs_fscklog [ -d ] [ -e device ] [ -f output.file ] [ -p ] [ -V ]
+jfs_fscklog  with  option  -e device extracts the contents of either the most recent or immediately prior
+(specified with option -p) JFS fsck service log from the specified device, and writes  the  output  to  a
+If the -p option is used, the default file name is <pwd>fscklog.old.
+jfs_fscklog with option -d formats and displays the contents of the extracted file.
+jfs_fscklog with options -d and -e device extracts and displays the JFS fsck service log.
+-d     Format and display a previously extracted JFS fsck service log.
+%
+makeinfo [OPTION]... TEXINFO-FILE...
+Translate Texinfo source documentation to various other formats, by default Info files suitable for read‐
+ing online with Emacs or standalone GNU Info.
+not depend on the installed name.
+General options:
+--document-language=STR locale to use in translating Texinfo keywords
+for the output document (default C).
+--error-limit=NUM
+%
+psfgettable - extract the embedded Unicode character table from a console font
+psfgettable fontfile [outfile]
+psfgettable  extracts  the  embedded Unicode character table from a .psf format console font into a human
+the font is read from standard input.
+%
+iptables-xml — Convert iptables-save format to XML
+iptables-xml [-c] [-v]
+iptables-xml  is  used  to convert the output of iptables-save into an easily manipulatable XML format to
+STDOUT.  Use I/O-redirection provided by your shell to write to a file.
+-c, --combine
+combine consecutive rules with the same matches but different targets. iptables does not currently
+support more than one target per match, so this simulates that by collecting the targets from con‐
+secutive iptables rules into one action tag, but only when the rule matches are identical.  Termi‐
+nating actions like RETURN, DROP, ACCEPT and QUEUE are not combined with subsequent targets.
+-v, --verbose
+Output xml comments containing the iptables line from which the XML is derived
+%
+fgconsole - print the number of the active VT.
+fgconsole [--help|--version|--next-available]
+If the active Virtual Terminal is /dev/ttyN, then prints N on standard output.
+If the console is a serial console, then "serial" is printed instead.
+--next-available
+Will  show the next unallocated virtual terminal. Normally 6 virtual terminals are allocated, with
+%
+whoami - print effective userid
+whoami [OPTION]...
+Print the user name associated with the current effective user ID.  Same as id -un.
+--help display this help and exit
+--version
+output version information and exit
+Written by Richard Mlynarik.
+REPORTING BUGS
+%
+firewall-offline-cmd - firewalld offline command line client
+firewall-offline-cmd is an offline command line client of the firewalld daemon. It should be used only if
+the firewalld service is not running. For example to migrate from system-config-firewall/lokkit or in the
+install environment to configure firewall settings with kickstart.
+Some lokkit options can not be automatically converted for firewalld, they will result in an error or
+with custom rules, modules and masquerading.
+Check the firewall configuration after using this tool.
+%
+pcretest - a program for testing Perl-compatible regular expressions.
+pcretest [options] [input file [output file]]
+pcretest was written as a test program for the PCRE regular expression library itself, but it can also be
+gram;  for  details of the regular expressions themselves, see the pcrepattern documentation. For details
+The input for pcretest is a sequence of regular  expression  patterns  and  strings  to  be  matched,  as
+described  below. The output shows the result of each match. Options on the command line and the patterns
+control PCRE options and exactly what is output.
+As PCRE has evolved, it has acquired many different features, and as a result, pcretest now has rather  a
+lot  of  obscure  options  for  testing  every  possible  feature. Some of these options are specifically
+%
+btrfs-select-super - overwrite primary superblock with a backup copy
+btrfs-select-super -s number <device>
+for example when write barriers were disabled during a power failure and not all superblocks were
+written, or if the primary superblock is damaged, eg. accidentally overwritten.
+The filesystem specified by device must not be mounted.
+Prior to overwriting the primary superblock, please make sure that the backup copies are valid!
+To dump a superblock use the btrfs inspect-internal dump-super command, or the obsolete command
+btrfs-show-super.
+%
+localedef - compile locale definition files
+localedef [options] outputpath
+localedef --list-archive [options]
+localedef --delete-from-archive [options] localename ...
+localedef --add-to-archive [options] compiledpath
+localedef --version
+localedef --help
+localedef --usage
+The localedef program reads the indicated charmap and input files, compiles them to a binary form quickly
+put in outputpath.
+The outputpath argument is interpreted as follows:
+%
+bzcat - decompresses files to stdout
+bzcat [ -s ] [ filenames ...  ]
+coding.   Compression  is  generally  considerably  better  than  that  achieved  by  more   conventional
+The command-line options are deliberately very similar to those of GNU gzip, but they are not identical.
+%
+Run  each  Texinfo  or (La)TeX FILE through TeX in turn until all cross-references are resolved, building
+all indices.  The directory containing each FILE is searched for included files.  The suffix of  FILE  is
+used  to determine its language ((La)TeX or Texinfo).  To process (e)plain TeX files, set the environment
+variable LATEX=tex.
+General options:
+-b, --batch
+%
+vim - Vi IMproved, a programmers text editor
+vim [options] [file ..]
+vim [options] -
+vim [options] -t tag
+vim [options] -q [errorfile]
+ex
+view
+gvim gview evim eview
+rvim rview rgvim rgview
+Vim  is  a text editor that is upwards compatible to Vi.  It can be used to edit all kinds of plain text.
+It is especially useful for editing programs.
+%
+raw - bind a Linux raw character device
+raw /dev/raw/raw<N> <major> <minor>
+raw /dev/raw/raw<N> /dev/<blockdev>
+raw -q /dev/raw/raw<N>
+raw -qa
+kernel module later).
+raw is used in two modes: it either sets raw device bindings, or it queries existing bindings.  When set‐
+%
+grolbp [ -l ] [ --landscape ] [ -v ] [ --version ] [ -cn ] [ --copies=numcopies ] [ -ppaper_size ]
+[ --papersize=paper_size ] [ -oorientation ] [ --orientation=orientation ] [ -wwidth ]
+[ --linewidth=width ] [ -Fdir ] [ --fontdir=dir ] [ -h ] [ --help ] [ files... ]
+\D'R dh dv'
+Draw a rule (i.e. a solid black rectangle), with one corner at the current position, and the diag‐
+onally opposite corner at the current position +(dh,dv).
+%
+vipw, vigr - edit the password or group file
+vipw [options]
+vigr [options]
+vipw edits the password file after setting the appropriate locks, and does any necessary processing after
+the password file is unlocked.  If the password file is already locked for editing by another user,  vipw
+file in the same manner as vipw does the passwd file.
+ENVIRONMENT
+If the following environment variable exists, it will be utilized by vipw and vigr:
+%
+captest - a program to demonstrate capabilities
+captest [ --drop-all | --drop-caps | --id ] [ --init-grp ] [ --lock ] [ --text ]
+captest  is  a  program  that  demonstrates  and prints out the current process capabilities. Each option
+prints the same report. It will output current capabilities. then  it  will  try  to  access  /etc/shadow
+directly  to  show if that can be done. Then it creates a child process that attempts to read /etc/shadow
+and outputs the results of that. Then it outputs the capabilities that a child process would have.
+You can also apply file system capabilities to this program to study how they work. For example,  filecap
+/usr/bin/captest  chown.  Then  run captest as a normal user. Another interesting test is to make captest
+suid root so that you can see what the interaction is between root's credentials  and  capabilities.  For
+lation is possible. But do not leave this app setuid root after you are don testing so that  an  attacker
+cannot take advantage of it.
+%
+rmmod - Simple program to remove a module from the Linux Kernel
+rmmod [-f] [-s] [-v] [modulename]
+rmmod is a trivial program to remove a module (when module unloading support is provided) from the
+-v, --verbose
+Print messages about what the program is doing. Usually rmmod prints messages only if something goes
+wrong.
+-f, --force
+when the kernel was compiled. With this option, you can remove modules which are being used, or which
+%
+ipcs - show information on IPC facilities
+ipcs [options]
+ipcs  shows  information  on the inter-process communication facilities for which the calling process has
+read access.  By default it shows information about all three resources: shared memory segments,  message
+queues, and semaphore arrays.
+-i, --id id
+bined with one of the three resource options: -m, -q or -s.
+-h, --help
+Display help text and exit.
+%
+routel - list routes with pretty output format
+routef - flush routes
+routel [tablenr [raw ip args...]]
+routef
+The  routel  script will list routes in a format that some might consider easier to interpret then the ip
+route list equivalent.
+The routef script does not take any arguments and will simply flush the routing  table  down  the  drain.
+FILES
+/usr/bin/routef
+/usr/bin/routel
+%
+Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
+-c, --check
+checks the syntax only
+-o, --output=FILE
+output file
+-h, --help
+%
+uptime - Tell how long the system has been running.
+uptime [options]
+uptime  gives a one line display of the following information.  The current time, how long the system has
+System  load averages is the average number of processes that are either in a runnable or uninterruptable
+state.  A process in a runnable state is either using the CPU or waiting to use the CPU.   A  process  in
+uninterruptable  state  is waiting for some I/O access, eg waiting for disk.  The averages are taken over
+the three time intervals.  Load averages are not normalized for the number of CPUs in a system, so a load
+%
+xz, unxz, xzcat, lzma, unlzma, lzcat - Compress or decompress .xz and .lzma files
+xz [option...]  [file...]
+unxz is equivalent to xz --decompress.
+xzcat is equivalent to xz --decompress --stdout.
+lzma is equivalent to xz --format=lzma.
+unlzma is equivalent to xz --format=lzma --decompress.
+lzcat is equivalent to xz --format=lzma --decompress --stdout.
+When  writing  scripts  that  need  to decompress files, it is recommended to always use the name xz with
+appropriate arguments (xz -d or xz -dc) instead of the names unxz and xzcat.
+%
+msguniq - unify duplicate translations in message catalog
+msguniq [OPTION] [INPUTFILE]
+Unifies  duplicate  translations in a translation catalog.  Finds duplicate translations of the same mes‐
+sage ID.  Such duplicates are invalid input for other programs  like  msgfmt,  msgmerge  or  msgcat.   By
+default,  duplicates  are merged together.  When using the --repeated option, only duplicates are output,
+and all other messages are discarded.  Comments and extracted comments will be cumulated, except that  if
+--use-first  is  specified,  they will be taken from the first translation.  File positions will be cumu‐
+lated.  When using the --unique option, duplicates are discarded.
+Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
+Input file location:
+INPUTFILE
+%
+newgrp - log in to a new group
+newgrp [group]
+logged in, and the current directory is unchanged, but calculations of access permissions  to  files  are
+performed with respect to the new group ID.
+If no group is specified, the GID is changed to the login GID.
+FILES
+/etc/group
+/etc/passwd
+%
+nl-qdisc-{add|list|delete} - Manage queueing disciplines
+The nl-qdisc tools allow to manage and configure queueing disciplines (qdiscs) in the kernel.
+-h or --help
+Print help text to console and exit.
+-v or --version
+%
+gnutls-cli - GnuTLS client
+gnutls-cli [-flags] [-flag [value]] [--option-name[[=| ]value]] [hostname]
+Simple client program to set up a TLS connection to some other computer.  It sets up a TLS connection and
+forwards data from the standard input to the secured socket and vice versa.
+-d number, --debug=number
+constrained to being:
+in the range  0 through 9999
+%
+xfs_repair - repair an XFS filesystem
+xfs_repair  [  -dfLnPv  ]  [  -m  maxmem ] [ -c subopt=value ] [ -o subopt[=value] ] [ -t interval ] [ -l
+logdev ] [ -r rtdev ] device
+xfs_repair -V
+the  device  argument  which  should  be  the  device name of the disk partition or volume containing the
+filesystem. If given the name of a block device, xfs_repair will attempt to find the raw  device  associ‐
+ated with the specified block device and will use the raw device instead.
+inconsistent or corrupt.
+%
+addgnupghome - Create .gnupg home directories
+If  GnuPG  is installed on a system with existing user accounts, it is sometimes required to populate the
+GnuPG home directory with existing files.  Especially a ‘trustlist.txt’ and a keybox  with  some  initial
+‘/etc/skel/.gnupg’ to the home directories of the accounts given on the command line.  It takes care  not
+to overwrite existing GnuPG home directories.
+addgnupghome is invoked by root as:
+%
+realpath - print the resolved path
+realpath [OPTION]... FILE...
+Print the resolved absolute file name; all but the last component must exist
+-e, --canonicalize-existing
+all components of the path must exist
+-m, --canonicalize-missing
+no path components need exist or be a directory
+-L, --logical
+resolve '..' components before symlinks
+%
+pvcreate — initialize a disk or partition for use by LVM
+[-f[f]|--force [--force]] [-y|--yes] [--labelsector] [--bootloaderareasize size] [-M|--metadatatype type]
+[--[pv]metadatacopies  NumberOfCopies]  [--metadatasize  size]  [--metadataignore {y|n}] [--dataalignment
+alignment] [--dataalignmentoffset alignment_offset] [--restorefile file] [--norestorefile]  [--reportfor‐
+mat {basic|json}] [--setphysicalvolumesize size] [-u|--uuid uuid] [-Z|--zero {y|n}] PhysicalVolume [Phys‐
+icalVolume...]
+pvcreate initializes PhysicalVolume for later use by the Logical Volume Manager (LVM).  Each PhysicalVol‐
+ume  can  be  a  disk partition, whole disk, meta device, or loopback file.  For DOS disk partitions, the
+first sector with:
+%
+stat - display file or file system status
+stat [OPTION]... FILE...
+Display file or file system status.
+Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
+-L, --dereference
+follow links
+-f, --file-system
+display file system status instead of file status
+-c  --format=FORMAT
+%
+lvmsar — LVM system activity reporter
+lvmsar
+%
+nsupdate - Dynamic DNS update utility
+nsupdate [-d] [-D] [-L level] [[-g] | [-o] | [-l] | [-y [hmac:]keyname:secret] | [-k keyfile]]
+[-t timeout] [-u udptimeout] [-r udpretries] [-R randomdev] [-v] [-T] [-P] [-V] [filename]
+allows resource records to be added or removed from a zone without manually editing the zone file. A
+single update request can contain requests to add or remove more than one resource record.
+Zones that are under dynamic control via nsupdate or a DHCP server should not be edited by hand. Manual
+edits could conflict with dynamic updates and cause data to be lost.
+The resource records that are dynamically added or removed with nsupdate have to be in the same zone.
+record.
+%
+grub-mkimage - make a bootable image of GRUB
+grub-mkimage [OPTION...] [OPTION]... [MODULES]
+Make a bootable image of GRUB.
+-c, --config=FILE
+embed FILE as an early config
+-C, --compression=(xz|none|auto)
+choose the compression to use for core image
+-d, --directory=DIR
+use images and modules under DIR [default=/usr/lib/grub/<platform>]
+%
+getcap - examine file capabilities
+getcap [-v] [-r] [-h] filename [ ... ]
+getcap displays the name and capabilities of each specified
+-r  enables recursive search.
+-v  enables to display all searched entries, even if it has no file-capabilities.
+-h  prints quick usage.
+filename
+One file per line.
+%
+firewall-config - firewalld GUI configuration tool
+firewall-config is a GUI configuration tool for firewalld.
+firewall-config does not support any special options. The only options that can be used are the general
+options that Gtk uses for Gtk application initialization. For more information on these options, please
+have a look at the runtime documentation for Gtk.
+The following options are supported:
+-h, --help
+Prints a short help text and exists.
+%
+rtmon - listens to and monitors RTnetlink
+rtmon [ options ] file FILE [ all | LISTofOBJECTS ]
+rtmon listens on netlink socket and monitors routing table changes.
+rtmon  can  be  started  before  the  first  network configuration command is issued.  For example if you
+insert:
+rtmon file /var/log/rtmon.log
+in a startup script, you will be able to view the full history later.  Certainly, it is possible to start
+rtmon at any time. It prepends the history with the state snapshot dumped at the moment of starting.
+%
+mkfs.cramfs - make compressed ROM file system
+mkfs.cramfs [options] directory file
+Files  on  cramfs  file  systems are zlib-compressed one page at a time to allow random read access.  The
+metadata is not compressed, but is expressed in a terse representation that is more space-efficient  than
+conventional file systems.
+The  file  system  is  intentionally read-only to simplify its design; random write access for compressed
+files is difficult to implement.  cramfs ships with a utility (mkcramfs) to pack files  into  new  cramfs
+images.
+%
+named-rrchecker - syntax checker for individual DNS resource records
+named-rrchecker [-h] [-o origin] [-p] [-u] [-C] [-T] [-P]
+named-rrchecker read a individual DNS resource record from standard input and checks if it is
+syntactically correct.
+The -h prints out the help menu.
+The -o origin option specifies a origin to be used when interpreting the record.
+The -p prints out the resulting record in canonical form. If there is no canonical form defined then the
+record will be printed in unknown record format.
+The -u prints out the resulting record in unknown record form.
+%
+ing, otherwise the expansion of the FILES.
+together with all the previous files.
+Operation modes:
+%
+pvchange — change attributes of a physical volume
+[--deltag Tag] [--metadataignore {y|n}] [-h|-?|--help] [--reportformat {basic|json}] [-S|--select  Selec‐
+tion] [-t|--test] [-v|--verbose] [-a|--all] [-x|--allocatable {y|n}] [-u|--uuid] [PhysicalVolumePath...]
+pvchange allows you to change the allocation permissions of one or more physical volumes.
+-a, --all
+If  PhysicalVolumePath  is not specified on the command line all physical volumes are searched for
+and used.
+%
+Generate Makefile.in for configure from Makefile.am.
+Operation modes:
+--help print this help, then exit
+--version
+print version number, then exit
+-v, --verbose
+verbosely list files processed
+%
+ctrlaltdel - set the function of the Ctrl-Alt-Del combination
+ctrlaltdel hard|soft
+Based  on  examination  of the linux/kernel/reboot.c code, it is clear that there are two supported func‐
+tions that the Ctrl-Alt-Del sequence can perform.
+is the default.
+soft   Make the kernel send the SIGINT (interrupt) signal to the init process (this is always the process
+version that you are currently using.
+%
+file — determine file type
+file [-bcdEhiklLNnprsvzZ0] [--apple] [--extension] [--mime-encoding] [--mime-type] [-e testname]
+[-F separator] [-f namefile] [-m magicfiles] [-P name=value] file ...
+file -C [-m magicfiles]
+file [--help]
+file tests each argument in an attempt to classify it.  There are three sets of tests, performed in this
+order: filesystem tests, magic tests, and language tests.  The first test that succeeds causes the file
+type to be printed.
+The type printed will usually contain one of the words text (the file contains only printing characters and
+a few common control characters and is probably safe to read on an ASCII terminal), executable (the file
+%
+firewall-cmd - firewalld command line client
+firewall-cmd is the command line client of the firewalld daemon. It provides interface to manage runtime
+and permanent configuration.
+things can get changed in the runtime or permanent configuration.
+The following options are supported:
+General Options
+-h, --help
+%
+Reads  a  PIC  program  as input; produces an image file (by default in Portable Network Graphics format)
+images of mathematical formulae.
+PIC  is  a  rather  expressive graphics minilanguage suitable for producing box-and-arrow diagrams of the
+kind frequently used in technical papers and textbooks.  The language  is  sufficiently  flexible  to  be
+quite  useful  for  state charts, Petri-net diagrams, flow charts, simple circuit schematics, jumper lay‐
+outs, and other kinds of illustration involving repetitive uses of simple geometric  forms  and  splines.
+Because PIC descriptions are procedural and object-based, they are both compact and easy to modify.
+The  PIC  language  is  fully documented in Making Pictures With GNU PIC, a document which is part of the
+%
+gpasswd - administer /etc/group and /etc/gshadow
+gpasswd [option] group
+The gpasswd command is used to administer /etc/group, and /etc/gshadow. Every group can have
+administrators, members and a password.
+System administrators can use the -A option to define group administrator(s) and the -M option to define
+members. They have all rights of group administrators and members.
+gpasswd called by a group administrator with a group name only prompts for the new password of the group.
+the password.
+%
+fmt - simple optimal text formatter
+fmt [-WIDTH] [OPTION]... [FILE]...
+Reformat  each paragraph in the FILE(s), writing to standard output.  The option -WIDTH is an abbreviated
+form of --width=DIGITS.
+With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.
+Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
+-c, --crown-margin
+preserve indentation of first two lines
+-p, --prefix=STRING
+%
+lvmdump [-a] [-c] [-d directory] [-h] [-l] [-m] [-p] [-s] [-u]
+for submission along with a problem report.
+The content of the tarball is as follows:
+- dmsetup info
+- table of currently running processes
+- recent entries from /var/log/messages (containing system messages)
+- complete lvm configuration and cache (content of /etc/lvm)
+- list of device nodes present under /dev
+- list of files present /sys/block
+- list of files present /sys/devices/virtual/block
+%
+ldns-notify - notify DNS servers that updates are available
+ldns-notify [options] -z zone servers
+the master servers. It can perform TSIG signatures and it can add a SOA  serial  number  of  the  updated
+zone.  If a server already has that serial number it will disregard the message.
+-z zone
+The zone that is updated.
+-h     Show usage and exit
+-v     Show the version and exit
+%
+mmroff - cross reference preprocessor
+mmroff [ -x ] groff_arguments
+mmroff  is  a  simple  preprocessor  for  groff,  it  is  used  for expanding cross references in mm, see
+to do the real processing when the cross reference file is up to date.
+isn't always needed to have accurate cross references and by using this option groff will only  be
+run once.
+FILES
+%
+readelf - Displays information about ELF files.
+readelf [-a|--all]
+[-h|--file-header]
+[-l|--program-headers|--segments]
+[-S|--section-headers|--sections]
+[-g|--section-groups]
+[-t|--section-details]
+[-e|--headers]
+[-s|--syms|--symbols]
+[--dyn-syms]
+[-n|--notes]
+[-r|--relocs]
+[-u|--unwind]
+[-d|--dynamic]
+[-V|--version-info]
+%
+dumpkeys - dump keyboard translation tables
+dumpkeys   [  -hilfn  -ccharset  --help  --short-info  --long-info  --numeric  --full-table  --funcs-only
+--keys-only --compose-only --charset=charset ]
+dumpkeys writes, to the standard output, the  current  contents  of  the  keyboard  driver's  translation
+Using the various options, the format of the output can be controlled and also other information from the
+-h --help
+Prints the program's version number and a short usage message to the program's standard error out‐
+put and exits.
+%
+external-journal ] [ -E extended_options ] [ -z undo_file ] device
+use  a  journal, if the system has been shut down uncleanly without any errors, normally, after replaying
+the committed transactions  in the journal, the file system should  be  marked  as  clean.    Hence,  for
+indicates that further checking is required.
+-n  option is specified, and -c, -l, or -L options are not specified.   However, even if it is safe to do
+%
+numastat
+numastat - Show per-NUMA-node memory statistics for processes and the operating system
+numastat
+numastat [-V]
+numastat [<PID>|<pattern>...]
+numastat [-c] [-m] [-n] [-p <PID>|<pattern>] [-s[<node>]] [-v] [-z] [<PID>|<pattern>...]
+numastat  with no command options or arguments at all, displays per-node NUMA hit and miss system statis‐
+previous  long-standing  numastat  perl  script,  written by Andi Kleen.  The default numastat statistics
+shows per-node numbers (in units of pages of memory) in these categories:
+%
+jfs_logdump - dump a JFS formatted device's journal log
+jfs_logdump [ -a ] device
+jfs_logdump  dumps  the  contents  of the journal log from the specified JFS formatted device into output
+file ./jfslog.dmp.
+device is the special file name corresponding to the actual device from which the  journal  log  will  be
+jfs_logdump must be run as root.
+-a     Dump  the  entire contents of the journal log instead of just the committed transactions since the
+last synch point.
+%
+man - an interface to the on-line reference manuals
+man [-C file] [-d] [-D] [--warnings[=warnings]] [-R encoding] [-L locale] [-m system[,...]] [-M path] [-S
+list] [-e extension] [-i|-I] [--regex|--wildcard] [--names-only] [-a] [-u] [--no-subpages] [-P pager] [-r
+prompt]  [-7]  [-E  encoding]  [--no-hyphenation]  [--no-justification]  [-p  string]  [-t]  [-T[device]]
+[-H[browser]] [-X[dpi]] [-Z] [[section] page ...] ...
+man -k [apropos options] regexp ...
+man -K [-w|-W] [-S list] [-i|-I] [--regex] [section] term ...
+man -f [whatis options] page ...
+man -l [-C file] [-d] [-D] [--warnings[=warnings]] [-R encoding] [-L locale] [-P pager] [-r prompt]  [-7]
+[-E encoding] [-p string] [-t] [-T[device]] [-H[browser]] [-X[dpi]] [-Z] file ...
+man -w|-W [-C file] [-d] [-D] page ...
+man -c [-C file] [-d] [-D] page ...
+man [-?V]
+%
+scp — secure copy (remote file copy program)
+needed for authentication.
+file names containing ‘:’ as host specifiers.  Copies between two remote hosts are also permitted.
+The options are as follows:
+%
+xfs_quota - manage use of quota on XFS filesystems
+xfs_quota  [ -x ] [ -p prog ] [ -c cmd ] ... [ -d project ] ... [ -D projects_file ] [ -P projid_file ] [
+path ... ]
+xfs_quota -V
+xfs_quota is a utility for reporting and editing various aspects of filesystem quota.
+The options to xfs_quota are:
+gram exits.
+-p prog   Set the program name for prompts and some error messages, the default value is xfs_quota.
+%
+talk - Talk client
+talk [OPTION...] person [ttyname]
+Talk to another user.
+-?, --help
+give this help list
+--usage
+give a short usage message
+-V, --version
+print program version
+%
+With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.
+Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
+-d, --decode
+decode data
+-i, --ignore-garbage
+when decoding, ignore non-alphabet characters
+%
+addpart - tell the kernel about the existence of a partition
+addpart device partition start length
+addpart  tells  the Linux kernel about the existence of the specified partition.  The command is a simple
+wrapper around the "add partition" ioctl.
+PARAMETERS
+device The disk device.
+partition
+The partition number.
+%
+pvremove — remove a physical volume
+[-f[f]|--force [--force]] [--reportformat {basic|json}] [-y|--yes] PhysicalVolume [PhysicalVolume...]
+pvremove wipes the label on a device so that LVM will no longer recognise it as a physical volume.
+-ff, --force --force
+Force the removal of a physical volume belonging to an  existing  volume  group.   Normally  vgre‐
+by some active logical volume.
+%
+pwconv, pwunconv, grpconv, grpunconv - convert to and from shadow passwords and groups
+pwconv [options]
+pwunconv [options]
+grpconv [options]
+grpunconv [options]
+The pwconv command creates shadow from passwd and an optionally existing shadow.
+The pwunconv command creates passwd from passwd and shadow and then removes shadow.
+The grpconv command creates gshadow from group and an optionally existing gshadow.
+%
+sleep - delay for a specified amount of time
+sleep NUMBER[SUFFIX]...
+sleep OPTION
+trary  floating point number.  Given two or more arguments, pause for the amount of time specified by the
+sum of their values.
+--help display this help and exit
+--version
+output version information and exit
+%
+vgcfgrestore — restore volume group descriptor area
+vgcfgbackup.  You can specify a backup file with --file.  If no backup file is specified, the most recent
+-l, --list
+%
+rtpr - replace backslashes with newlines.
+rtpr is a trivial bash script which converts backslashes in standard input to newlines. It's sole purpose
+is to be fed with input from ip when executed with it's --oneline flag.
+ip --oneline address show | rtpr
+Undo oneline converted ip-address output.
+Stephen Hemminger <shemming@brocade.com>
+%
+useradd - create a new user or update default new user information
+useradd [options] LOGIN
+useradd -D
+useradd -D [options]
+When invoked without the -D option, the useradd command creates a new user account using the values
+specified on the command line plus the default values from the system. Depending on command line options,
+initial files.
+By default, a group will also be created for the new user (see -g, -N, -U, and USERGROUPS_ENAB).
+%
+dnssec-keyfromlabel - DNSSEC key generation tool
+[-D sync date/offset] [-E engine] [-f flag] [-G] [-I date/offset] [-i interval] [-k]
+[-K directory] [-L ttl] [-n nametype] [-P date/offset] [-P sync date/offset]
+[-p protocol] [-R date/offset] [-S key] [-t type] [-v level] [-V] [-y] {name}
+dnssec-keyfromlabel generates a key pair of files that referencing a key object stored in a cryptographic
+hardware service module (HSM). The private key file can be used for DNSSEC signing of zone data as if it
+were a conventional signing key created by dnssec-keygen, but the key material is stored within the HSM,
+and the actual signing takes place there.
+key is being generated.
+%
+xzgrep - search compressed files for a regular expression
+xzgrep [grep_options] [-e] pattern file...
+xzegrep ...
+xzfgrep ...
+lzgrep ...
+lzegrep ...
+lzfgrep ...
+%
+chcpu - configure CPUs
+chcpu -c|-d|-e|-g cpu-list
+chcpu -p mode
+chcpu -r|-h|-V
+chcpu  can  modify  the  state of CPUs.  It can enable or disable CPUs, scan for new CPUs, change the CPU
+dispatching mode of the underlying hypervisor, and request CPUs from the hypervisor (configure) or return
+CPUs to the hypervisor (deconfigure).
+Some options have a cpu-list argument.  Use this argument to specify a comma-separated list of CPUs.  The
+%
+nologin - politely refuse a login
+nologin [-V] [-h]
+nologin  displays  a  message  that  an account is not available and exits non-zero.  It is intended as a
+replacement shell field to deny login access to an account.
+If the file /etc/nologin.txt exists, nologin displays its contents to the user  instead  of  the  default
+message.
+-h, --help
+Display help text and exit.
+%
+pvs — report information about physical volumes
+[-d|--debug]  [-h|-?|--help]  [--ignorelockingfailure]  [--ignoreskippedcluster]  [--logonly] [--namepre‐
+fixes] [--noheadings] [--nosuffix] [-P|--partial]  [--reportformat  {basic|json}]  [--rows]  [--segments]
+[--separator  Separator]  [--unbuffered] [--units hHbBsSkKmMgGtTpPeE] [--unquoted] [-v|--verbose] [--ver‐
+sion] [PhysicalVolume [PhysicalVolume...]]
+pvs produces formatted output about physical volumes.
+%
+agetty - alternative Linux getty
+agetty [options] port [baud_rate...] [term]
+agetty  opens  a  tty  port, prompts for a login name and invokes the /bin/login command.  It is normally
+agetty has several non-standard features that are useful for hardwired and for dial-in lines:
+when it reads a login name.  The program can handle 7-bit characters with even, odd, none or space
+Control-U  (kill);  DEL  and  backspace (erase); carriage return and line feed (end of line).  See
+also the --erase-chars and --kill-chars options.
+%
+ldns-revoke - sets the revoke bit of a DNSKEY
+ldns-revoke file
+ldns-revoke  is  used  to  revoke a public DNSKEY RR.  When run it will read file with a DNSKEY RR in it,
+sets the revoke bit and write back the output to file .
+-n     Write the result to stdout instead of a file
+Written by the ldns team as an example for ldns usage.
+REPORTING BUGS
+Report bugs to <ldns-team@nlnetlabs.nl>.
+%
+ebtables [-t table ] -[ACDI] chain rule specification [match extensions] [watcher extensions] target
+ebtables [-t table ] -P chain ACCEPT | DROP | RETURN
+ebtables [-t table ] -F [chain]
+ebtables [-t table ] -Z [chain]
+ebtables [-t table ] -N chain [-P ACCEPT | DROP | RETURN]
+ebtables [-t table ] -X [chain]
+ebtables [-t table ] -E old-chain-name new-chain-name
+ebtables [-t table ] --init-table
+ebtables [-t table ] [--atomic-file file] --atomic-commit
+ebtables [-t table ] [--atomic-file file] --atomic-init
+ebtables [-t table ] [--atomic-file file] --atomic-save
+%
+yacc - GNU Project parser generator
+yacc [OPTION]... FILE
+information.
+Written by Paul Eggert.
+REPORTING BUGS
+Report bugs to <bug-bison@gnu.org>.
+%
+systemd-analyze - Analyze system boot-up performance
+%
+dnssec-revoke - set the REVOKED bit on a DNSSEC key
+dnssec-revoke [-hr] [-v level] [-V] [-K directory] [-E engine] [-f] [-R] {keyfile}
+creates a new pair of key files containing the now-revoked key.
+-h
+Emit usage message and exit.
+-K directory
+Sets the directory in which the key files are to reside.
+-r
+%
+lspci - list all PCI devices
+lspci [options]
+lspci  is  a  utility  for  displaying information about PCI buses in the system and devices connected to
+them.
+By default, it shows a brief list of devices. Use the options described below to request  either  a  more
+verbose output or output intended for parsing by other programs.
+If you are going to report bugs in PCI device drivers or in lspci itself, please include output of "lspci
+-vvx" or even better "lspci -vvxxx" (however, see below for possible caveats).
+Some parts of the output, especially in the highly verbose modes, are probably intelligible only to expe‐
+rienced PCI hackers. For exact definitions of the fields, please consult either the PCI specifications or
+%
+screen [ -options ] [ cmd [ args ] ]
+screen -r [[pid.]tty[.host]]
+screen -r sessionowner/[[pid.]tty[.host]]
+Screen  is  a  full-screen  window manager that multiplexes a physical terminal between several processes
+dards (e.g. insert/delete line and support for multiple character sets).  There is a  scrollback  history
+buffer  for  each virtual terminal and a copy-and-paste mechanism that allows moving text regions between
+windows.
+When screen is called, it creates a single window with a shell in it (or the specified command) and  then
+gets  out  of your way so that you can use the program as you normally would.  Then, at any time, you can
+%
+kernel-install - Add and remove kernel and initramfs images to and from /boot
+kernel-install is used to install and remove kernel and initramfs images to and from /boot.
+kernel-install will execute the files located in the directory /usr/lib/kernel/install.d/ and the local
+administration directory /etc/kernel/install.d/. All files are collectively sorted and executed in
+lexical order, regardless of the directory in which they live. However, files with identical filenames
+replace each other. Files in /etc/kernel/install.d/ take precedence over files with the same name in
+if needed; a symbolic link in /etc/kernel/install.d/ with the same name as an executable in
+/usr/lib/kernel/install.d/, pointing to /dev/null, disables the executable entirely. Executables must
+have the extension ".install"; other extensions are ignored.
+%
+setterm - set terminal attributes
+setterm [options]
+setterm  writes  to  standard output a character string that will invoke the specified terminal capabili‐
+ties.  Where possible terminfo is consulted to find the string to  use.   Some  options  however  (marked
+minal type is "con" or "linux" the string that invokes the specified capabilities on the PC Minix virtual
+console driver is output.  Options that are not implemented by the terminal are ignored.
+For boolean options (on or off), the default is on.
+%
+mapscrn - load screen output mapping table
+mapscrn [-v] [-o map.orig] mapfile
+The mapscrn command is obsolete - its function is now built-in into setfont.  However, for backwards com‐
+patibility it is still available as a separate command.
+The mapscrn command loads a user defined output character mapping table into the console driver. The con‐
+character set.  When the -o option is given, the old map is saved in map.orig.
+USE
+There  are  two  kinds  of mapping tables: direct-to-font tables, that give a font position for each user
+byte value, and user-to-unicode tables that give a unicode value for each user  byte.  The  corresponding
+%
+lvcreate - create a logical volume in an existing volume group
+lvcreate [-a|--activate [a][e|l|s]{y|n}] [--addtag Tag] [--alloc AllocationPolicy] [-A|--autobackup
+{y|n}] [-H|--cache] [--cachemode {passthrough|writeback|writethrough}] [--cachepolicy Policy]
+[--cachepool CachePoolLogicalVolume] [--cachesettings Key=Value] [-c|--chunksize ChunkSize] [--command‐
+[--errorwhenfull {y|n}] [{-l|--extents LogicalExtentsNumber[%{FREE|PVS|VG}] | -L|--size LogicalVolume‐
+Size} [-i|--stripes Stripes [-I|--stripesize StripeSize]]] [-h|-?|--help] [-K|--ignoreactivationskip]
+Mirrors [--corelog|--mirrorlog {disk|core|mirrored}] [--nosync] [-R|--regionsize MirrorLogRegionSize]]
+[--monitor {y|n}] [-n|--name LogicalVolume] [--noudevsync] [-p|--permission {r|rw}] [-M|--persistent
+{y|n}] [--poolmetadatasize MetadataVolumeSize] [--poolmetadataspare {y|n}] [--[raid]maxrecoveryrate Rate]
+[--[raid]minrecoveryrate Rate] [-r|--readahead {ReadAheadSectors|auto|none}] [--reportformat
+{basic|json}] [-k|--setactivationskip {y|n}] [-s|--snapshot] [-V|--virtualsize VirtualSize] [-t|--test]
+[-T|--thin] [--thinpool ThinPoolLogicalVolume] [--type SegmentType] [-v|--verbose] [-W|--wipesignatures
+{y|n}] [-Z|--zero {y|n}] [VolumeGroup | {ExternalOrigin|Origin|Pool}LogicalVolume
+%
+renice - alter priority of running processes
+renice [-n] priority [-g|-p|-u] identifier...
+renice alters the scheduling priority of one or more running processes.  The first argument is the prior‐
+ity value to be used.  The other arguments are interpreted as process IDs  (by  default),  process  group
+IDs,  user  IDs,  or user names.  renice'ing a process group causes all processes in the process group to
+have their scheduling priority altered.  renice'ing a user causes all processes owned by the user to have
+their scheduling priority altered.
+-n, --priority priority
+Specify  the  scheduling  priority to be used for the process, process group, or user.  Use of the
+option -n or --priority is optional, but when used it must be the first argument.
+%
+eqn - format equations for troff or MathML
+eqn [-rvCNR] [-d xy] [-T name] [-M dir] [-f F] [-s n] [-p n] [-m n] [files...]
+eqn compiles descriptions of equations embedded within troff input files into commands  that  are  under‐
+stood  by  troff.  Normally, it should be invoked using the -e option of groff.  The syntax is quite com‐
+patible with Unix eqn.  The output of GNU eqn cannot be processed with Unix troff; it must  be  processed
+with  GNU troff.  If no files are given on the command line, the standard input is read.  A filename of -
+causes the standard input to be read.
+eqn searches  for  the  file  eqnrc  in  the  directories  given  with  the  -M  option  first,  then  in
+/usr/lib/groff/site-tmac,  /usr/share/groff/site-tmac,  and  finally  in  the  standard  macro  directory
+option prevents this.
+%
+who - show who is logged on
+Print information about users who are currently logged in.
+-a, --all
+same as -b -d --login -p -r -t -T -u
+-b, --boot
+time of last system boot
+-d, --dead
+print dead processes
+%
+vgconvert - convert volume group metadata format
+tor] [--bootloaderareasize size] [-M|--metadatatype type]  [--pvmetadatacopies  NumberOfCopies]  [--meta‐
+into the same space.
+Examples
+%
+zgrep - search possibly compressed files for a regular expression
+zgrep [ grep_options ] [ -e ] pattern filename...
+Zgrep  invokes  grep  on compressed or gzipped files.  All options specified are passed directly to grep.
+If no file is specified, then the standard input is decompressed if necessary and fed to grep.  Otherwise
+the given files are uncompressed if necessary and fed to grep.
+If the GREP environment variable is set, zgrep uses it as the grep program to be invoked.
+BUGS
+The  following  grep  options  are  not  supported:  --dereference-recursive  (-R),  --directories  (-d),
+%
+fdisk - manipulate disk partition table
+fdisk [options] device
+fdisk -l [device...]
+fdisk  is a dialog-driven program for creation and manipulation of partition tables.  It understands GPT,
+MBR, Sun, SGI and BSD partition tables.
+in  the  partition table, usually found in sector 0 of the disk.  (In the BSD world one talks about `disk
+slices' and a `disklabel'.)
+All partitioning is driven by device I/O limits (the topology) by default.  fdisk is able to optimize the
+%
+truncate - shrink or extend the size of a file to the specified size
+truncate OPTION... FILE...
+Shrink or extend the size of each FILE to the specified size
+A FILE argument that does not exist is created.
+If  a  FILE  is  larger  than  the  specified  size, the extra data is lost.  If a FILE is shorter, it is
+extended and the extended part (hole) reads as zero bytes.
+Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
+-c, --no-create
+do not create any files
+%
+gpinyin - Chinese European-like writing within groff
+gpinyin [-] [--] [ filespec ....]
+gpinyin -h|--help
+gpinyin -v|--version
+groff(7) files.
+Breaking Options
+An option is breaking, when the program just writes the information that was asked for  and  then  stops.
+All other arguments will be ignored by that.  The breaking options are here
+-h | --help
+%
+neqn - format equations for ascii output
+neqn [eqn options]
+device.
+for very simple input).
+%
+rndc-confgen - rndc key generation tool
+rndc-confgen [-a] [-A algorithm] [-b keysize] [-c keyfile] [-h] [-k keyname] [-p port] [-r randomfile]
+[-s address] [-t chrootdir] [-u user]
+rndc-confgen generates configuration files for rndc. It can be used as a convenient alternative to
+writing the rndc.conf file and the corresponding controls and key statements in named.conf by hand.
+Alternatively, it can be run with the -a option to set up a rndc.key file and avoid the need for a
+rndc.conf file and a controls statement altogether.
+-a
+specified as when BIND was built) that is read by both rndc and named on startup. The rndc.key file
+defines a default command channel and authentication key allowing rndc to communicate with named on
+%
+setarch - change reported architecture in new program environment and set personality flags
+setarch arch [options] [program [argument...]]
+arch [options] [program [argument...]]
+setarch --list|-h|-V
+various personality options.  The default program is /bin/sh.
+--list List  the  architectures that setarch knows about.  Whether setarch can actually set each of these
+architectures depends on the running kernel.
+%
+pathchk - check whether file names are valid or portable
+Diagnose invalid or unportable file names.
+-p     check for most POSIX systems
+-P     check for empty names and leading "-"
+--portability
+check for all POSIX systems (equivalent to -p -P)
+--help display this help and exit
+%
+-b     print the blocks which are reserved as bad in the filesystem.
+-o superblock=superblock
+by a filesystem wizard who is examining the remains of a very badly corrupted filesystem.
+%
+arp - manipulate the system ARP cache
+arp [-vn] [-H type] [-i if] [-ae] [hostname]
+arp [-v] [-i if] -d hostname [pub]
+arp [-v] [-H type] [-i if] -s hostname hw_addr [temp]
+arp [-v] [-H type] [-i if] -s hostname hw_addr [netmask nm] pub
+arp [-v] [-H type] [-i if] -Ds hostname ifname [netmask nm] pub
+arp [-vnD] [-H type] [-i if] -f [filename]
+%
+nl-qdisc-{add|list|delete} - Manage queueing disciplines
+The nl-qdisc tools allow to manage and configure queueing disciplines (qdiscs) in the kernel.
+-h or --help
+Print help text to console and exit.
+-v or --version
+%
+iptables [-t table] {-A|-C|-D} chain rule-specification
+ip6tables [-t table] {-A|-C|-D} chain rule-specification
+iptables [-t table] -I chain [rulenum] rule-specification
+iptables [-t table] -R chain rulenum rule-specification
+iptables [-t table] -D chain rulenum
+iptables [-t table] -S [chain [rulenum]]
+iptables [-t table] {-F|-L|-Z} [chain [rulenum]] [options...]
+%
+false - do nothing, unsuccessfully
+false [ignored command line arguments]
+false OPTION
+Exit with a status code indicating failure.
+--help display this help and exit
+--version
+output version information and exit
+Please refer to your shell's documentation for details about the options it supports.
+%
+objcopy - copy and translate object files
+objcopy [-F bfdname|--target=bfdname]
+[-I bfdname|--input-target=bfdname]
+[-O bfdname|--output-target=bfdname]
+[-B bfdarch|--binary-architecture=bfdarch]
+[-S|--strip-all]
+[-g|--strip-debug]
+[-K symbolname|--keep-symbol=symbolname]
+[-N symbolname|--strip-symbol=symbolname]
+[--strip-unneeded-symbol=symbolname]
+[-G symbolname|--keep-global-symbol=symbolname]
+[--localize-hidden]
+[-L symbolname|--localize-symbol=symbolname]
+[--globalize-symbol=symbolname]
+[-W symbolname|--weaken-symbol=symbolname]
+%
+Set up images to boot from DEVICE.
+You should not normally run this program directly.  Use grub-install instead.
+-a, --allow-floppy
+make the drive also bootable as floppy (default for fdX devices). May break on some BIOSes.
+-b, --boot-image=FILE
+use FILE as the boot image [default=boot.img]
+-c, --core-image=FILE
+%
+xtotroff - convert X font metrics into GNU troff font metrics
+xtotroff [ -rresolution ] [ -spoint-size ] [ -v ] FontMap
+fonts listed.  Each line in FontMap consists of GNU troff font name and an X font  name  (XLFD)  pattern,
+separated by whitespace.  Example:
+The wildcards in the patterns are filled with the arguments to the -r and -s switches.  If a font name is
+still ambiguous, xtotroff aborts.
+It is possible to have whitespace between a command line option and its parameter.
+%
+lvm [command|file]
+If lvm is invoked with no arguments it presents a readline prompt (assuming it was compiled with readline
+If  lvm is invoked with argv[0] set to the name of a specific LVM command (for example by using a hard or
+soft link) it acts as that command.
+On invocation, lvm requires that only the standard file descriptors stdin, stdout and stderr  are  avail‐
+%
+sulogin - single-user login
+sulogin [options] [tty]
+sulogin is invoked by init when the system goes into single-user mode.
+The user is prompted:
+Give root password for system maintenance
+(or type Control-D for normal startup):
+If the root account is locked and --force is specified, no password is required.
+sulogin will be connected to the current terminal, or to the optional tty device that can be specified on
+the command line (typically /dev/console).
+%
+mail -h | --help
+mail [-BDdEFintv~] [-A account] [-a attachment] [-b bcc-addr] [-c cc-addr] [-q quote-file] [-r from-addr]
+[-S variable[=value]] [-s subject] [-X cmd] [-.] to-addr ... [-- mta-option ...]
+mail [-BDdEeHiNnRv~#] [-A account] [-L spec-list] [-r from-addr] [-S variable[=value]] [-X cmd] -f [file]
+[-- mta-option ...]
+mail [-BDdEeHiNnRv~#] [-A account] [-L spec-list] [-r from-addr] [-S variable[=value]] [-u user] [-X cmd]
+[-- mta-option ...]
+%
+curl-config - Get information about a libcurl installation
+curl-config [options]
+curl-config displays information about the curl and libcurl installation.
+--ca   Displays the built-in path to the CA cert bundle this libcurl uses.
+--cc   Displays the compiler used to build libcurl.
+--cflags
+Set  of  compiler options (CFLAGS) to use when compiling files that use libcurl. Currently that is
+only the include path to the curl include files.
+%
+grn - groff preprocessor for gremlin files
+grn [ -Cv ] [ -Tdev ] [ -Mdir ] [ -Fdir ] [ file... ]
+grn is a preprocessor for including gremlin pictures in groff input.  grn writes to standard output, pro‐
+cessing only input lines between two that start with .GS and .GE.  Those lines must contain grn  commands
+(see below).  These commands request a gremlin file, and the picture in that file is converted and placed
+justify  the whole gremlin picture (default justification is center).  If no file is mentioned, the stan‐
+dard input is read.  At the end of the picture, the position on the page is the  bottom  of  the  gremlin
+picture.   If the grn entry is ended with .GF instead of .GE, the position is left at the top of the pic‐
+ture.
+Please note that currently only the -me macro package has support for .GS, .GE, and .GF.
+%
+lvreduce — reduce the size of a logical volume
+[-v|--verbose]    [--version]    [-f|--force]    [--noudevsync]    {-l|--extents    [-]LogicalExtentsNum‐
+ber[%{VG|LV|FREE|ORIGIN}] | -L|--size [-]LogicalVolumeSize[bBsSkKmMgGtTpPeE]} [-n|--nofsck] [--reportfor‐
+lvreduce allows you to reduce the size of a logical volume.  Be careful when reducing a logical  volume's
+size, because data in the reduced part is lost!!!
+You  should therefore ensure that any filesystem on the volume is resized before running lvreduce so that
+the extents that are to be removed are not in use.
+Sizes  will be rounded if necessary - for example, the volume size must be an exact number of extents and
+the size of a striped segment must be a multiple of the number of stripes.
+%
+grub-glue-efi - generate a fat binary for EFI
+-o, --output=FILE
+%
+lkbib - search bibliographic databases
+lkbib [ -v ] [ -ifields ] [ -pfilename ] [ -tn ] key...
+lkbib  searches bibliographic databases for references that contain the keys key... and prints any refer‐
+ences found on the standard output.  lkbib will search any databases given by  -p  options,  and  then  a
+default database.  The default database is taken from the REFER environment variable if it is set, other‐
+wise it is /usr/dict/papers/Ind.  For each database filename to be searched, if an index filename.i  cre‐
+It is possible to have whitespace between a command line option and its parameter.
+-v     Print the version number.
+%
+should give you access to the complete manual.
+%
+delpart - tell the kernel to forget about a partition
+delpart device partition
+delpart asks the Linux kernel to forget about the specified partition (a number) on the specified device.
+The command is a simple wrapper around the "del partition" ioctl.
+AVAILABILITY
+The  delpart  command  is  part  of  the  util-linux  package  and  is  available   from   ftp://ftp.ker‐
+nel.org/pub/linux/utils/util-linux/.
+%
+zramctl - set up and control zram devices
+Get info:
+zramctl [options]
+Reset zram:
+zramctl -r zramdev...
+Print name of first unused zram device:
+zramctl -f
+Set up a zram device:
+%
+gpg-connect-agent - Communicate with a running agent
+gpg-connect-agent [options][commands]
+The  gpg-connect-agent  is  a utility to communicate with a running gpg-agent.  It is useful to check out
+the commands gpg-agent provides using the Assuan interface.  It might also be useful for scripting simple
+applications.  Input is expected at stdin and out put gets printed to stdout.
+It is very similar to running gpg-agent in server mode; but here we connect to a running instance.
+-v
+--verbose
+Output additional information while running.
+%
+gxditview - display groff intermediate output files
+gxditview [-toolkitoption ...] [-option ...] [filename]
+several ways to use gxditview.
+gxditview filename.  If filename is -, gxditview will read the standard input; filename cannot  be  omit‐
+ted.  The groff intermediate output is different for all devices.  gxditview can view it for all devices,
+but the quality is device dependent.
+The best results are achieved with the X* devices for groff's option -T.   There  are  four  X*  devices:
+%
+wdctl - show hardware watchdog status
+wdctl [options] [device...]
+Show  hardware  watchdog status.  The default device is /dev/watchdog.  If more than one device is speci‐
+fied then the output is separated by one blank line.
+-f, --flags list
+Print only the specified flags.
+-F, --noflags
+Do not print information about flags.
+%
+grub-mkstandalone - make a memdisk-based GRUB image
+grub-mkstandalone [OPTION...] [OPTION] SOURCE...
+Generate a standalone image (containing all modules) in the selected format
+--compress=no|xz|gz|lzo
+compress GRUB files [optional]
+-d, --directory=DIR
+use images and modules under DIR [default=/usr/lib/grub/<platform>]
+--fonts=FONTS
+install FONTS [default=unicode]
+%
+nslookup - query Internet name servers interactively
+nslookup [-option] [name | -] [server]
+Nslookup is a program to query Internet domain name servers.  Nslookup has two modes: interactive and
+non-interactive. Interactive mode allows the user to query name servers for information about various
+hosts and domains or to print a list of hosts in a domain. Non-interactive mode is used to print just the
+name and requested information for a host or domain.
+%
+grub-render-label - generate a .disk_label for Apple Macs.
+Render Apple .disk_label.
+-b, --bgcolor=COLOR
+use COLOR for background
+-c, --color=COLOR
+use COLOR for text
+-f, --font=FILE
+%
+ar - create, modify, and extract from archives
+The GNU ar program creates, modifies, and extracts from archives.  An archive is a single file holding a
+collection of other files in a structure that makes it possible to retrieve the original individual files
+(called members of the archive).
+The original files' contents, mode (permissions), timestamp, owner, and group are preserved in the
+archive, and can be restored on extraction.
+GNU ar can maintain archives whose members have names of any length; however, depending on how ar is
+%
+btrfs-image - create/restore an image of the filesystem
+btrfs-image [options] <source> <target>
+btrfs-image is used to create an image of a btrfs filesystem. All data will be zeroed, but metadata and
+the like is preserved. Mainly used for debugging purposes.
+In the dump mode, source is the btrfs device/file and target is the output file (use - for stdout).
+In the restore mode (option -r), source is the dumped image and target is the btrfs device/file.
+-r
+primary device, so that file system can be restored by running tree log reply if possible. To restore
+%
+jfs_mkfs - create a JFS formatted partition
+jfs_mkfs [options] device [ blocks ]
+jfs_mkfs is used to create (format) a JFS partition.  jfs_mkfs must be run as root.
+system and/or JFS journal will be created.  blocks is the number of blocks to be used for the  file  sys‐
+tem.  If omitted, jfs_mkfs automatically figures the file system size.
+WARNING
+jfs_mkfs will destroy all data on the specified device!
+%
+vim - Vi IMproved, a programmers text editor
+vim [options] [file ..]
+vim [options] -
+vim [options] -t tag
+vim [options] -q [errorfile]
+ex
+view
+gvim gview evim eview
+rvim rview rgvim rgview
+Vim  is  a text editor that is upwards compatible to Vi.  It can be used to edit all kinds of plain text.
+It is especially useful for editing programs.
+%
+btrfs-inspect-internal - query various internal information
+btrfs inspect-internal <subcommand> <args>
+simple UI to an ioctl or a more complex query that assembles the result from several internal structures.
+The latter usually requires calls to privileged ioctls.
+dump-super [options] <device> [device...]
+(replaces the standalone tool btrfs-show-super)
+Show btrfs superblock information stored on given devices in textual form. By default the first
+superblock is printed, more details about all copies or additional backup data can be printed.
+%
+vdir - list directory contents
+vdir [OPTION]... [FILE]...
+List information about the FILEs (the current directory by default).  Sort entries alphabetically if none
+of -cftuvSUX nor --sort is specified.
+Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
+-a, --all
+do not ignore entries starting with .
+-A, --almost-all
+do not list implied . and ..
+%
+ul - do underlining
+ul [options] [file...]
+ul  reads the named files (or standard input if none are given) and translates occurrences of underscores
+to the sequence which indicates underlining for the terminal in use,  as  specified  by  the  environment
+variable TERM.  The terminfo database is read to determine the appropriate sequences for underlining.  If
+the terminal is incapable of underlining but is capable of a standout mode, then that  is  used  instead.
+terminal cannot underline, underlining is ignored.
+-i, --indicated
+Underlining is indicated by a separate line containing appropriate dashes `-'; this is useful when
+you want to look at the underlining which is present in an nroff output stream on a crt-terminal.
+%
+systool - view system device information by bus, class, and topology
+systool [options [device]]
+Calling  systool  without  parameters  will  present  all  available  bus types, device classes, and root
+devices.
+When device is supplied, the information reqested by options is shown only for the specified device, oth‐
+erwise all present devices are displayed.
+systool uses APIs provided by libsysfs to gather information.  systool runs only on Linux systems running
+-a     Show attributes of the requested resource
+%
+udevadm - udev management tool
+udevadm [--debug] [--version] [--help]
+udevadm info options
+udevadm trigger [options]
+udevadm settle [options]
+udevadm control command
+udevadm monitor [options]
+udevadm test [options] devpath
+%
+true - do nothing, successfully
+true [ignored command line arguments]
+true OPTION
+Exit with a status code indicating success.
+--help display this help and exit
+--version
+output version information and exit
+Please refer to your shell's documentation for details about the options it supports.
+%
+loadunimap - load the kernel unicode-to-font mapping table
+loadunimap [ -C console ] [ -o oldmap ] [ map ]
+The  loadunimap  command is obsolete - its function is now built-in into setfont.  However, for backwards
+compatibility it is still available as a separate command.
+The program loadunimap loads the specified map in the kernel unicode-to-font mapping table.  If no map is
+given def is assumed.  The default extension (that can be omitted) is .uni.
+If the -o oldmap option is given, the old map is saved in the file specified.
+Usually one does not call loadunimap directly - its function is also built into setfont.
+%
+keytab.
+operation must be one of the following:
+list   Lists the keys in a keytab showing version number and principal name.
+change Uses the kadmin protocol to update the keys in the Kerberos  database  to  new  randomly-generated
+keys,  and  updates  the keys in the keytab to match.  If a key's version number doesn't match the
+version number stored in the Kerberos server's database, then the operation will fail.   Old  keys
+are  retained  in  the keytab so that existing tickets continue to work.  If the -i flag is given,
+%
+hostid - print the numeric identifier for the current host
+hostid [OPTION]
+Print the numeric identifier (in hexadecimal) for the current host.
+--help display this help and exit
+--version
+output version information and exit
+Written by Jim Meyering.
+REPORTING BUGS
+%
+kdestroy - destroy Kerberos tickets
+kdestroy [-A] [-q] [-c cache_name]
+The  kdestroy utility destroys the user's active Kerberos authorization tickets by overwriting and delet‐
+ing the credentials cache that contains them.  If the credentials cache is  not  specified,  the  default
+credentials cache is destroyed.
+-A     Destroys all caches in the collection, if a cache collection is available.
+-q     Run quietly.  Normally kdestroy beeps if it fails to destroy the user's tickets.  The -q flag sup‐
+presses this behavior.
+-c cache_name
+%
+sysctl - configure kernel parameters at runtime
+sysctl [options] [variable[=value]] [...]
+sysctl -p [file or regexp] [...]
+sysctl  is  used to modify kernel parameters at runtime.  The parameters available are those listed under
+/proc/sys/.  Procfs is required for sysctl support in Linux.  You can use sysctl to both read  and  write
+sysctl data.
+PARAMETERS
+variable
+The  name of a key to read from.  An example is kernel.ostype.  The '/' separator is also accepted
+in place of a '.'.
+variable=value
+%
+ldns-testns - simple fake nameserver tool
+ldns-testns [ OPTION ] datafile
+ldns-testns  can be used to provide answers to DNS queries for testing.  The answers are premade, and can
+be tailored to testing needs. The answers can be wildly invalid or unparseable.
+ldns-testns is not meant for production use.
+%
+ipcrm - remove certain IPC resources
+ipcrm [options]
+ipcrm {shm|msg|sem} id...
+ipcrm  removes  System V interprocess communication (IPC) objects and associated data structures from the
+system.  In order to delete such objects, you must be superuser, or the creator or owner of the object.
+System V IPC objects are of three types: shared memory, message queues, and semaphores.   Deletion  of  a
+message  queue  or  semaphore  object  is immediate (regardless of whether any process still holds an IPC
+identifier for the object).  A shared memory object is only removed after  all  currently  attached  pro‐
+Two  syntax styles are supported.  The old Linux historical syntax specifies a three-letter keyword indi‐
+%
+ptx - produce a permuted index of file contents
+ptx [OPTION]... [INPUT]...   (without -G)
+ptx -G [OPTION]... [INPUT [OUTPUT]]
+Output a permuted index, including context, of the words in the input files.
+With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.
+Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
+-A, --auto-reference
+output automatically generated references
+-G, --traditional
+%
+awk — pattern scanning and processing language
+awk [−F sepstring] [−v assignment]... program [argument...]
+awk [−F sepstring] −f progfile [−f progfile]... [−v assignment]...
+[argument...]
+The  awk utility shall execute programs written in the awk programming language, which is specialized for
+textual data manipulation. An awk program is a sequence of patterns and corresponding actions. When input
+is read that matches a pattern, the action associated with that pattern is carried out.
+%
+ln - make links between files
+ate  hard  links  by  default, symbolic links with --symbolic.  By default, each destination (name of new
+link) should not already exist.  When creating hard links, each TARGET must exist.   Symbolic  links  can
+hold  arbitrary  text; if later resolved, a relative link is interpreted in relation to its parent direc‐
+tory.
+Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
+%
+dbus-test-tool - D-Bus traffic generator and test tool
+--empty] [--payload=S | --stdin | --message-stdin | --random-size]
+dbus-test-tool is a multi-purpose tool for debugging and profiling D-Bus.
+dbus-test-tool black-hole connects to D-Bus, optionally requests a name, then does not reply to messages.
+It normally reads and discards messages from its D-Bus socket, but can be configured to sleep forever
+without reading.
+%
+switch_root - switch to another filesystem as the root of the mount tree
+switch_root [-hV]
+switch_root newroot init [arg...]
+switch_root  moves  already  mounted /proc, /dev, /sys and /run to newroot and makes newroot the new root
+filesystem and starts init process.
+WARNING: switch_root removes recursively all files and directories on the current root filesystem.
+-h, --help
+Display help text and exit.
+%
+isc-config.sh - Get information about the installed version of ISC BIND
+isc-config.sh [--cflags] [--exec-prefix] [--libs] [--prefix] [--version] [libraries...]
+isc-config.sh prints information related to the installed version of ISC BIND, such as the compiler and
+linker flags required to compile and link programs that use ISC BIND libraries.
+The optional libraries are used to report specific details for compiling and linking for the listed
+listed on the command line. (Some libraries require other libraries, so are implied.)
+--cflags
+Prints the compiler command line options required to compile files that use ISC BIND. Use the
+libraries command line argument(s) to print additional specific flags to pass to the C compiler.
+%
+xfs_bmap - print block mapping for an XFS file
+xfs_bmap [ -adlpv ] [ -n num_extents ] file
+xfs_bmap -V
+xfs_bmap  prints  the  map  of disk blocks used by files in an XFS filesystem.  The map lists each extent
+used by the file, as well as regions in the file that do not have any corresponding blocks (holes).  Each
+line of the listings takes the following form:
+extent: [startoffset..endoffset]: startblock..endblock
+Holes  are  marked by replacing the startblock..endblock with hole.  All the file offsets and disk blocks
+%
+c99 — compile standard C programs
+c99 [options...] pathname [[pathname] [−I directory]
+[−L directory] [−l library]]...
+The  c99  utility  is an interface to the standard C compilation system; it shall accept source code con‐
+forming to the ISO C standard. The system conceptually consists of a compiler and link editor. The  input
+files  referenced by pathname operands and −l option-arguments shall be compiled and linked to produce an
+executable file. (It is unspecified whether the linking occurs entirely within the operation of c99; some
+%
+lvmconfig, lvm dumpconfig, lvm config — Display LVM configuration
+lvmconfig [-f|--file Filename] [--type {current|default|diff|full|list|missing|new|profilable|profilable-
+command|profilable-metadata}] [--atversion Version] [--sinceversion Version] [--ignoreadvanced]
+[--ignoreunsupported] [--ignorelocal] [-l|--list] [--config ConfigurationString] [--commandprofile Pro‐
+[--showunsupported] [--validate] [--withsummary] [--withcomments] [--withspaces] [--withversions] [Con‐
+figurationNode...]
+lvmconfig produces formatted output from the LVM configuration tree.  The command was  added  in  release
+-f, --file Filename
+Send output to a file named 'filename'.
+%
+ntp-wait - Wait for ntpd to stabilize the system clock
+ntp-wait [-flags] [-flag [value]] [--option-name[[=| ]value]]
+All arguments must be options.
+the boot sequence until after ntpd -g has set the time.
+-n number, --tries=number
+%
+mtr - a network diagnostic tool
+[--raw]  [--csv]  [--json]  [--split]  [--no-dns]  [--show-ips]  [-o FIELDS]   [-y IPINFO]   [--aslookup]
+[-i INTERVAL]  [-c COUNT] [-s PACKETSIZE] [-B BITPATTERN] [-G GRACEPERIOD] [-Q TOS] [--mpls] [-a ADDRESS]
+[-f FIRST-TTL]  [-m MAX-TTL]  [-U MAX-UNKNOWN]  [--udp]  [--tcp]  [-P PORT]  [-L LOCALPORT]  [-Z TIMEOUT]
+mtr combines the functionality of the traceroute and ping programs in a single network diagnostic tool.
+ing packets with purposely low TTLs.  It continues to send packets with low TTL, noting the response time
+a bad (or simply overloaded) link.
+%
+runcon - run command with specified security context
+by one or more of LEVEL, ROLE, TYPE, and USER.
+If none of -c, -t, -u, -r, or -l, is specified, the first argument is used as the complete context.   Any
+rent security context.
+%
+reiserfstune - The tunning tool for the ReiserFS filesystem.
+reiserfstune  [  -f ] [ -h | --help ] [ -j | --journal-device FILE ] [ --no-journal-available ] [ --jour‐
+nal-new-device FILE ] [ --make-journal-standard ] [ -s | --journal-new-size N ] [ -o | --journal-new-off‐
+set  N ] [ -t | --max-transaction-size N ] [ -b | --add-badblocks file ] [ -B | --badblocks file ] [ -u |
+--uuid UUID ] [ -l | --label LABEL ] [ -c | --check-interval  interval-in-days  ]  [  -C  |  --time-last-
+checked timestamp ] [ -m | --max-mnt-count count ] [ -M | --mnt-count count ] device
+reiserfstune  is used for tuning the ReiserFS. It can change two journal parameters (the journal size and
+the maximum transaction size), and it can move the journal's location to a new  specified  block  device.
+the  relocated  journal was implemented for a special release of ReiserFS, and was not expected to be put
+you  must  apply  a  special patch. Without this patch the kernel will refuse to mount the newly modified
+%
+With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.
+-b, --binary
+read in binary mode
+-c, --check
+--tag  create a BSD-style checksum
+%
+psfstriptable - remove the embedded Unicode character table from a console font
+psfstriptable fontfile outfile
+psfstriptable  reads a .psf format console font from fontfile, removes the embedded Unicode font table if
+there is one, and writes the result to outfile.  An input file name of "-" denotes standard input, and an
+output file name of "-" denotes standard output.
+%
+btrfs-convert [options] <device>
+Warning
+The conversion utilizes free space of the original filesystem. The exact estimate of the required space
+cannot be foretold. The final btrfs metadata might occupy several gigabytes on a hundreds-gigabyte
+filesystem.
+%
+The  options  -v  and --version print the version information of the program to standard output and exit.
+The options -h and --help print a usage information of the program to standard output and stop  the  pro‐
+gram instantly.
+All  other options are assumed to be groffer options.  They are internally passed to groffer.  They over‐
+ride the behavior of the program.  The options are optional, they can be omitted.
+The filespec arguments correspond to the filespec arguments of groffer.  So they are either the names  of
+%
+kvno - print key version numbers of Kerberos principals
+kvno  acquires a service ticket for the specified Kerberos principals and prints out the key version num‐
+bers of each.
+-c ccache
+Specifies the name of a credentials cache to use (if not the default)
+-e etype
+Specifies the enctype which will be requested for the session key of all the services named on the
+%
+strfile - create a random access file for storing strings
+unstr - dump strings in pointer order
+strfile [-iorsx] [-c char] sourcefile [outputfile]
+unstr [-c char] datafile[.ext] [outputfile]
+strfile  reads a file containing groups of lines separated by a line containing a single percent `%' sign
+(or other specified delimiter character) and creates a data file which contains a header structure and  a
+The output file, if not specified on the command line, is named sourcefile.dat.
+The  purpose of unstr is to undo the work of strfile.  It prints out the strings contained in the source‐
+file, which is datafile.ext without its extension, or datafile if no  extension  is  specified  (in  this
+%
+msgcmp - compare message catalog and template
+msgcmp [OPTION] def.po ref.pot
+Compare  two  Uniforum  style  .po  files  to check that both contain the same set of msgid strings.  The
+def.po file is an existing PO file with the translations.  The ref.pot file is the last created PO  file,
+lated each and every message in your program.  Where an exact match cannot be found,  fuzzy  matching  is
+used to produce better diagnostics.
+Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
+Input file location:
+def.po translations
+%
+anacron - runs commands periodically
+anacron [-s] [-f] [-n] [-d] [-q] [-t anacrontab] [-S spooldir] [job]
+anacron [-S spooldir] -u [-t anacrontab] [job]
+anacron [-V|-h]
+anacron -T [-t anacrontab]
+does not assume that the machine is running continuously.  Hence, it can be used on machines that are not
+contains the list of jobs that Anacron controls.  Each job entry specifies a period in days, a  delay  in
+minutes, a unique job identifier, and a shell command.
+%
+cut - remove sections from each line of files
+cut OPTION... [FILE]...
+Print selected parts of lines from each FILE to standard output.
+With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.
+Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
+-b, --bytes=LIST
+select only these bytes
+-c, --characters=LIST
+select only these characters
+%
+pactree - package dependency tree viewer
+pactree [options] package
+Pactree produces a dependency tree for a package.
+By default, a tree-like output is generated, but with the --graph option, a Graphviz description is
+generated.
+-a, --ascii
+Use ASCII characters for tree formatting. By default, pactree will use Unicode line drawing
+characters if it is able to detect that the locale supports them.
+-b, --dbpath
+%
+zic - timezone compiler
+zic [ -v ] [ -d directory ] [ -l localtime ] [ -p posixrules ] [ -L leapsecondfilename ] [ -s ] [ -y com‐
+mand ] [ filename ... ]
+Zic reads text from the file(s) named on the command line and creates  the  time  conversion  information
+files specified in this input.  If a filename is -, the standard input is read.
+These options are available:
+-d directory
+Create time conversion information files in the named directory rather than in the standard direc‐
+tory named below.
+-l timezone
+%
+sfdisk - display or manipulate a disk partition table
+sfdisk [options] device [-N partition-number]
+sfdisk [options] command
+sfdisk is a script-oriented tool for partitioning any block device.
+functionality for CHS (Cylinder-Head-Sector) addressing.  CHS has never been  important  for  Linux,  and
+this addressing concept does not make any sense for new devices.
+tive sizes are specified, or when the default values are used.
+%
+groupmod - modify a group definition on the system
+groupmod [options] GROUP
+The groupmod command modifies the definition of the specified GROUP by modifying the appropriate entry in
+the group database.
+The options which apply to the groupmod command are:
+-g, --gid GID
+The group ID of the given GROUP will be changed to GID.
+option is used.
+%
+lessecho - expand metacharacters
+lessecho [-ox] [-cx] [-pn] [-dn] [-mx] [-nn] [-ex] [-a] file ...
+lessecho  is  a program that simply echos its arguments on standard output.  But any metacharacter in the
+output is preceded by an "escape" character, which by default is a backslash.
+A summary of options is included below.
+-ex    Specifies "x", rather than backslash, to be the escape char for metachars.  If x is "-", no escape
+char is used and arguments containing metachars are surrounded by quotes instead.
+-ox    Specifies  "x", rather than double-quote, to be the open quote character, which is used if the -e-
+option is specified.
+%
+mcookie - generate magic cookies for xauth
+mcookie [options]
+usage:
+xauth add :0 . `mcookie`
+the sources /dev/urandom, /dev/random, or the libc pseudo-random functions, in this preference order.
+-f, --file file
+Use  this  file as an additional source of randomness.  When file is '-', characters are read from
+%
+haveged - Generate random numbers and feed linux random device.
+haveged [options]
+haveged  generates an unpredictable stream of random numbers harvested from the indirect effects of hard‐
+ware events on hidden processor state (caches, branch predictors, memory translation tables,  etc)  using
+the  HAVEGE (HArdware Volatile Entropy Gathering and Expansion) algorithm. The algorithm operates in user
+space, no special privilege is required for file system access to the output stream.
+Linux pools randomness for distribution by the /dev/random and /dev/urandom device interfaces. The  stan‐
+fill  the  /dev/random  pool  whenever the supply of random bits in /dev/random falls below the low water
+mark of the device.
+%
+pluginviewer - list loadable SASL plugins and their properties
+pluginviewer  [-a]  [-s]  [-c]  [-b min=N,max=N] [-e ssf=N,id=ID] [-m MECHS] [-x AUXPROP_MECH] [-f FLAGS]
+[-p PATH]
+pluginviewer can be used by a server administrator to troubleshoot SASL installations.  The  utility  can
+list loadable (properly configured) client and server side plugins, as well as auxprop plugins.
+-a     List auxprop plugins.
+-s     List server authentication (SASL) plugins.
+-c     List client authentication (SASL) plugins.
+%
+date - print or set the system date and time
+date [OPTION]... [+FORMAT]
+date [-u|--utc|--universal] [MMDDhhmm[[CC]YY][.ss]]
+Display the current time in the given FORMAT, or set the system date.
+Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
+-d, --date=STRING
+display time described by STRING, not 'now'
+-f, --file=DATEFILE
+like --date; once for each line of DATEFILE
+%
+uuidgen - create a new UUID value
+uuidgen [options]
+library.  The new UUID can reasonably be considered unique among all UUIDs created on the  local  system,
+and among UUIDs created on other systems in the past and in the future.
+There  are  two  types  of UUIDs which uuidgen can generate: time-based UUIDs and random-based UUIDs.  By
+default uuidgen will generate a random-based UUID if a high-quality random number generator  is  present.
+Otherwise,  it will choose a time-based UUID.  It is possible to force the generation of one of these two
+UUID types by using the -r or -t options.
+-r, --random
+%
+glib-mkenums - C language enum description generation utility
+glib-mkenums [OPTION...] [FILE...]
+glib-mkenums is a small perl-script utility that parses C code to extract enum definitions and produces
+enum descriptions based on text templates specified by the user. Most frequently this script is used to
+produce C code that contains enum values as strings so programs can provide value name strings for
+introspection.
+glib-mkenums takes a list of valid C code files as input. The options specified control the text that is
+output, certain substitutions are performed on the text templates for keywords enclosed in @ characters.
+Production text substitutions
+Certain keywords enclosed in @ characters will be substituted in the emitted text. For the substitution
+examples of the keywords below, the following example enum definition is assumed:
+%
+deallocvt - deallocate unused virtual consoles
+deallocvt [N ...]
+The  command deallocvt deallocates kernel memory and data structures for all unused virtual consoles.  If
+one or more arguments N ...  are given, only the corresponding consoles /dev/ttyN are deallocated.
+A virtual console is unused if it is not the foreground console, and no process has it open  for  reading
+or writing, and no text has been selected on its screen.
+%
+ssh-agent — authentication agent
+ssh-agent [-c | -s] [-Dd] [-a bind_address] [-E fingerprint_hash] [-t life] [command [arg ...]]
+ssh-agent [-c | -s] -k
+ssh-agent is usually started in the beginning of an X-session or a login session, and all other windows or
+programs are started as clients to the ssh-agent program.  Through use of environment variables the agent
+to query the keys that are held in one.
+%
+sum - checksum and count the blocks in a file
+sum [OPTION]... [FILE]...
+Print checksum and block counts for each FILE.
+With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.
+-s, --sysv
+--help display this help and exit
+%
+cryptsetup-reencrypt - tool for offline LUKS device re-encryption
+cryptsetup-reencrypt <options> <device>
+Cryptsetup-reencrypt  can  be used to change reencryption parameters which otherwise require full on-disk
+data change (re-encryption).
+You can regenerate volume key (the real key used in on-disk encryption unclocked by passphrase),  cipher,
+cipher mode.
+Cryptsetup-reencrypt reencrypts data on LUKS device in-place. During reencryption process the LUKS device
+is marked unavailable.
+WARNING: The cryptsetup-reencrypt program is not resistant to hardware or kernel  failures  during  reen‐
+%
+msgconv - character set conversion for message catalog
+msgconv [OPTION] [INPUTFILE]
+Converts a translation catalog to a different character encoding.
+Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
+Input file location:
+INPUTFILE
+input PO file
+-D, --directory=DIRECTORY
+add DIRECTORY to list for input files search
+%
+partprobe - inform the OS of partition table changes
+partprobe [-d] [-s] [devices...]
+partprobe is a program that informs the operating system kernel of partition table changes.
+-d, --dry-run
+Don't update the kernel.
+-s, --summary
+%
+loginctl - Control the systemd login manager
+The following options are understood:
+--no-ask-password
+Do not query the user for authentication for privileged operations.
+-p, --property=
+When showing session/user/seat properties, limit display to certain properties as specified as
+%
+halt, poweroff, reboot - Halt, power-off or reboot the machine
+The following options are understood:
+--help
+Print a short help text and exit.
+%
+sntp - standard Simple Network Time Protocol client program
+sntp [-flags] [-flag [value]] [--option-name[[=| ]value]] [ hostname-or-IP ...]
+sntp  can  be used as an SNTP client to query a NTP or SNTP server and either display the time or set the
+local system's time (given suitable privilege).  It can be run as an interactive command or from  a  cron
+job.   NTP  (the  Network  Time  Protocol)  and  SNTP  (the Simple Network Time Protocol) are defined and
+The default is to write the estimated correct local date and time (i.e. not UTC) to the  standard  output
+%
+xzcmp, xzdiff, lzcmp, lzdiff - compare compressed files
+from which the compression format suffix has been stripped.  If two files are specified,  then  they  are
+served.
+The names lzcmp and lzdiff are provided for backward compatibility with LZMA Utils.
+%
+ngettext - translate message and choose plural form
+ngettext [OPTION] [TEXTDOMAIN] MSGID MSGID-PLURAL COUNT
+The  ngettext  program  translates a natural language message into the user's language, by looking up the
+translation in a message catalog, and chooses the appropriate plural form, which depends  on  the  number
+COUNT and the language of the message catalog where the translation was found.
+Display native language translation of a textual message whose grammatical form depends on a number.
+-d, --domain=TEXTDOMAIN
+retrieve translated message from TEXTDOMAIN
+-e     enable expansion of some escape sequences
+%
+lastlog - reports the most recent login of all users or of a given user
+lastlog [options]
+lastlog formats and prints the contents of the last login log /var/log/lastlog file. The login-name,
+port, and last login time will be printed. The default (no flags) causes lastlog entries to be printed,
+sorted by their order in /etc/passwd.
+The options which apply to the lastlog command are:
+-b, --before DAYS
+Print only lastlog records older than DAYS.
+-C, --clear
+%
+lvresize — resize a logical volume
+[-I|--stripesize   StripeSize]]   {-l|--extents   [+|-]LogicalExtentsNumber[%{VG|LV|PVS|FREE|ORIGIN}]   |
+-L|--size  [+|-]LogicalVolumeSize[bBsSkKmMgGtTpPeE]}  [--poolmetadatasize  [+]MetadataVolumeSize[bBsSkKm‐
+[PhysicalVolumePath[:PE[-PE]]...]
+lvresize  allows  you  to  resize  a  logical  volume.  Be careful when reducing a logical volume's size,
+because data in the reduced part is lost!!!  You should therefore ensure that any filesystem on the  vol‐
+ume is shrunk first so that the extents that are to be removed are not in use.  Resizing snapshot logical
+%
+keyctl - Key management facility control
+keyctl --version
+keyctl show [-x] [<keyring>]
+keyctl add <type> <desc> <data> <keyring>
+keyctl padd <type> <desc> <keyring>
+keyctl request <type> <desc> [<dest_keyring>]
+keyctl update <key> <data>
+keyctl pupdate <key>
+keyctl newring <name> <keyring>
+keyctl revoke <key>
+keyctl clear <keyring>
+keyctl link <key> <keyring>
+keyctl unlink <key> [<keyring>]
+%
+capsh - capability shell wrapper
+capsh [OPTION]...
+handy wrapper for certain types of capability testing and environment creation.  It  also  provides  some
+debugging features useful for summarizing capability state.
+The tool takes a number of optional arguments, acting on them in the order they are provided. They are as
+follows:
+--print               Display prevailing capability and related state.
+%
+systemd-firstboot, systemd-firstboot.service - Initialize basic system settings on or before the first
+boot-up of a system
+systemd-firstboot.service
+systemd-firstboot initializes the most basic system settings interactively on the first boot, or
+·   The system locale, more specifically the two locale variables LANG= and LC_MESSAGES
+·   The system time zone
+·   The system host name
+%
+gettextize - install or upgrade gettext infrastructure
+gettextize [OPTION]... [package-dir]
+Prepares a source package to use gettext.
+--help print this help and exit
+--version
+print version information and exit
+-f, --force
+force writing of new files even if old exist
+%
+lt-recode [OPTION]... [ [CHARSET] | REQUEST [FILE]... ]
+Free `recode' converts files between various character sets and surfaces.
+If  a  long  option  shows an argument as mandatory, then it is mandatory for the equivalent short option
+also.  Similarly for optional arguments.
+Listings:
+-l, --list[=FORMAT]
+list one or all known charsets and aliases
+-k, --known=PAIRS
+restrict charsets according to known PAIRS list
+%
+elfedit - Update the ELF header of ELF files.
+elfedit [--input-mach=machine]
+[--input-type=type]
+[--input-osabi=osabi]
+--output-mach=machine
+--output-type=type
+--output-osabi=osabi
+[-v|--version]
+[-h|--help]
+elffile...
+elfedit updates the ELF header of ELF files which have the matching ELF machine and file types.  The
+options control how and which fields in the ELF header should be updated.
+%
+grub-fstest - debug tool for GRUB filesystem drivers
+Debug tool for filesystem driver.
+Commands:
+blocklist FILE
+Display blocklist of FILE.
+cat FILE
+Copy FILE to standard output.
+cmp FILE LOCAL
+%
+grep, egrep, fgrep - print lines matching a pattern
+grep  searches  the named input FILEs for lines containing a match to the given PATTERN.  If no files are
+specified, or if the file “-” is given, grep searches  standard  input.   By  default,  grep  prints  the
+matching lines.
+In  addition,  the  variant  programs  egrep and fgrep are the same as grep -E and grep -F, respectively.
+These variants are deprecated, but are provided for backward compatibility.
+Generic Program Information
+--help Output a usage message and exit.
+%
+ldns-config - show compiler and linker flags for ldns usage.
+When  writing programs using ldns, you have to tell the compiler where to look for include files and what
+libraries from which location to link to. ldns-config can be used to find out what flags to use with  the
+C compiler and the linker.
+--cflags
+Show the C compiler flags needed to compile with ldns
+--libs Show the flags to be used to link with ldns
+--version
+%
+pmap - report memory map of a process
+pmap [options] pid [...]
+The pmap command reports the memory map of a process or processes.
+-x, --extended
+Show the extended format.
+-d, --device
+Show the device format.
+-q, --quiet
+Do not display some header or footer lines.
+%
+The  options  -v  and --version print the version information of the program to standard output and exit.
+The options -h and --help print a usage information of the program to standard output and stop  the  pro‐
+gram instantly.
+All  other options are assumed to be groffer options.  They are internally passed to groffer.  They over‐
+ride the behavior of the program.  The options are optional, they can be omitted.
+The filespec arguments correspond to the filespec arguments of groffer.  So they are either the names  of
+%
+dnssec-keymgr - Ensures correct DNSKEY coverage for a zone based on a defined policy
+dnssec-keymgr [-K directory] [-c file] [-f] [-k] [-q] [-v] [-z] [-g path] [-r path] [-s path] [zone...]
+dnssec-keymgr is a high level Python wrapper to facilitate the key rollover process for zones handled by
+BIND. It uses the BIND commands for manipulating DNSSEC key metadata: dnssec-keygen and dnssec-settime.
+DNSSEC policy can be read from a configuration file (default /etc/dnssec-policy.conf), from which the key
+parameters, publication and rollover schedule, and desired coverage duration for any given zone can be
+default policy used for all zones.
+When dnssec-keymgr runs, it examines the DNSSEC keys for one or more zones, comparing their timing
+metadata against the policies for those zones. If key settings do not conform to the DNSSEC policy (for
+example, because the policy has been changed), they are automatically corrected.
+%
+apropos - search the manual page names and descriptions
+apropos [-dalv?V] [-e|-w|-r] [-s list] [-m system[,...]] [-M path] [-L locale] [-C file] keyword ...
+Each  manual  page  has  a  short description available within it.  apropos searches the descriptions for
+instances of keyword.
+cial characters to stop the shell from interpreting them.
+The standard matching rules allow matches to be made against the page name and  word  boundaries  in  the
+description.
+The  database  searched by apropos is updated by the mandb program.  Depending on your installation, this
+%
+dbus-binding-tool - C language GLib bindings generation utility.
+dbus-binding-tool   [--force]   [--help]  [--ignore-unsupported]  [--mode=pretty|glib-client|glib-server]
+[--output=file] [--prefix=symbol-prefix] [--version] [file...]
+dbus-binding-tool is used to expose a GObject via D-Bus.  As input, dbus-binding-tool uses a D-Bus Intro‐
+header file which eases the use of a remote D-Bus object.  Output is sent to standard out or to the file‐
+name specified with the --output argument.
+The following is a sample D-Bus Introspection XML file which describes an object that exposes one method,
+named ManyArgs:
+%
+readprofile - read kernel profiling information
+readprofile [options]
+The  readprofile  command uses the /proc/profile information to print ascii data on standard output.  The
+output is organized in three columns: the first is the number of clock ticks, the second is the  name  of
+the  C  function in the kernel where those many ticks occurred, and the third is the normalized `load' of
+the procedure, calculated as a ratio between the number of ticks and the length of  the  procedure.   The
+output is filled with blanks to ease readability.
+-a, --all
+%
+rsync - a fast, versatile, remote (and local) file-copying tool
+Access via remote shell:
+Pull: rsync [OPTION...] [USER@]HOST:SRC... [DEST]
+Push: rsync [OPTION...] SRC... [USER@]HOST:DEST
+Access via rsync daemon:
+Pull: rsync [OPTION...] [USER@]HOST::SRC... [DEST]
+rsync [OPTION...] rsync://[USER@]HOST[:PORT]/SRC... [DEST]
+Push: rsync [OPTION...] SRC... [USER@]HOST::DEST
+rsync [OPTION...] SRC... rsync://[USER@]HOST[:PORT]/DEST
+%
+clockdiff - measure clock difference between hosts
+-o     Use  IP TIMESTAMP with ICMP ECHO instead of ICMP TIMESTAMP messages. It is useful with some desti‐
+dresses  instead of four term one.  What flavor works better depends on target host. Particularly,
+-o is better for Linux.
+%
+vgscan — scan all disks for volume groups and rebuild caches
+[--notifydbus] [-P|--partial] [--reportformat {basic|json}] [-v|--verbose]
+vgscan scans all SCSI, (E)IDE disks, multiple devices and a bunch of other disk  devices  in  the  system
+to avoid a CD ROM, for example.
+hardware.
+%
+delv - DNS lookup and validation utility
+[-q name] [-t type] [-x addr] [name] [type] [class] [queryopt...]
+delv [-h]
+delv [-v]
+delv [queryopt...] [query...]
+delv (Domain Entity Lookup & Validation) is a tool for sending DNS queries and validating the results,
+using the same internal resolver and validator logic as named.
+delv will send to a specified name server all queries needed to fetch and validate the requested data;
+%
+pscap - a program to see capabilities
+pscap [ -a ]
+pscap is a program that prints out a report of process capabilities. If the application has any capabili‐
+ties, it will be in the report with the exception of init. By giving the -a  command  line  option,  init
+will be included, too. If a process is not in the report, it has dropped all capabilities. If the process
+has partial capabilities, it is further examined to see if it has an open-ended bounding set. If this  is
+found to be true, a '+' symbol is added.
+Steve Grubb
+%
+dirname - strip last component from file name
+output '.' (meaning the current directory).
+-z, --zero
+end each output line with NUL, not newline
+--help display this help and exit
+--version
+output version information and exit
+%
+zcmp, zdiff - compare compressed files
+Zcmp  and zdiff are used to invoke the cmp or the diff program on files compressed via gzip.  All options
+fed to cmp or diff.  The input files are not modified.  The exit status from cmp or diff is preserved.
+BUGS
+%
+named-journalprint - print zone journal in human-readable form
+named-journalprint {journal}
+named-journalprint prints the contents of a zone journal file in a human-readable form.
+Journal files are automatically created by named when changes are made to dynamic zones (e.g., by
+nsupdate). They record each addition or deletion of a resource record, in binary format, allowing the
+changes to be re-applied to the zone when the server is restarted after a shutdown or crash. By default,
+the name of the journal file is formed by appending the extension .jnl to the name of the corresponding
+zone file.
+named-journalprint converts the contents of a given journal file into a human-readable text format. Each
+line begins with "add" or "del", to indicate whether the record was added or deleted, and continues with
+the resource record in master-file format.
+%
+debugreiserfs - The debugging tool for the ReiserFS filesystem.
+device
+debugreiserfs  sometimes  helps to solve problems with reiserfs filesystems.  When run without options it
+prints the super block of the ReiserFS filesystem found on the device.
+device is the special file corresponding to the device (e.g  /dev/hdXX  for  an  IDE  disk  partition  or
+/dev/sdXX for a SCSI disk partition).
+-j device
+prints  the  contents of the journal. The option -p allows it to pack the journal with other meta‐
+%
+thin_metadata_size - thin provisioning metadata device/file size calculator.
+thin_metadata_size [options]
+thin_metadata_size  calculates  the size of the thin provisioning metadata based on the block size of the
+thin provisioned devices, the size of the thin provisioning pool and the maximum number of all thin  pri‐
+sioned devices and snapshots.  Because thin provisioning pools are holding widely variable contents, this
+tool is needed to provide sensible initial default size.
+-b, --block-size BLOCKSIZE[bskKmMgGtTpPeEzZyY]
+Block size of thin provisioned devices in units  of  bytes,  sectors,  kibibytes,  kilobytes,  ...
+respectively.   Default  is  in  sectors  without a block size unit specifier.  Size/number option
+%
+findmnt - find a filesystem
+findmnt [options]
+findmnt [options] device|mountpoint
+findmnt [options] [--source] device [--target|--mountpoint] mountpoint
+findmnt  will  list  all  mounted  filesytems or search for a filesystem.  The findmnt command is able to
+search in /etc/fstab, /etc/mtab or /proc/self/mountinfo.  If device  or  mountpoint  is  not  given,  all
+filesystems are shown.
+mountpoint (and vice versa) if the --target, --mountpoint or --source options are not specified.
+%
+The  options  -v  and --version print the version information of the program to standard output and exit.
+The options -h and --help print a usage information of the program to standard output and stop  the  pro‐
+gram instantly.
+All  other options are assumed to be groffer options.  They are internally passed to groffer.  They over‐
+ride the behavior of the program.  The options are optional, they can be omitted.
+The filespec arguments correspond to the filespec arguments of groffer.  So they are either the names  of
+%
+last, lastb - show a listing of last logged in users
+last [options] [username...] [tty...]
+lastb [options] [username...] [tty...]
+last  searches back through the /var/log/wtmp file (or the file designated by the -f option) and displays
+a list of all users logged in (and out) since that file was created.  One or more usernames  and/or  ttys
+be abbreviated, thus last 0 is the same as last tty0.
+When catching a SIGINT signal (generated by the interrupt key, usually control-C) or  a  SIGQUIT  signal,
+terminate.
+The pseudo user reboot logs in each time the system is rebooted.  Thus last reboot will show a log of all
+%
+ethtool - query or control network driver and hardware settings
+ethtool devname
+ethtool -h|--help
+ethtool --version
+ethtool -a|--show-pause devname
+ethtool -A|--pause devname [autoneg on|off] [rx on|off] [tx on|off]
+ethtool -c|--show-coalesce devname
+ethtool -C|--coalesce devname [adaptive-rx on|off] [adaptive-tx on|off] [rx-usecs N] [rx-frames N]
+[rx-usecs-irq N] [rx-frames-irq N] [tx-usecs N] [tx-frames N] [tx-usecs-irq N] [tx-frames-irq N]
+%
+groupmems - administer members of a user's primary group
+groupmems -a user_name | -d user_name | [-g group_name] | -l | -p
+The groupmems command allows a user to administer his/her own group membership list without the
+requirement of superuser privileges. The groupmems utility is for systems that configure its users to be
+in their own name sake primary group (i.e., guest / guest).
+Only the superuser, as administrator, can use groupmems to alter the memberships of other groups.
+The options which apply to the groupmems command are:
+-a, --add user_name
+Add a user to the group membership list.
+%
+decoded structures.
+-b, --benchmark
+perform a benchmark on decoding
+-s, --strict
+use strict DER decoding
+-h, --help
+display this help and exit
+%
+mkfs.xfs - construct an XFS filesystem
+mkfs.xfs  [  -b  block_size  ]  [  -m  global_metadata_options  ] [ -d data_section_options ] [ -f ] [ -i
+inode_options ] [ -l log_section_options ] [ -n naming_options ] [ -p protofile ]  [  -q  ]  [  -r  real‐
+time_section_options ] [ -s sector_size ] [ -L label ] [ -N ] [ -K ] device
+mkfs.xfs -V
+mkfs.xfs  constructs  an  XFS filesystem by writing on a special file using the values found in the argu‐
+In its simplest (and most commonly used form), the size of the filesystem is  determined  from  the  disk
+driver.   As  an  example,  to make a filesystem with an internal log on the first partition on the first
+SCSI disk, use:
+%
+new_inode_size ] [ -j ] [  -J  journal-options  ]  [  -m  reserved-blocks-percentage  ]  [  -o  [^]mount-
+options[,...]   ]  [  -p mmp_update_interval ] [ -r reserved-blocks-count ] [ -s sparse-super-flag ] [ -u
+user ] [ -g group ] [ -C mount-count ] [ -E extended-options ] [ -L  volume-name  ]  [  -M  last-mounted-
+directory  ]  [  -O  [^]feature[,...]   ]  [ -Q quota-options ] [ -T time-last-checked ] [ -U UUID ] [ -z
+undo_file ] device
+%
+lsusb - list USB devices
+lsusb [ options ]
+lsusb  is a utility for displaying information about USB buses in the system and the devices connected to
+them.
+-v, --verbose
+configuration  descriptors  for the device's current speed.  Class descriptors will be shown, when
+available, for USB device classes including hub, audio, HID, communications, and chipcard.
+-s [[bus]:][devnum]
+%
+cpio — copy files to and from archives
+cpio -i [options] [pattern ...] [< archive]
+cpio -o [options] < name-list [> archive]
+cpio -p [options] dest-dir < name-list
+zip, jar, ar, and ISO 9660 cdrom images and can create tar, pax, cpio, ar, and shar archives.
+The first option to cpio is a mode indicator from the following list:
+-i      Input.  Read an archive from standard input (unless overridden) and extract the contents to disk or
+(if the -t option is specified) list the contents to standard output.  If one or more file patterns
+are specified, only files matching one of the patterns will be extracted.
+-o      Output.  Read a list of filenames from standard input and produce a new archive on standard output
+(unless overridden) containing the specified items.
+%
+systemd, init - systemd system and service manager
+systemd is a system and service manager for Linux operating systems. When run as first process on boot
+telinit and pass all command line arguments unmodified. That means init and telinit are mostly equivalent
+When run as a system instance, systemd interprets the configuration file system.conf and the files in
+system.conf.d directories; when run as a user instance, systemd interprets the configuration file
+%
+nstat, rtacct - network statistics tools.
+nstat and rtacct are simple tools to monitor kernel snmp counters and network interface statistics.
+-h, --help Print help
+-V, --version
+Print version
+-z, --zero
+Dump zero counters too. By default they are not shown.
+%
+autoscan - Generate a preliminary configure.in
+autoscan [OPTION]... [SRCDIR]
+Examine  source  files in the directory tree rooted at SRCDIR, or the current directory if none is given.
+Search the source files for common portability problems, check for incompleteness of `configure.ac',  and
+create a file `configure.scan' which is a preliminary `configure.ac' for that package.
+-h, --help
+print this help, then exit
+-V, --version
+print version number, then exit
+-v, --verbose
+%
+vgchange — change attributes of a volume group
+vgchange  [--addtag  Tag]  [--alloc  AllocationPolicy]  [-A|--autobackup  {y|n}] [-a|--activate [a|e|s|l]
+{y|n}]  [--activationmode  {complete|degraded|partial}]  [-K|--ignoreactivationskip]  [--monitor   {y|n}]
+Tag] [--detachprofile] [-h|--help] [--ignorelockingfailure] [--ignoremonitoring] [--ignoreskippedcluster]
+[--sysinit]  [--noudevsync]  [--lock-start] [--lock-stop] [--lock-type LockType] [-l|--logicalvolume Max‐
+datacopies    NumberOfCopies|unmanaged|all]   [-P|--partial]   [-s|--physicalextentsize   PhysicalExtent‐
+Size[bBsSkKmMgGtTpPeE]]  [--reportformat  {basic|json}]  [-S|--select  Selection]  [--systemid  SystemID]
+vgchange  allows  you to change the attributes of one or more volume groups. Its main purpose is to acti‐
+groups  are  subject  to changes and allow access to their logical volumes.  [Not yet implemented: During
+%
+systemd-run - Run programs in transient scope or service or timer units
+If a command is run as transient service unit, it will be started and managed by the service manager like
+any other service, and thus shows up in the output of systemctl list-units like any other unit. It will
+run in a clean and detached execution environment, with the service manager as its parent process. In
+this mode, systemd-run will start the service asynchronously in the background and return after the
+command has begun execution.
+%
+netcat - GNU Netcat Manual
+netcat [options] hostname port [port] ...
+netcat -l -p port [options] [hostname] [port] ...
+netcat -L hostname:port -p port [options] ...
+Netcat is a simple Unix utility which reads and writes data across network connections, using TCP or UDP
+protocol.  It is designed to be a reliable "back-end" tool that can be used directly or easily driven by
+other programs and scripts.  At the same time, it is a feature-rich network debugging and exploration
+tool, since it can create almost any kind of connection you would need and has several interesting built-
+in capabilities.  Netcat, or "nc" as the original program was named, should have been supplied long ago
+as another one of those cryptic but standard Unix tools.
+%
+telnet - User interface to TELNET
+telnet [OPTION...] [HOST [PORT]]
+Login to remote system HOST (optionally, on service port PORT)
+General options:
+-6, --ipv6
+use only IPv6
+%
+If the output filename is present, the output is written there.  If it is - or absent the output is writ‐
+ten to the standard output.
+the BUGS section below.
+%
+grub-mkconfig - generate a GRUB configuration file
+grub-mkconfig [OPTION]
+Generate a grub config file
+-o, --output=FILE
+output generated config to FILE [default=stdout]
+-h, --help
+print this message and exit
+-v, --version
+print the version information and exit
+%
+arpd - userspace arp daemon.
+rate ] [ <INTERFACES> ]
+The arpd daemon collects gratuitous ARP information, saving it on local disk and feeding it to the kernel
+on demand to avoid redundant broadcasting due to limited size of the kernel ARP cache.
+-h -?  Print help
+-l     Dump  the  arpd  database  to stdout and exit. The output consists of three columns: the interface
+index, the IP address of the interface, and the MAC address of the interface. Negative entries for
+a colon and the most recent time when the fact that the host is dead was proven.
+%
+soelim - interpret .so requests in groff input
+soelim [-Crtv] [-I dir] [files ...]
+It is possible to have whitespace between the -I command line option and its parameter.
+soelim reads files and replaces lines of the form
+.so file
+by  the  contents  of  file.  It is useful if files included with .so need to be preprocessed.  Normally,
+soelim should be invoked with the -s option of groff.
+To embed ‘\’ in the file name, write ‘\\’ or ‘\e’.  To embed a  space,  write  ‘\ ’.   Any  other  escape
+sequence in file makes soelim ignore the whole line.
+%
+gpg-error-config - Script to get information about the installed version of libgpg-error
+gpg-error-config [options]
+gpg-error-config  is  a  tool  that  is used to configure to determine the compiler and linker flags that
+macros for GNU autoconf that are included with Libgpg-error.
+gpg-error-config accepts the following options:
+--mt   Provide  output  appropriate  for  multithreaded programs.  --mt is only useful when combined with
+other options, and must be the first option if present.
+--version
+%
+autoupdate - Update a configure.in to a newer Autoconf
+autoupdate [OPTION]... [TEMPLATE-FILE]...
+Update  each  TEMPLATE-FILE if given, or `configure.ac' if present, or else `configure.in', to the syntax
+of the current version of Autoconf.  The original files are backed up.
+Operation modes:
+-h, --help
+print this help, then exit
+-V, --version
+print version number, then exit
+-v, --verbose
+%
+ldns-verify-zone - read a DNSSEC signed zone and verify it.
+ldns-verify-zone ZONEFILE
+ldns-verify-zone reads a DNS zone file and verifies it.
+RRSIG resource records are checked against the DNSKEY set at the zone apex.
+-h     Show usage and exit
+-a     Apex only, check only the zone apex
+%
+xz, unxz, xzcat, lzma, unlzma, lzcat - Compress or decompress .xz and .lzma files
+xz [option...]  [file...]
+unxz is equivalent to xz --decompress.
+xzcat is equivalent to xz --decompress --stdout.
+lzma is equivalent to xz --format=lzma.
+unlzma is equivalent to xz --format=lzma --decompress.
+lzcat is equivalent to xz --format=lzma --decompress --stdout.
+When  writing  scripts  that  need  to decompress files, it is recommended to always use the name xz with
+appropriate arguments (xz -d or xz -dc) instead of the names unxz and xzcat.
+%
+info - read Info documents
+info [OPTION]... [MENU-ITEM...]
+Read documentation in Info format.
+-a, --all
+use all matching manuals.
+-k, --apropos=STRING
+look up STRING in all indices of all manuals.
+-d, --directory=DIR
+add DIR to INFOPATH.
+%
+netstat  -  Print  network connections, routing tables, interface statistics, masquerade connections, and
+multicast memberships
+[--rfcomm|-f]    [--listening|-l]    [--all|-a]    [--numeric|-n]   [--numeric-hosts]   [--numeric-ports]
+[--numeric-users] [--symbolic|-N] [--extend|-e[--extend|-e]] [--timers|-o] [--program|-p]  [--verbose|-v]
+[--continuous|-c] [--wide|-W]
+netstat  {--route|-r}  [address_family_options]  [--extend|-e[--extend|-e]] [--verbose|-v] [--numeric|-n]
+[--numeric-hosts] [--numeric-ports] [--numeric-users] [--continuous|-c]
+netstat   {--interfaces|-i}   [--all|-a]   [--extend|-e[--extend|-e]]    [--verbose|-v]    [--program|-p]
+[--numeric|-n] [--numeric-hosts] [--numeric-ports] [--numeric-users] [--continuous|-c]
+netstat  {--groups|-g}  [--numeric|-n]  [--numeric-hosts] [--numeric-ports] [--numeric-users] [--continu‐
+ous|-c]
+%
+ldns-zcat - reunite (z)split up a zone files
+ldns-zcat zonefiles
+ldns-zcat  will  read  in  a  bunch  of (z)split up zonefiles and creates a new larger zone file. The SOA
+record in the first part is used as the SOA record in the generated zone.
+The resulted zone file is printed to standard output.
+-o ORIGIN
+use ORIGIN when reading in the zone
+-v     show the version number and exit
+%
+chem - groff preprocessor for producing chemical structure diagrams
+chem [option ....]  [--] [filespec ....]
+chem -h | --help
+chem -v | --version
+There  are  no  other options than -h, --help, -v, and --version; these options provoke the printing of a
+version or usage information, respectively, and all filespec arguments are ignored.  A filespec  argument
+is either a file name of an existing file or a minus character -, meaning standard input.  If no argument
+is specified then standard input is taken automatically.
+chem produces chemical structure diagrams.  Today's version is best suited for organic chemistry  (bonds,
+%
+seq - print a sequence of numbers
+seq [OPTION]... LAST
+seq [OPTION]... FIRST LAST
+seq [OPTION]... FIRST INCREMENT LAST
+Print numbers from FIRST to LAST, in steps of INCREMENT.
+Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
+-f, --format=FORMAT
+use printf style floating-point FORMAT
+-s, --separator=STRING
+use STRING to separate numbers (default: \n)
+%
+groups - display current group names
+groups [user]
+The groups command displays the current group names or ID values. If the value does not have a
+corresponding entry in /etc/group, the value will be displayed as the numerical group value. The optional
+user parameter will display the groups for the named user.
+Systems which do not support concurrent group sets will have the information from /etc/group reported.
+The user must use newgrp or sg to change his current real and effective group ID.
+FILES
+/etc/group
+Group account information.
+%
+ifconfig - configure a network interface
+ifconfig [-v] [-a] [-s] [interface]
+ifconfig [-v] interface [aftype] options | address ...
+Ifconfig  is used to configure the kernel-resident network interfaces.  It is used at boot time to set up
+interfaces as necessary.  After that, it is usually only needed when debugging or when system  tuning  is
+needed.
+If  no arguments are given, ifconfig displays the status of the currently active interfaces.  If a single
+interface argument is given, it displays the status of the given interface only; if a single -a  argument
+is  given,  it displays the status of all interfaces, even those that are down.  Otherwise, it configures
+an interface.
+Address Families
+%
+vgdisplay — display attributes of volume groups
+{basic|json}] [-s|--short] [-S|--select Selection] [-v|--verbose] [-d|--debug] [-h|--help] [--ignorelock‐
+ingfailure] [--ignoreskippedcluster] [--nosuffix] [-P|--partial] [--units hHbBsSkKmMgGtTpPeE] [--version]
+[-d|--debug] [-h|-?|--help] [--ignorelockingfailure] [--ignoreskippedcluster] [--logonly]  [--noheadings]
+[--nosuffix] [-P|--partial] [--reportformat {basic|json}] [--separator Separator] [--unbuffered] [--units
+with it's physical and logical volumes and their sizes etc.
+%
+dnssec-dsfromkey - DNSSEC DS RR generation tool
+[-A] [-v level] {dnsname}
+dnssec-dsfromkey [-h] [-V]
+%
+blocks-per-group ] [ -G number-of-groups ] [ -i bytes-per-inode ] [ -I inode-size ] [ -j ] [ -J  journal-
+options ] [ -N number-of-inodes ] [ -n ] [ -m reserved-blocks-percentage ] [ -o creator-os ] [ -O [^]fea‐
+ture[,...]  ] [ -q ] [ -r fs-revision-level ] [ -E extended-options ] [ -v ] [ -F ] [ -L volume-label ] [
+-M last-mounted-directory ] [ -S ] [ -t fs-type ] [ -T usage-type ] [ -U UUID ] [ -V ] [ -e errors-behav‐
+ior ] [ -z undo_file ] device [ fs-size ]
+size ]
+by device.
+%
+ftpd - File Transfer Protocol server.
+ftpd [OPTION...]
+File Transfer Protocol daemon.
+-6, --ipv6
+restrict daemon to IPv6
+-a, --auth=AUTH
+use AUTH for authentication
+%
+col - filter reverse line feeds from input
+col [options]
+col  filters  out  reverse (and half-reverse) line feeds so the output is in the correct order, with only
+forward and half-forward line feeds.  It also replaces any whitespace characters with tabs  where  possi‐
+col reads from standard input and writes to standard output.
+-b, --no-backspaces
+Do not output any backspaces, printing only the last character written to each column position.
+-f, --fine
+%
+unhide — forensic tool to find hidden processes
+unhide-posix proc | sys
+unhide  is  a  forensic tool to find processes hidden by rootkits, Linux kernel modules or by other tech‐
+niques.  It detects hidden processes using six techniques.
+Options are only available for unhide-linux not for unhide-posix.
+-d     Do a double check in brute test to avoid false positive.
+-f     Write a log file (unhide-linux.log) in the current directory.
+%
+blocks-per-group ] [ -G number-of-groups ] [ -i bytes-per-inode ] [ -I inode-size ] [ -j ] [ -J  journal-
+options ] [ -N number-of-inodes ] [ -n ] [ -m reserved-blocks-percentage ] [ -o creator-os ] [ -O [^]fea‐
+ture[,...]  ] [ -q ] [ -r fs-revision-level ] [ -E extended-options ] [ -v ] [ -F ] [ -L volume-label ] [
+-M last-mounted-directory ] [ -S ] [ -t fs-type ] [ -T usage-type ] [ -U UUID ] [ -V ] [ -e errors-behav‐
+ior ] [ -z undo_file ] device [ fs-size ]
+size ]
+by device.
+%
+route - show / manipulate the IP routing table
+[irtt I] [reject] [mod] [dyn] [reinstate] [[dev] If]
+route  [-V] [--version] [-h] [--help]
+Route manipulates the kernel's IP routing tables.  Its primary use is to set up static routes to specific
+When  the  add  or del options are used, route modifies the routing tables.  Without these options, route
+%
+setfont - load EGA/VGA console screen font
+setfont [-O font+umap.orig] [-o font.orig] [-om cmap.orig] [-ou umap.orig] [-N] [font.new ...]  [-m cmap]
+[-u umap] [-C console] [-hH] [-v] [-V]
+The setfont command reads a font from the file font.new and loads it into the EGA/VGA  character  genera‐
+tor,  and  optionally  outputs the previous font.  It can also load various mapping tables and output the
+previous versions.
+and load the union.  Typical use:
+setfont
+Load a default font.
+%
+python - an interpreted, interactive, object-oriented programming language
+python [ -B ] [ -b ] [ -d ] [ -E ] [ -h ] [ -i ] [ -I ]
+[ -m module-name ] [ -q ] [ -O ] [ -OO ] [ -s ] [ -S ] [ -u ]
+[ -v ] [ -V ] [ -W argument ] [ -x ] [ [ -X option ] -?  ]
+[ -c command | script | - ] [ arguments ]
+Python  is  an  interpreted,  interactive,  object-oriented programming language that combines remarkable
+power with very clear syntax.  For an introduction to programming in Python,  see  the  Python  Tutorial.
+The  Python  Library  Reference  documents built-in and standard types, constants, functions and modules.
+Finally, the Python Reference Manual describes the syntax and semantics of the core language in  (perhaps
+installed on your system as well.)
+Python's basic power can be extended with your own modules written in C or C++.   On  most  systems  such
+%
+flock - manage locks from shell scripts
+flock [options] file|directory command [arguments]
+flock [options] file|directory -c command
+flock [options] number
+The first and second of the above forms wrap the lock around the execution of a command, in a manner sim‐
+priate  permissions)  if  it  does  not  already  exist.   By  default, if the lock cannot be immediately
+acquired, flock waits until the lock is available.
+The third form uses an open file by its file descriptor number.  See the examples below for how that  can
+be used.
+%
+With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.
+Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
+-d, --decode
+decode data
+-i, --ignore-garbage
+when decoding, ignore non-alphabet characters
+%
+Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
+-c, --check
+checks the syntax only
+-o, --output=FILE
+output file
+%
+infotocap - convert a terminfo description into a termcap description
+infotocap  looks in each given text file for terminfo descriptions.  For each terminfo description found,
+an equivalent termcap description is written to standard output.  Terminfo use  capabilities  are  trans‐
+lated directly to termcap tc capabilities.
+-v   print out tracing information on standard error as the program runs.
+-V   print out the version of the program in use on standard error and exit.
+line to a maximum width of 60 characters.
+%
+setfattr - set extended attributes of filesystem objects
+setfattr [-h] -n name [-v value] pathname...
+setfattr [-h] -x name pathname...
+setfattr [-h] --restore=file
+The setfattr command associates a new value with an extended attribute name for each specified file.
+-n name, --name=name
+Specifies the name of the extended attribute to set.
+-v value, --value=value
+Specifies the new value of the extended attribute. There are three methods available for encoding the
+value.  If the given string is enclosed in double quotes, the inner string is  treated  as  text.  In
+%
+kadmind  [-x  db_args]  [-r  realm]  [-m]  [-nofork]  [-proponly]  [-port  port-number] [-P pid_file] [-p
+kadmind starts the Kerberos administration server.  kadmind typically runs on the master Kerberos server,
+which  stores  the KDC database.  If the KDC database uses the LDAP module, the administration server and
+the KDC server need not run on the same machine.  kadmind accepts remote requests from programs  such  as
+kadmind requires a number of configuration files to be set up in order for it to work:
+The KDC configuration file contains configuration information for the KDC and admin servers.  kad‐
+mind uses settings in this file to locate the Kerberos database,  and  is  also  affected  by  the
+%
+btrfs-check - check or repair an unmounted btrfs filesystem
+btrfs check [options] <device>
+The filesystem checker is used to verify structural integrity of a filesystem and attempt to repair it if
+requested. The filesystem must be unmounted.
+By default, btrfs check will not modify the device but you can reaffirm that by the option --readonly.
+btrfsck is an alias of btrfs check command and is now deprecated.
+Warning
+Do not use --repair unless you are advised to by a developer, an experienced user or accept the fact
+that fsck cannot possibly fix all sorts of damage that could happen to a filesystem because of
+software and hardware bugs.
+%
+lsinitcpio - Examine an initramfs
+lsinitcpio [action] [options] image
+Examines the contents of an initcpio image. Without any options, lsinitcpio simply lists the contents of
+an image.
+ACTIONS
+-a, --analyze
+Analyze the contents of the specified image and print output in human readable form.
+-c, --config
+Show the configuration file the given image was built with.
+-l, --list
+%
+eject - eject removable media
+eject [options] device|mountpoint
+eject  allows removable media (typically a CD-ROM, floppy disk, tape, JAZ, ZIP or USB disk) to be ejected
+under software control.  The command can also control some multi-disc  CD-ROM  changers,  the  auto-eject
+feature supported by some devices, and close the disc tray of some CD-ROM drives.
+The  device  corresponding to device or mountpoint is ejected.  If no name is specified, the default name
+'/dev/sda'), UUID=uuid or LABEL=label tags.
+There  are  four different methods of ejecting, depending on whether the device is a CD-ROM, SCSI device,
+removable floppy, or tape.  By default eject tries all four methods in order until it succeeds.
+%
+clear - clear the terminal screen
+clear
+bility is defined).  clear looks in the environment for the terminal type and then in the terminfo  data‐
+base to determine how to clear the screen.
+%
+rsh - Remote shell client
+remote shell
+-6, --ipv6
+use only IPv6
+allows an eight-bit input data path at all times
+%
+crontab - maintains crontab files for individual users
+crontab [-u user] file
+crontab [-u user] [-l | -r | -e] [-i] [-s]
+crontab -n [ hostname ]
+crontab -c
+Crontab  is  the program used to install a crontab table file, remove or list the existing tables used to
+/var/spool/,  they  are not intended to be edited directly.  For SELinux in MLS mode, you can define more
+In this version of Cron it is possible to use a network-mounted shared /var/spool/cron across  a  cluster
+of  hosts  and specify that only one of the hosts should run the crontab jobs in the particular directory
+%
+netctl-auto - Control automatic selection of wireless netctl profiles
+netctl-auto [--help | --version]
+netctl-auto@.service file. See netctl.special(7) for details about the service file.
+The following commands are understood:
+list
+List all profiles which are currently available for automatic selection. Active profiles will be
+marked with a ‘*’, disabled profiles will be marked with a ‘!’.
+%
+setfacl - set file access control lists
+setfacl [-bkndRLPvh] [{-m|-x} acl_spec] [{-M|-X} acl_file] file ...
+setfacl --restore=file
+of commands is followed by a sequence of files (which in turn can be followed by another sequence of com‐
+mands, ...).
+The  options  -m,  and  -x expect an ACL on the command line. Multiple ACL entries are separated by comma
+characters (`,'). The options -M, and -X read an ACL from a file or from standard input.  The  ACL  entry
+format is described in Section ACL ENTRIES.
+The --set and --set-file options set the ACL of a file or a directory. The previous ACL is replaced.  ACL
+%
+mkreiserfs - The create tool for the Linux ReiserFS filesystem.
+mkreiserfs  [  -dfV  ]  [  -b | --block-size N ] [ -h | --hash HASH ] [ -u | --uuid UUID ] [ -l | --label
+LABEL ] [ --format FORMAT ] [ -q | --quiet ] [ -j | --journal-device FILE ] [ -s | --journal-size N  ]  [
+-o  | --journal-offset N ] [ -t | --transaction-max-size N ] [ -B | --badblocks file ]  device [ filesys‐
+tem-size ]
+mkreiserfs creates a Linux ReiserFS filesystem on a device (usually a disk partition).
+device is the special file corresponding to a device or to a partition (e.g /dev/hdXX  for  an  IDE  disk
+partition or /dev/sdXX for a SCSI disk partition).
+filesystem-size
+is the size in blocks of the filesystem. If omitted, mkreiserfs will automatically set it.
+%
+jfs_debugfs - shell-type JFS file system editor
+jfs_debugfs device
+jfs_debugfs  is  a  program  which  can  be  used to perform various low-level actions on a JFS formatted
+device.
+jfs_debugfs must be run as root.
+a[lter] <block> <offset> <hex_string>
+replaces the data located at the <offset> of <block> with <hex_string>
+%
+xz, unxz, xzcat, lzma, unlzma, lzcat - Compress or decompress .xz and .lzma files
+xz [option...]  [file...]
+unxz is equivalent to xz --decompress.
+xzcat is equivalent to xz --decompress --stdout.
+lzma is equivalent to xz --format=lzma.
+unlzma is equivalent to xz --format=lzma --decompress.
+lzcat is equivalent to xz --format=lzma --decompress --stdout.
+When  writing  scripts  that  need  to decompress files, it is recommended to always use the name xz with
+appropriate arguments (xz -d or xz -dc) instead of the names unxz and xzcat.
+%
+gnutls-cli-debug - GnuTLS debug client
+gnutls-cli-debug [-flags] [-flag [value]] [--option-name[[=| ]value]]
+TLS  debug  client.  It sets up multiple TLS connections to a server and queries its capabilities. It was
+created to assist in debugging GnuTLS, but it might be useful to extract a TLS server's capabilities.  It
+connects  to  a  TLS  server, performs tests and print the server's capabilities. If called with the `-v'
+parameter more checks will be performed.  Can be used to check for servers with special needs or bugs.
+-d number, --debug=number
+constrained to being:
+%
+tty - print the file name of the terminal connected to standard input
+tty [OPTION]...
+Print the file name of the terminal connected to standard input.
+-s, --silent, --quiet
+print nothing, only return an exit status
+--help display this help and exit
+--version
+output version information and exit
+%
+csplit - split a file into sections determined by context lines
+csplit [OPTION]... FILE PATTERN...
+each piece to standard output.
+Read standard input if FILE is -
+Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
+-b, --suffix-format=FORMAT
+-f, --prefix=PREFIX
+%
+systemd-cgtop - Show top control groups by their resource usage
+systemd-cgtop shows the top control groups of the local Linux control group hierarchy, ordered by their
+specified control group.
+If systemd-cgtop is not connected to a tty, no column headers are printed and the default is to only run
+Resource usage is only accounted for control groups in the relevant hierarchy, i.e. CPU usage is only
+accounted for control groups in the "cpuacct" hierarchy, memory usage only for those in "memory" and disk
+I/O usage for those in "blkio". If resource monitoring for these resources is required, it is recommended
+%
+tload - graphic representation of system load average
+tload [options] [tty]
+tload  prints  a  graph  of the current system load average to the specified tty (or the tty of the tload
+process if none is specified).
+-s, --scale number
+The scale option allows a vertical scale to be specified for the display  (in  characters  between
+graph ticks); thus, a smaller value represents a larger scale, and vice versa.
+-d, --delay seconds
+The delay sets the delay between graph updates in seconds.
+%
+firewallctl - firewalld command line client
+firewallctl is an alternate command line client of the firewalld daemon. It provides interface to manage
+runtime and permanent configuration.
+things can get changed in the runtime or permanent configuration.
+The following options are supported:
+General Options
+-h, --help
+%
+jfs_fsck - initiate replay of the JFS transaction log, and check and repair a JFS formatted device
+jfs_fsck [ -afnpvV ] [ -j journal_device ] [ --omit_journal_replay ] [ --replay_journal_only ] device
+jfs_fsck  is used to replay the JFS transaction log, check a JFS formatted device for errors, and fix any
+errors found.
+jfs_fsck must be run as root.
+WARNING
+jfs_fsck should only be used to check an unmounted file system or a file  system  that  is  mounted  READ
+ONLY.  Using jfs_fsck to check a file system mounted other than READ ONLY could seriously damage the file
+system!
+%
+pidof -- find the process ID of a running program.
+pidof [-s] [-c] [-x] [-o omitpid[,omitpid..]]  [-o omitpid[,omitpid..]..]  program [program..]
+Pidof finds the process id's (pids) of the named programs. It prints those id's on the standard output.
+-s     Single shot - this instructs the program to only return one pid.
+non-root users, as they will be unable to check the current root directory of  processes  they  do
+not own.
+-x     Scripts  too  -  this  causes  the program to also return process id's of shells running the named
+scripts.
+%
+fdformat - low-level format a floppy disk
+fdformat [options] device
+fdformat  does  a  low-level format on a floppy disk.  device is usually one of the following (for floppy
+%
+tipc - a TIPC configuration and management tool
+The Transparent Inter-Process Communication (TIPC) protocol offers total address transparency between
+processes which allows applications in a clustered computer environment to communicate quickly and reli‐
+ably with each other, regardless of their location within the cluster.
+TIPC originated at the telecommunications manufacturer Ericsson. The first open source version of TIPC
+%
+install-info - update info/dir entries
+install-info [OPTION]... [INFO-FILE [DIR-FILE]]
+Add or remove entries in INFO-FILE from the Info directory DIR-FILE.  INFO-FILE and DIR-FILE are required
+unless the --info-file or --dir-file (or --info-dir) options are given, respectively.
+--add-once
+add only to first matching section, not all.
+--align=COL
+start description of new entries at column COL.
+--calign=COL
+%
+busctl - Introspect the bus
+The following options are understood:
+--address=ADDRESS
+Connect to the bus specified by ADDRESS instead of using suitable defaults for either the system or
+user bus (see --system and --user options).
+--show-machine
+When showing the list of peers, show a column containing the names of containers they belong to. See
+%
+make - GNU make utility to maintain groups of programs
+make [OPTION]... [TARGET]...
+The  make utility will determine automatically which pieces of a large program need to be recompiled, and
+issue the commands to recompile them.  The manual describes the GNU implementation  of  make,  which  was
+written  by Richard Stallman and Roland McGrath, and is currently maintained by Paul Smith.  Our examples
+show C programs, since they are very common, but you can use make with  any  programming  language  whose
+compiler  can  be run with a shell command.  In fact, make is not limited to programs.  You can use it to
+describe any task where some files must be updated automatically from others whenever the others change.
+To prepare to use make, you must write a file called the makefile that describes the relationships  among
+files  in  your program, and the states the commands for updating each file.  In a program, typically the
+executable file is updated from object files, which are in turn made by compiling source files.
+%
+mknod - make block or character special files
+Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
+-m, --mode=MODE
+set file permission bits to MODE, not a=rw - umask
+-Z     set the SELinux security context to default type
+--context[=CTX]
+like -Z, or if CTX is specified then set the SELinux or SMACK security context to CTX
+%
+lsmod - Show the status of modules in the Linux Kernel
+lsmod
+lsmod is a trivial program which nicely formats the contents of the /proc/modules, showing what kernel
+modules are currently loaded.
+others.
+%
+fsfreeze --freeze|--unfreeze mountpoint
+fsfreeze suspends or resumes access to a filesystem.
+fsfreeze halts any new access to the filesystem and creates a stable image on disk.  fsfreeze is intended
+to be used with hardware RAID devices that support the creation of snapshots.
+fsfreeze is unnecessary for device-mapper devices.  The device-mapper (and LVM) automatically  freezes  a
+page.
+The mountpoint argument is the pathname of the directory where the filesystem is mounted.  The filesystem
+%
+klist - list cached Kerberos tickets
+klist [-e] [[-c] [-l] [-A] [-f] [-s] [-a [-n]]] [-C] [-k [-t] [-K]] [-V] [cache_name|keytab_name]
+klist  lists the Kerberos principal and Kerberos tickets held in a credentials cache, or the keys held in
+a keytab file.
+-e     Displays the encryption types of the session key and the ticket for each credential in the creden‐
+tial cache, or each key in the keytab file.
+-l     If a cache collection is available, displays a table summarizing the caches present in the collec‐
+tion.
+-A     If a cache collection is available, displays the contents of all of the caches in the collection.
+%
+pdfmom - Produce PDF documents using the mom macro set
+pdfmom [-Tps [pdfroff options]] [groff options] files ...
+pdfmom [-Tpdf] [groff options] files ...
+pdfmom  is  a  wrapper around groff that facilitates the production of PDF documents from files formatted
+with the mom macros.
+pdfmom prints to stdout, so output must be redirected to a destination file.  The size of the  final  PDF
+If  called  with the -Tpdf option (which is the default), pdfmom processes files using groff's native PDF
+driver, gropdf.  If -Tps is given, processing is passed over to pdfroff, which  uses  groff's  PostScript
+%
+uname - print system information
+uname [OPTION]...
+Print certain system information.  With no OPTION, same as -s.
+-a, --all
+print all information, in the following order, except omit -p and -i if unknown:
+-s, --kernel-name
+print the kernel name
+-n, --nodename
+print the network node hostname
+%
+printenv - print all or part of environment
+printenv [OPTION]... [VARIABLE]...
+Print  the  values of the specified environment VARIABLE(s).  If no VARIABLE is specified, print name and
+value pairs for them all.
+-0, --null
+end each output line with NUL, not newline
+--help display this help and exit
+--version
+output version information and exit
+%
+ipcmk - make various IPC resources
+ipcmk [options]
+ipcmk allows you to create shared memory segments, message queues, and semaphore arrays.
+Resources can be specified with these options:
+-M, --shmem size
+for GB, etc.
+%
+mkdir - make directories
+mkdir [OPTION]... DIRECTORY...
+Create the DIRECTORY(ies), if they do not already exist.
+Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
+-m, --mode=MODE
+set file mode (as in chmod), not a=rwx - umask
+-p, --parents
+no error if existing, make parent directories as needed
+-v, --verbose
+%
+mkfifo - make FIFOs (named pipes)
+Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
+-m, --mode=MODE
+set file permission bits to MODE, not a=rw - umask
+-Z     set the SELinux security context to default type
+--context[=CTX]
+like -Z, or if CTX is specified then set the SELinux or SMACK security context to CTX
+%
+genrandom - generate a file containing random data
+genrandom [-n number] {size} {filename}
+genrandom generates a file or a set of files containing a specified quantity of pseudo-random data, which
+can be used as a source of entropy for other commands on systems with no random device.
+-n number
+size
+The size of the file, in kilobytes, to generate.
+filename
+%
+mount - mount a filesystem
+mount [-l|-h|-V]
+mount -a [-fFnrsvw] [-t fstype] [-O optlist]
+mount [-fnrsvw] [-o options] device|dir
+mount [-fnrsvw] [-t fstype] [-o options] device dir
+All  files  accessible  in  a  Unix system are arranged in one big tree, the file hierarchy, rooted at /.
+These files can be spread out over several devices.  The mount command serves to  attach  the  filesystem
+The standard form of the mount command is:
+%
+gpg-agent - Secret key management for GnuPG
+gpg-agent [--homedir dir] [--options file] [options]
+gpg-agent [--homedir dir] [--options file] [options] --server
+gpg-agent [--homedir dir] [--options file] [options] --daemon [command_line]
+gpg-agent  is  a daemon to manage secret (private) keys independently from any protocol.  It is used as a
+backend for gpg and gpgsm as well as for a couple of other utilities.
+The agent is automatically started on demand by gpg, gpgsm, gpgconf, or gpg-connect-agent.  Thus there is
+the agent using:
+gpg-connect-agent /bye
+%
+xfs_admin - change parameters of an XFS filesystem
+xfs_admin -V
+Devices that are mounted cannot be modified.  Administrators must unmount filesystems before xfs_admin or
+-e     Enables  unwritten  extent  support  on  a filesystem that does not already have this enabled (for
+legacy filesystems, it can't be disabled anymore at mkfs time).
+%
+uncompress — expand compressed data
+uncompress [−cfv] [file...]
+The  uncompress utility shall restore files to their original state after they have been compressed using
+the compress utility. If no files are specified, the standard input shall be uncompressed to the standard
+output.  If the invoking process has appropriate privileges, the ownership, modes, access time, and modi‐
+fication time of the original file shall be preserved.
+%
+gdbus - Tool for working with D-Bus objects
+gdbus introspect [--system | --session | --address address] --dest bus_name --object-path /path/to/object
+[--xml] [--recurse] [--only-properties]
+gdbus monitor [--system | --session | --address address] --dest bus_name [--object-path /path/to/object]
+gdbus call [--system | --session | --address address] --dest bus_name --object-path /path/to/object
+gdbus emit [--system | --session | --address address] --object-path /path/to/object
+gdbus help
+%
+systemd-tmpfiles, systemd-tmpfiles-setup.service, systemd-tmpfiles-setup-dev.service, systemd-tmpfiles-
+clean.service, systemd-tmpfiles-clean.timer - Creates, deletes and cleans up volatile and temporary files
+and directories
+systemd-tmpfiles-setup.service
+systemd-tmpfiles-setup-dev.service
+systemd-tmpfiles-clean.service
+systemd-tmpfiles-clean.timer
+systemd-tmpfiles creates, deletes, and cleans up volatile and temporary files and directories, based on
+%
+features an extremely fast decoder, with speed in multiple GB/s per core, typically  reaching  RAM  speed
+%
+telinit - Change SysV runlevel
+the runlevel requests will be transparently translated into systemd unit activation requests.
+The following options are understood:
+--help
+Print a short help text and exit.
+--no-wall
+Do not send wall message before reboot/halt/power-off.
+%
+bootctl - Control the firmware and boot manager settings
+bootctl checks, updates, installs or removes the boot loader from the current system.
+bootctl status checks and prints the currently installed versions of the boot loader binaries and all
+current EFI boot variables.
+%
+devlink - Devlink tool
+OBJECT := { dev | port | monitor }
+-V, -Version
+Print the version of the devlink utility and exit.
+-n, -no-nice-names
+Turn off printing out nice names, for example netdevice ifnames instead of devlink port identifi‐
+cation.
+%
+mountpoint - see if a directory or file is a mountpoint
+mountpoint [-d|-q] directory | file
+mountpoint -x device
+mountpoint checks whether the given directory or file is mentioned in the /proc/self/mountinfo file.
+-d, --fs-devno
+Show the major/minor numbers of the device that is mounted on the given directory.
+-q, --quiet
+Be quiet - don't print anything.
+%
+migratepages - Migrate the physical location a processes pages
+migratepages pid from-nodes to-nodes
+migratepages  moves the physical location of a processes pages without any changes of the virtual address
+space of the process. Moving the pages allows one to change the distances of a  process  to  its  memory.
+If  multiple nodes are specified for from-nodes or to-nodes then an attempt is made to preserve the rela‐
+tive location of each page in each nodeset.
+Valid node specifiers
+%
+ssh-keygen — authentication key generation, management and conversion
+[-f output_keyfile]
+ssh-keygen -p [-P old_passphrase] [-N new_passphrase] [-f keyfile]
+ssh-keygen -i [-m key_format] [-f input_keyfile]
+ssh-keygen -e [-m key_format] [-f input_keyfile]
+ssh-keygen -y [-f input_keyfile]
+ssh-keygen -c [-P passphrase] [-C comment] [-f keyfile]
+ssh-keygen -l [-v] [-E fingerprint_hash] [-f input_keyfile]
+ssh-keygen -B [-f input_keyfile]
+ssh-keygen -F hostname [-f known_hosts_file] [-l]
+ssh-keygen -H [-f known_hosts_file]
+ssh-keygen -R hostname [-f known_hosts_file]
+ssh-keygen -r hostname [-f input_keyfile] [-g]
+%
+accessdb - dumps the content of a man-db database in a human readable format
+/usr/sbin/accessdb [-d?V] [<index-file>]
+accessdb  will  output the data contained within a man-db database in a human readable form.  By default,
+it will dump the data from /var/cache/man/index.<db-type>, where <db-type> is dependent on  the  database
+library in use.
+Supplying an argument to accessdb will override this default.
+-d, --debug
+Print debugging information.
+-?, --help
+%
+sdiff - side-by-side merge of file differences
+Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
+-o, --output=FILE
+operate interactively, sending output to FILE
+-E, --ignore-tab-expansion
+%
+gzip, gunzip, zcat - compress or expand files
+gunzip [ -acfhklLnNrtvV ] [-S suffix] [ name ...  ]
+zcat [ -fhLV ] [ name ...  ]
+Gzip reduces the size of the named files using Lempel-Ziv coding (LZ77).  Whenever possible, each file is
+replaced by one with the extension .gz, while keeping the same ownership modes, access  and  modification
+files are specified, or if a file name is "-", the standard input is compressed to the  standard  output.
+Gzip will only attempt to compress regular files.  In particular, it will ignore symbolic links.
+If  the  compressed file name is too long for its file system, gzip truncates it.  Gzip attempts to trun‐
+name  consists  of small parts only, the longest parts are truncated. For example, if file names are lim‐
+%
+dirmngr-client - Tool to access the Dirmngr services
+dirmngr-client [options] [certfile|pattern]
+The  dirmngr-client is a simple tool to contact a running dirmngr and test whether a certificate has been
+revoked --- either by being listed in the corresponding CRL or by running the OCSP protocol.  If no dirm‐
+ngr  is  running,  a new instances will be started but this is in general not a good idea due to the huge
+performance overhead.
+The usual way to run this tool is either:
+dirmngr-client acert
+or
+%
+whereis - locate the binary, source, and manual page files for a command
+whereis [options] [-BMS directory... -f] name...
+whereis  locates the binary, source and manual files for the specified command names.  The supplied names
+are first stripped of leading pathname components and any (single) trailing extension of  the  form  .ext
+(for example: .c) Prefixes of s.  resulting from use of source code control are also dealt with.  whereis
+then attempts to locate the desired program in the standard Linux places, and in the places specified  by
+$PATH and $MANPATH.
+The  search restrictions (options -b, -m and -s) are cumulative and apply to the subsequent name patterns
+on the command line.  Any new search restriction resets the search mask.  For example,
+whereis -bm ls tr -m gcc
+%
+geoiplookup - look up country using IP Address or hostname
+geoiplookup [-d directory] [-f filename] [-v] <ipaddress|hostname>
+geoiplookup uses the GeoIP library and database to find the Country that an IP address or hostname origi‐
+nates from.
+For example
+NL, Netherlands
+%
+blocks-per-group ] [ -G number-of-groups ] [ -i bytes-per-inode ] [ -I inode-size ] [ -j ] [ -J  journal-
+options ] [ -N number-of-inodes ] [ -n ] [ -m reserved-blocks-percentage ] [ -o creator-os ] [ -O [^]fea‐
+ture[,...]  ] [ -q ] [ -r fs-revision-level ] [ -E extended-options ] [ -v ] [ -F ] [ -L volume-label ] [
+-M last-mounted-directory ] [ -S ] [ -t fs-type ] [ -T usage-type ] [ -U UUID ] [ -V ] [ -e errors-behav‐
+ior ] [ -z undo_file ] device [ fs-size ]
+size ]
+by device.
+%
+ldns-version - print out the version of the ldns-library and tools on this system
+ldns-version
+ldns-version is used to print out version information of the ldns library and tools
+ldns-version has no options.
+Written by the ldns team as an example for ldns usage.
+REPORTING BUGS
+Report bugs to <ldns-team@nlnetlabs.nl>.
+%
+Transform syslinux config into GRUB one.
+-c, --cwd=DIR
+current directory of syslinux [default is parent directory of input file].
+-i, --isolinux
+assume input is an isolinux configuration file.
+-o, --output=FILE
+write output to FILE [default=stdout].
+%
+pwconv, pwunconv, grpconv, grpunconv - convert to and from shadow passwords and groups
+pwconv [options]
+pwunconv [options]
+grpconv [options]
+grpunconv [options]
+The pwconv command creates shadow from passwd and an optionally existing shadow.
+The pwunconv command creates passwd from passwd and shadow and then removes shadow.
+The grpconv command creates gshadow from group and an optionally existing gshadow.
+%
+features an extremely fast decoder, with speed in multiple GB/s per core, typically  reaching  RAM  speed
+%
+isosize - output the length of an iso9660 filesystem
+isosize [options] iso9660_image_file
+-x, --sectors
+Show the block count and block size in human-readable form.  The output uses  the  term  "sectors"
+for "blocks".
+-d, --divisor number
+%
+toe - table of (terminfo) entries
+toe [-v[n]] [-ahsuUV] file...
+With  no  options,  toe lists all available terminal types by primary name with descriptions.  File argu‐
+ments specify the directories to be scanned; if no such arguments are given, your default terminfo direc‐
+tory  is scanned.  If you also specify the -h option, a directory header will be issued as each directory
+is entered.
+There are other options intended for use by terminfo file maintainers:
+-a     report on all of the terminal databases which ncurses would search, rather than only the first one
+that it finds.
+%
+gcc - GNU project C and C++ compiler
+gcc [-c|-S|-E] [-std=standard]
+[-g] [-pg] [-Olevel]
+[-Wwarn...] [-Wpedantic]
+[-Idir...] [-Ldir...]
+[-Dmacro[=defn]...] [-Umacro]
+[-foption...] [-mmachine-option...]
+[-o outfile] [@file] infile...
+Only the most useful options are listed here; see below for the remainder.  g++ accepts mostly the same
+options as gcc.
+When you invoke GCC, it normally does preprocessing, compilation, assembly and linking.  The "overall
+options" allow you to stop this process at an intermediate stage.  For example, the -c option says not to
+%
+debugfs  [  -DVwcin  ]  [  -b  blocksize  ]  [  -s  superblock  ]  [  -f  cmd_file  ] [ -R request ] [ -d
+data_source_device ] [ -z undo_file ] [ device ]
+The debugfs program is an interactive file system debugger. It can be used  to  examine  and  change  the
+device is a block device (e.g., /dev/sdXX) or a file containing the file system.
+-w     Specifies that the file system should be opened in read-write mode.  Without this option, the file
+system is opened in read-only mode.
+%
+badblocks - search a device for bad blocks
+badblocks  [  -svwnfBX  ]  [  -b  block_size  ]  [  -c  blocks_at_once  ]  [  -d read_delay_factor ] [ -e
+max_bad_blocks ] [ -i input_file ] [ -o output_file ] [ -p num_passes ] [  -t  test_pattern  ]  device  [
+last_block ] [ first_block ]
+badblocks is used to search for bad blocks on a device (usually a disk partition).  device is the special
+not  specified,  the last block on the device is used as a default.  first_block is an optional parameter
+specifying the starting block number for the test, which allows the testing to start in the middle of the
+disk.  If it is not specified the first block on the disk is used as a default.
+important that the block size is properly specified, since the block numbers which are generated are very
+dependent  on  the block size in use by the filesystem.  For this reason, it is strongly recommended that
+%
+userdel - delete a user account and related files
+userdel [options] LOGIN
+The userdel command modifies the system account files, deleting all entries that refer to the user name
+LOGIN. The named user must exist.
+The options which apply to the userdel command are:
+-f, --force
+forces userdel to remove the user's home directory and mail spool, even if another user uses the same
+home directory or if the mail spool is not owned by the specified user. If USERGROUPS_ENAB is defined
+to yes in /etc/login.defs and if a group exists with the same name as the deleted user, then this
+%
+symcryptrun - Call a simple symmetric encryption tool
+symcryptrun --class class --program program --keyfile keyfile [--decrypt|--encrypt] [inputfile]
+Sometimes simple encryption tools are already in use for a long time and there might be a desire to inte‐
+grate them into the GnuPG framework.  The protocols and encryption methods might be non-standard  or  not
+even  properly  documented,  so  that  a  full-fledged  encryption tool with an interface like gpg is not
+doable.  symcryptrun provides a solution: It operates by calling the external encryption/decryption  mod‐
+ule and provides a passphrase for a key using the standard pinentry based mechanism through gpg-agent.
+build time.
+For encryption, the plain text must be provided on STDIN or as the argument inputfile, and the ciphertext
+will be output to STDOUT.  For decryption vice versa.
+%
+ownership - Compaq ownership tag retriever
+ownership  retrieves  and prints the "ownership tag" that can be set on Compaq computers. Contrary to all
+other programs of the dmidecode package, ownership doesn't print any version information, nor labels, but
+-d, --dev-mem FILE
+Read memory from device FILE (default: /dev/mem)
+-h, --help
+Display usage information and exit
+%
+sln - create symbolic links
+sln source dest
+sln filelist
+that if for some reason the dynamic linker is not working, sln can be used  to  make  symbolic  links  to
+dynamic libraries.
+The command line has two forms.  In the first form, it creates dest as a new symbolic link to source.
+In the second form, filelist is a list of space-separated pathname pairs, and the effect is as if sln was
+executed once for each line of the file, with the two pathnames as the arguments.
+The sln program supports no command-line options.
+%
+gdbus-codegen - D-Bus code and documentation generator
+gdbus-codegen [-h, --help] [--interface-prefix org.project.Prefix] [--generate-c-code OUTFILES]
+[--c-namespace YourProject] [--c-generate-object-manager]
+[--c-generate-autocleanup none|objects|all] [--generate-docbook OUTFILES]
+[--xml-files FILE] [--annotate ELEMENT KEY VALUE]...  FILE [FILE...]
+gdbus-codegen is used to generate code and/or documentation for one or more D-Bus interfaces. The tool
+C code (via --generate-c-code) and Docbook XML (via --generate-docbook).
+GENERATING C CODE
+When generating C code, a #GInterface -derived type is generated for each D-Bus interface. Additionally,
+for every generated type, FooBar, two concrete instantiable types, FooBarProxy and FooBarSkeleton,
+implementing said interface are also generated. The former is derived from #GDBusProxy and intended for
+%
+talkd - Talk server
+talkd [OPTION...]
+Talk daemon, using service `ntalk'.
+-a, --acl=FILE
+read site-wide ACLs from FILE
+-d, --debug
+enable debugging
+-i, --idle-timeout=SECONDS set idle timeout value to SECONDS
+-l, --logging
+%
+dbus-run-session - start a process as a new D-Bus session
+dbus-run-session --help
+dbus-run-session --version
+dbus-run-session is used to start a session bus instance of dbus-daemon from a shell script, and start a
+specified program in that session. The dbus-daemon will run for as long as the program does, after which
+it will terminate.
+One use is to run a shell with its own dbus-daemon in a text‐mode or SSH session, and have the
+dbus-daemon terminate automatically on leaving the sub‐shell, like this:
+%
+ldns-read-zone - read a zonefile and print it
+ldns-read-zone ZONEFILE
+pretty-printing makeup.
+-c     Canonicalize all resource records in the zone before printing
+-b     Include Bubble Babble encoding of DS's.
+%
+tracepath, tracepath6 - traces path to a network host discovering MTU along this path
+tracepath [-n] [-b] [-l pktlen] [-m max_hops] [-p port] {destination}
+It  traces  path  to  destination  discovering MTU along this path.  It uses UDP port port or some random
+port.  It is similar to traceroute, only does not require superuser privileges and has no fancy options.
+tracepath6 is good replacement for traceroute6 and classic example of application of Linux error  queues.
+error messages.  Probably, it will change, when they will be updated.  For now  it  uses  Van  Jacobson's
+trick, sweeping a range of UDP ports to maintain trace history.
+-n     Print primarily IP addresses numerically.
+%
+msgfilter - edit translations of message catalog
+msgfilter [OPTION] FILTER [FILTER-OPTION]
+Applies a filter to all translations of a translation catalog.
+Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
+Input file location:
+-i, --input=INPUTFILE
+input PO file
+-D, --directory=DIRECTORY
+add DIRECTORY to list for input files search
+%
+arpaname - translate IP addresses to the corresponding ARPA names
+arpaname {ipaddress ...}
+BIND 9 Administrator Reference Manual.
+Internet Systems Consortium, Inc.
+%
+ntp-keygen - Create a NTP host key
+ntp-keygen [-flags] [-flag [value]] [--option-name[[=| ]value]]
+All arguments must be options.
+software library has been installed, it generates keys, certificate and identity files used in public key
+cryptography.  These files are used for cookie encryption, digital signature and challenge/response iden‐
+tification algorithms compatible with the Internet standard security infrastructure.
+All  files are in PEM-encoded printable ASCII format, so they can be embedded as MIME attachments in mail
+to other sites and certificate authorities.  By default, files are not encrypted.
+%
+dnsdomainname - show DNS domain name
+dnsdomainname [OPTION...]
+Show domain part of the system's fully qualified host name.
+The tool uses gethostname to get the host name of the system and getaddrinfo to resolve it into a canoni‐
+cal name.  The part after the first period ('.') of the canonical name is shown.
+-?, --help
+give this help list
+--usage
+give a short usage message
+%
+ntpd - NTP daemon program
+The  ntpd  utility  is an operating system daemon which sets and maintains the system time of day in syn‐
+chronism with Internet standard time servers.  It is a complete implementation of the Network Time Proto‐
+onds.  While the ultimate precision is not achievable with ordinary workstations and networks  of  today,
+%
+indxbib - make inverted index for bibliographic databases
+indxbib [ -vw ] [ -cfile ] [ -ddir ] [ -ffile ] [ -hn ] [ -istring ] [ -kn ] [ -ln ] [ -nn ] [ -ofile ]
+[ -tn ] [ filename... ]
+which is then renamed to this.  If no filenames are given on the command line because the -f  option  has
+been used, and no -o option is given, the index will be named Ind.i.
+Bibliographic  databases  are  divided  into records by blank lines.  Within a record, each fields starts
+with a % character at the beginning of a line.  Fields have a one letter name which follows the % charac‐
+ter.
+The values set by the -c, -n, -l and -t options are stored in the index; when the index is searched, keys
+%
+gencat — generate a formatted message catalog
+gencat catfile msgfile...
+The gencat utility shall merge the message text source file msgfile into a formatted message catalog cat‐
+file.  The file catfile shall be created if it does not already exist. If catfile does  exist,  its  mes‐
+sages  shall  be  included  in the new catfile.  If set and message numbers collide, the new message text
+defined in msgfile shall replace the old message text currently contained in catfile.
+%
+grub-mkrescue - make a GRUB rescue image
+grub-mkrescue [OPTION...] [OPTION] SOURCE...
+Make GRUB CD-ROM, disk, pendrive and floppy bootable image.
+--compress=no|xz|gz|lzo
+compress GRUB files [optional]
+-d, --directory=DIR
+use images and modules under DIR [default=/usr/lib/grub/<platform>]
+--fonts=FONTS
+install FONTS [default=unicode]
+%
+xfs_fsr - filesystem reorganizer for XFS
+xfs_fsr [-vdg] [-t seconds] [-p passes] [-f leftoff] [-m mtab]
+xfs_fsr [-vdg] [xfsdev | file] ...
+xfs_fsr -V
+xfs_fsr is applicable only to XFS filesystems.
+xfs_fsr  improves  the organization of mounted filesystems.  The reorganization algorithm operates on one
+file at a time, compacting or otherwise improving the layout of the file extents  (contiguous  blocks  of
+file data).
+The  following  options  are  accepted  by  xfs_fsr.   The  -m, -t, and -f options have no meaning if any
+filesystems or files are specified on the command line.
+%
+touch - change file timestamps
+touch [OPTION]... FILE...
+Update the access and modification times of each FILE to the current time.
+A FILE argument that does not exist is created empty, unless -c or -h is supplied.
+A FILE argument string of - is handled specially and causes touch to change the times of the file associ‐
+ated with standard output.
+Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
+-a     change only the access time
+%
+chacl - change the access control list of a file or directory
+chacl acl pathname...
+chacl -b acl dacl pathname...
+chacl -d dacl pathname...
+chacl -R pathname...
+chacl -D pathname...
+chacl -B pathname...
+chacl -l pathname...
+chacl -r pathname...
+chacl  is  an IRIX-compatibility command, and is maintained for those users who are familiar with its use
+%
+secret-tool - Store and retrieve passwords
+secret-tool store --label='Label' {attribute} {value} ...
+secret-tool lookup {attribute} {value} ...
+secret-tool clear {attribute} {value} ...
+secret-tool search [--all]{attribute} {value} ...
+secret-tool is a command line tool that can be used to store and retrieve passwords.
+Each password is stored in an item. Items are uniquely identified by a set of attribute keys and values.
+When storing a password you must specify unique pairs of attributes names and values, and when looking up
+a password you provide the same attribute name and value pairs.
+%
+cations to provide batch processing features.
+database file.  If the database file does not exist, it will be  created.   If  the  database  file  does
+exist, it will be opened.
+For  example,  to create a new database file named "mydata.db", create a table named "memos" and insert a
+couple of records into that table:
+%
+setarch - change reported architecture in new program environment and set personality flags
+setarch arch [options] [program [argument...]]
+arch [options] [program [argument...]]
+setarch --list|-h|-V
+various personality options.  The default program is /bin/sh.
+--list List  the  architectures that setarch knows about.  Whether setarch can actually set each of these
+architectures depends on the running kernel.
+%
+glib-gettextize - gettext internationalization utility
+glib-gettextize [OPTION...] [DIRECTORY]
+glib-gettextize helps to prepare a source package for being internationalized through gettext. It is a
+variant of the gettextize that ships with gettext.
+glib-gettextize differs from gettextize in that it doesn't create an intl/ subdirectory and doesn't
+modify po/ChangeLog (note that newer versions of gettextize behave like this when called with the
+--no-changelog option).
+--help
+print help and exit
+%
+ldns-compare-zones - read and compare two zonefiles and print differences
+ldns-compare-zones reads two DNS zone files and prints number of differences.
+Output is formated to:
++NUM_INS        -NUM_DEL        ~NUM_CHG
+are considered inserted, and counted as NUM_INS. If an owner name is present in both, but there is a dif‐
+ference in the amount or content of the records, these are considered changed, and counted as NUM_CHG.
+%
+With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.
+-b, --binary
+read in binary mode
+-c, --check
+--tag  create a BSD-style checksum
+%
+fsck.cramfs - fsck compressed ROM file system
+fsck.cramfs [options] file
+fsck.cramfs is used to check the cramfs file system.
+-v, --verbose
+Enable verbose messaging.
+-b, --blocksize blocksize
+Use  this  blocksize,  defaults to page size. Must be equal to what was set at creation time. Only
+used for --extract.
+--extract[=directory]
+%
+xmlcatalog - Command line tool to parse and manipulate XML or SGML catalog files.
+--noout | --no-super-update | [-v | --verbose]] {CATALOGFILE} {ENTITIES...}
+xmlcatalog is a command line application allowing users to monitor and manipulate XML and SGML catalogs.
+Its functions can be invoked from a single command from the command line, or it can perform multiple
+functions in interactive mode. It can operate on both XML and SGML files.
+xmlcatalog accepts the following options (in alphabetical order):
+--add TYPE ORIG REPLACE
+%
+xz, unxz, xzcat, lzma, unlzma, lzcat - Compress or decompress .xz and .lzma files
+xz [option...]  [file...]
+unxz is equivalent to xz --decompress.
+xzcat is equivalent to xz --decompress --stdout.
+lzma is equivalent to xz --format=lzma.
+unlzma is equivalent to xz --format=lzma --decompress.
+lzcat is equivalent to xz --format=lzma --decompress --stdout.
+When  writing  scripts  that  need  to decompress files, it is recommended to always use the name xz with
+appropriate arguments (xz -d or xz -dc) instead of the names unxz and xzcat.
+%
+irqbalance - distribute hardware interrupts across processors on a multiprocessor system
+irqbalance
+The purpose of irqbalance is to distribute hardware interrupts across processors on a multiprocessor sys‐
+tem in order to increase performance.
+-o, --oneshot
+Causes irqbalance to be run once, after which the daemon exits.
+-d, --debug
+Causes irqbalance to print extra debug information.  Implies --foreground.
+-f, --foreground
+%
+xfs_ncheck - generate pathnames from i-numbers for XFS
+xfs_ncheck [ -i ino ] ... [ -f ] [ -s ] [ -l logdev ] device
+xfs_ncheck -V
+xfs_ncheck  with  no  -i  arguments generates an inode number and pathname list of all files on the given
+order.   The  filesystem  to be examined is specified by the device argument, which should be the disk or
+volume device for the filesystem.  Filesystems stored in files can also be checked, using the -f flag.
+-f       Specifies that the filesystem image to be processed is stored in a regular file at  device  (see
+into an ordinary file.
+%
+bzcat - decompresses files to stdout
+bzcat [ -s ] [ filenames ...  ]
+coding.   Compression  is  generally  considerably  better  than  that  achieved  by  more   conventional
+The command-line options are deliberately very similar to those of GNU gzip, but they are not identical.
+%
+btrfs-rescue - Recover a damaged btrfs filesystem
+btrfs rescue <subcommand> <args>
+btrfs rescue is used to try to recover a damaged btrfs filesystem.
+chunk-recover [options] <device>
+Recover the chunk tree by scanning the devices
+Options
+-y
+assume an answer of yes to all questions.
+%
+tracepath, tracepath6 - traces path to a network host discovering MTU along this path
+tracepath [-n] [-b] [-l pktlen] [-m max_hops] [-p port] {destination}
+It  traces  path  to  destination  discovering MTU along this path.  It uses UDP port port or some random
+port.  It is similar to traceroute, only does not require superuser privileges and has no fancy options.
+tracepath6 is good replacement for traceroute6 and classic example of application of Linux error  queues.
+error messages.  Probably, it will change, when they will be updated.  For now  it  uses  Van  Jacobson's
+trick, sweeping a range of UDP ports to maintain trace history.
+-n     Print primarily IP addresses numerically.
+%
+coredumpctl - Retrieve and process saved core dumps and metadata
+coredumpctl is a tool that can be used to retrieve and process core dumps and metadata which were saved
+The following options are understood:
+-h, --help
+Print a short help text and exit.
+--version
+Print a short version string and exit.
+%
+-D user_dn
+tion on the LDAP server.
+-w passwd
+-H ldapuri
+%
+xfs_growfs, xfs_info - expand an XFS filesystem
+xfs_growfs  [  -dilnrx  ]  [ -D size ] [ -e rtextsize ] [ -L size ] [ -m maxpct ] [ -t mtab ] [ -R size ]
+mount-point
+xfs_growfs -V
+xfs_info [ -t mtab ] mount-point
+xfs_info -V
+The existing contents of the filesystem are undisturbed, and the added space becomes available for  addi‐
+tional file storage.
+%
+tr - translate or delete characters
+Translate, squeeze, and/or delete characters from standard input, writing to standard output.
+-c, -C, --complement
+-d, --delete
+-s, --squeeze-repeats
+replace  each  sequence  of  a repeated character that is listed in the last specified SET, with a
+single occurrence of that character
+%
+rarp - manipulate the system RARP table
+rarp [-V] [--version] [-h] [--help]
+rarp -a
+rarp [-v] -d hostname ...
+rarp [-v] [-t type] -s hostname hw_addr
+replacement RARP daemon, see ftp://ftp.dementia.org/pub/net-tools
+Rarp manipulates the kernel's RARP table in various ways.  The primary options are  clearing  an  address
+mapping  entry  and manually setting up one.  For debugging purposes, the rarp program also allows a com‐
+plete dump of the RARP table.
+%
+kadmin  [-O|-N]  [-r realm] [-p principal] [-q query] [[-c cache_name]|[-k [-t keytab]]|-n] [-w password]
+[-s admin_server[:port]]
+kadmin.local [-r realm] [-p principal] [-q query] [-d dbname] [-e enc:salt ...]  [-m] [-x db_args]
+vide  nearly  identical  functionalities;  the  difference is that kadmin.local directly accesses the KDC
+man  page  will  use "kadmin" to refer to both versions.  kadmin provides for the maintenance of Kerberos
+principals, password policies, and service key tables (keytabs).
+The remote kadmin client uses Kerberos to authenticate  to  kadmind  using  the  service  principal  kad‐
+min/ADMINHOST  (where ADMINHOST is the fully-qualified hostname of the admin server) or kadmin/admin.  If
+%
+machinectl - Control the systemd machine manager
+considered running instances of:
+·   Virtual Machines (VMs) that virtualize hardware to run full operating system (OS) instances
+(including their kernels) in a virtualized environment on top of the host OS.
+·   Containers that share the hardware and OS kernel with the host OS, in order to run OS userspace
+instances on top the host OS.
+%
+With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.
+-b, --binary
+read in binary mode
+-c, --check
+--tag  create a BSD-style checksum
+%
+less - opposite of more
+less -?
+less --help
+less -V
+less --version
+less [-[+]aABcCdeEfFgGiIJKLmMnNqQrRsSuUVwWX~]
+[-b space] [-h lines] [-j line] [-k keyfile]
+[-{oO} logfile] [-p pattern] [-P prompt] [-t tag]
+[-T tagsfile] [-x tab,...] [-y lines] [-[z] lines]
+[-# shift] [+[+]cmd] [--] [filename]...
+movement.  Also, less does not have to read the entire input file before starting, so  with  large  input
+%
+nproc - print the number of processing units available
+nproc [OPTION]...
+of online processors
+--all  print the number of installed processors
+--ignore=N
+if possible, exclude N processing units
+--help display this help and exit
+--version
+%
+unicode_start - put keyboard and console in unicode mode
+unicode_start [font [umap]]
+put accordingly.
+The parameter font is a font that is loaded. It should have a built-in Unicode map,  or,  if  it  hasn't,
+such  a map can be given explicitly as second parameter.  When no font was specified, the current font is
+%
+With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.
+-b, --binary
+read in binary mode
+-c, --check
+--tag  create a BSD-style checksum
+%
+ldns-rrsig - print out the inception and expiration dates in human readable form
+ldns-rrsig domain [ type ]
+ldns-rrsig  is used to print the expiration and inception date of a RRSIG. The first argument is a domain
+name. ldns-rrsig will query the authoritative servers for that domain to get a list of RRSIGs.   It  will
+then print out the inception and experiration dates for the RRSIG covering the SOA record.
+If the second argument type is given the RRSIG covering that type will be shown.
+Written by the ldns team as an example for ldns usage.
+REPORTING BUGS
+Report bugs to <ldns-team@nlnetlabs.nl>.
+%
+blkdiscard - discard sectors on a device
+blkdiscard [options] [-o offset] [-l length] device
+ior based on range or size, as explained below.
+The device argument is the pathname of the block device.
+WARNING: All data in the discarded region on the device will be lost!
+%
+lvdisplay — display attributes of a logical volume
+lockingfailure]   [--ignoreskippedcluster]   [--maps]   [--nosuffix]    [-P|--partial]    [--reportformat
+{basic|json}]  [-S|--select  Selection]  [--units  hHbBsSkKmMgGtTpPeE]  [-v|--verbose]  [--version] [Vol‐
+tion] ...]  [-d|--debug]  [-h|-?|--help]  [--ignorelockingfailure]  [--ignoreskippedcluster]  [--logonly]
+[--noheadings]  [--nosuffix] [-P|--partial] [--reportformat {basic|json}] [--segments] [--separator Sepa‐
+lvdisplay  allows  you  to  see the attributes of a logical volume like size, read/write status, snapshot
+%
+xmllint - command line XML tool
+xmllint [--version | --debug | --shell | --xpath "XPath_expression" | --debugent | --copy | --recover |
+--noent | --noout | --nonet | --path "PATH(S)" | --load-trace | --htmlout | --nowrap | --valid |
+--postvalid | --dtdvalid URL | --dtdvalidfpi FPI | --timing | --output FILE | --repeat | --insert
+| --compress | --html | --xmlout | --push | --memory | --maxmem NBBYTES | --nowarning |
+--noblanks | --nocdata | --format | --encode ENCODING | --dropdtd | --nsclean | --testIO |
+--catalogs | --nocatalogs | --auto | --xinclude | --noxincludenode | --loaddtd | --dtdattr |
+--stream | --walker | --pattern PATTERNVALUE | --chkregister | --relaxng SCHEMA | --schema SCHEMA
+xmllint --help
+The xmllint program parses one or more XML files, specified on the command line as XML-FILE (or the
+standard input if the filename provided is - ). It prints various types of output, depending upon the
+%
+gcc - GNU project C and C++ compiler
+gcc [-c|-S|-E] [-std=standard]
+[-g] [-pg] [-Olevel]
+[-Wwarn...] [-Wpedantic]
+[-Idir...] [-Ldir...]
+[-Dmacro[=defn]...] [-Umacro]
+[-foption...] [-mmachine-option...]
+[-o outfile] [@file] infile...
+Only the most useful options are listed here; see below for the remainder.  g++ accepts mostly the same
+options as gcc.
+When you invoke GCC, it normally does preprocessing, compilation, assembly and linking.  The "overall
+options" allow you to stop this process at an intermediate stage.  For example, the -c option says not to
+%
+gcov - coverage testing tool
+gcov [-v|--version] [-h|--help]
+[-a|--all-blocks]
+[-b|--branch-probabilities]
+[-c|--branch-counts]
+[-d|--display-progress]
+[-f|--function-summaries]
+[-i|--intermediate-format]
+[-l|--long-file-names]
+[-m|--demangled-names]
+[-n|--no-output]
+[-o|--object-directory directory|file]
+[-p|--preserve-paths]
+[-r|--relative-only]
+[-s|--source-prefix directory]
+%
+libtoolize [OPTION]...
+Prepare a package to use libtool.
+-c, --copy
+copy files rather than symlinking them
+--debug
+enable verbose shell tracing
+-n, --dry-run
+print commands rather than running them
+%
+cpp - The C Preprocessor
+cpp [-Dmacro[=defn]...] [-Umacro]
+[-Idir...] [-iquotedir...]
+[-Wwarn...]
+[-M|-MM] [-MG] [-MF filename]
+[-MP] [-MQ target...]
+[-MT target...]
+[-P] [-fno-working-directory]
+[-x language] [-std=standard]
+infile outfile
+Only the most useful options are listed here; see below for the remainder.
+The C preprocessor, often known as cpp, is a macro processor that is used automatically by the C compiler
+%
+wall - write a message to all users
+wall [-n] [-t timeout] [message | file]
+wall  displays a message, or the contents of a file, or otherwise its standard input, on the terminals of
+all currently logged in users.  The command will wrap lines that are longer than  79  characters.   Short
+lines are whitespace padded to have 79 characters.  The command will always put a carriage return and new
+line at the end of each line.
+Only the superuser can write on the terminals of users who have chosen to deny messages or  are  using  a
+program which automatically denies messages.
+Reading from a file is refused when the invoker is not superuser and the program is suid or sgid.
+%
+sftp — secure file transfer program
+[-i identity_file] [-l limit] [-o ssh_option] [-P port] [-R num_requests] [-S program]
+[-s subsystem | sftp_server] host
+sftp [user@]host[:file ...]
+sftp [user@]host[:dir[/]]
+sftp -b batchfile [user@]host
+compression.  sftp connects and logs into the specified host, then enters an interactive command mode.
+The second usage format will retrieve files automatically if a non-interactive authentication method is
+used; otherwise it will do so after successful interactive authentication.
+%
+systemd-cat - Connect a pipeline or program's output with the journal
+filter tool in a shell pipeline to pass the output the previous pipeline element generates to the
+journal.
+If no parameter is passed, systemd-cat will write everything it reads from standard input (stdin) to the
+journal.
+If parameters are passed, they are executed as command line with standard output (stdout) and standard
+error output (stderr) connected to the journal, so that all it writes is stored in the journal.
+%
+glilypond — integrate lilypond parts into groff
+glilypond [ options] [-] [--] [ filespec ....]
+glilypond transforms sheet music written in the lilypond language into the groff(7) language using the
+Files in groff language and standard input can be provided as arguments.
+Breaking Options
+-?|-h|--help|--usage
+Print help or usage information, then leave the program.
+--version
+%
+hostname - show or set system host name
+Show or set the system's host name.
+-a, --aliases
+alias names
+-d, --domain
+DNS domain name
+-f, --fqdn, --long
+DNS host name or FQDN
+%
+systemd-sysusers, systemd-sysusers.service - Allocate system users and groups
+systemd-sysusers.service
+systemd-sysusers creates system users and groups, based on the file format and location specified in
+If invoked with no arguments, it applies all directives from all files found. If one or more filenames
+are passed on the command line, only the directives in these files are applied. If only the basename of a
+string - is specified as filename, entries from the standard input of the process are read.
+%
+dnssec-keygen - DNSSEC key generation tool
+[-D date/offset] [-D sync date/offset] [-E engine] [-f flag] [-G] [-g generator] [-h]
+[-I date/offset] [-i interval] [-K directory] [-k] [-L ttl] [-P date/offset]
+[-P sync date/offset] [-p protocol] [-q] [-R date/offset] [-r randomdev] [-S key]
+[-s strength] [-t type] [-V] [-v level] [-z] {name}
+The name of the key is specified on the command line. For DNSSEC keys, this must match the name of the
+zone for which the key is being generated.
+%
+msgen - create English message catalog
+msgen [OPTION] INPUTFILE
+Creates an English translation catalog.  The input file is the last created English PO file, or a PO Tem‐
+plate file (generally created by xgettext).  Untranslated entries are  assigned  a  translation  that  is
+identical to the msgid.
+Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
+Input file location:
+INPUTFILE
+input PO or POT file
+-D, --directory=DIRECTORY
+%
+srptool - GnuTLS SRP tool
+srptool [-flags] [-flag [value]] [--option-name[[=| ]value]]
+All arguments must be options.
+Simple  program  that  emulates the programs in the Stanford SRP (Secure Remote Password) libraries using
+GnuTLS.  It is intended for use in  places where you don't expect SRP authentication to be the  used  for
+system users.
+In  brief,  to use SRP you need to create two files. These are the password file that holds the users and
+the verifiers associated with  them  and  the configuration file to hold  the  group  parameters  (called
+tpasswd.conf).
+%
+install - copy files and set attributes
+install [OPTION]... [-T] SOURCE DEST
+install [OPTION]... SOURCE... DIRECTORY
+install [OPTION]... -t DIRECTORY SOURCE...
+install [OPTION]... -d DIRECTORY...
+want to download and install a ready-to-use package on a GNU/Linux system, you should instead be using  a
+In the first three forms, copy SOURCE to DEST or multiple SOURCE(s) to the existing DIRECTORY, while set‐
+TORY(ies).
+%
+modinfo - Show information about a Linux Kernel module
+modinfo [-0] [-F field] [-k kernel] [modulename|filename...]
+modinfo -V
+modinfo -h
+modinfo extracts information from the Linux Kernel modules given on the command line. If the module name
+when loading kernel modules.
+modinfo by default lists each attribute of the module in form fieldname : value, for easy reading. The
+filename is listed the same way (although it's not really an attribute).
+%
+scriptreplay - play back typescripts, using timing information
+scriptreplay [options] [-t] timingfile [typescript [divisor]]
+rhythm as it originally appeared when the script was recorded.
+The replay simply displays the information again; the programs that were  run  when  the  typescript  was
+being  recorded are not run again.  Since the same information is simply being displayed, scriptreplay is
+only guaranteed to work properly if run on the same type of terminal  the  typescript  was  recorded  on.
+which scriptreplay is sending its output.
+%
+routel - list routes with pretty output format
+routef - flush routes
+routel [tablenr [raw ip args...]]
+routef
+The  routel  script will list routes in a format that some might consider easier to interpret then the ip
+route list equivalent.
+The routef script does not take any arguments and will simply flush the routing  table  down  the  drain.
+FILES
+/usr/bin/routef
+/usr/bin/routel
+%
+xzcmp, xzdiff, lzcmp, lzdiff - compare compressed files
+from which the compression format suffix has been stripped.  If two files are specified,  then  they  are
+served.
+The names lzcmp and lzdiff are provided for backward compatibility with LZMA Utils.
+%
+ldnsd - simple daemon example code
+ldnsd port zone zonefile
+server!
+ldnsd takes a port, zone and zonefile as arguments.
+Written by the ldns team as an example for ldns usage.
+REPORTING BUGS
+Report bugs to <ldns-team@nlnetlabs.nl>.
+%
+ncursesw6-config - helper script for ncurses libraries
+ncursesw6-config [options]
+libraries.
+--prefix
+echos the package-prefix of ncurses
+--exec-prefix
+echos the executable-prefix of ncurses
+--cflags
+%
+bsdcat — expand files to standard output
+bsdcat [options] [files]
+bsdcat expands files to standard output.
+decompressed data it written to standard output.
+To decompress a file:
+bsdcat example.txt.gz > example.txt
+%
+mesg - display (or do not display) messages from other users
+mesg [option] [n|y]
+The  mesg utility is invoked by a user to control write access others have to the terminal device associ‐
+Traditionally,  write  access  is allowed by default.  However, as users become more conscious of various
+security risks, there is a trend to remove write access by default, at least for the primary login shell.
+To  make  sure  your  ttys are set the way you want them to be set, mesg should be executed in your login
+scripts.
+n      Disallow messages.
+%
+pvmove — move physical extents
+[-d|--debug] [-h|--help] [-i|--interval Seconds] [--noudevsync] [--reportformat {basic|json}]  [-v|--ver‐
+bose]     [-n|--name    LogicalVolume]    [SourcePhysicalVolume[:PE[-PE]...]     [DestinationPhysicalVol‐
+ume[:PE[-PE]...]...]]
+pvmove allows you to move the allocated physical extents (PEs) on SourcePhysicalVolume  to  one  or  more
+extents used by that LV will be moved to free (or specified) extents on DestinationPhysicalVolume(s).  If
+no DestinationPhysicalVolume is specified, the normal allocation rules for the Volume Group are used.
+If  pvmove  gets  interrupted for any reason (e.g. the machine crashes) then run pvmove again without any
+PhysicalVolume arguments to restart any moves that were in progress from the last  checkpoint.   Alterna‐
+tively use pvmove --abort at any time to abort.  The resulting location of logical volumes after an abort
+%
+makeinfo [OPTION]... TEXINFO-FILE...
+Translate Texinfo source documentation to various other formats, by default Info files suitable for read‐
+ing online with Emacs or standalone GNU Info.
+not depend on the installed name.
+General options:
+--document-language=STR locale to use in translating Texinfo keywords
+for the output document (default C).
+--error-limit=NUM
+%
+lsof - list open files
+lsof  [  -?abChKlnNOPRtUvVX ] [ -A A ] [ -c c ] [ +c c ] [ +|-d d ] [ +|-D D ] [ +|-e s ] [ +|-E ] [ +|-f
+[cfgGn] ] [ -F [f] ] [ -g [s] ] [ -i [i] ] [ -k k ] [ +|-L [l] ] [ +|-m m ] [ +|-M ] [ -o [o] ] [ -p s  ]
+[ +|-r [t[m<fmt>]] ] [ -s [p:s] ] [ -S [t] ] [ -T [t] ] [ -u s ] [ +|-w ] [ -x [fl] ] [ -z [z] ] [ -Z [Z]
+] [ -- ] [names]
+%
+setcap - set file capabilities
+setcap [-q] [-v] (capabilities|-|-r) filename [ ... capabilitiesN fileN ]
+In  the  absence of the -v (verify) option setcap sets the capabilities of each specified filename to the
+capabilities specified.  The -v option is used to verify that the specified  capabilities  are  currently
+associated with the file.
+The  special capability string, '-', can be used to indicate that capabilities are read from the standard
+The special capability string, '-r', is used to remove a capability set from a file.
+%
+jfs_tune - adjust tunable file system parameters on JFS
+jfs_tune [options] device
+jfs_tune adjusts tunable parameters on a Linux JFS file system or external journal.  jfs_tune must be run
+as root.
+system or JFS external journal has been created.
+-J device=external-journal
+Attach the JFS external journal located on external-journal to the JFS file system on device.
+The  external journal must already have been created using the command.  More than one file system
+%
+resizecons - change kernel idea of the console size
+resizecons COLSxROWS
+resizecons -lines ROWS
+The  resizecons command tries to change the videomode of the console.  There are several aspects to this:
+(a) the kernel must know about it, (b) the hardware must know about it, (c) user programs must know about
+console screen memory for all virtual consoles, and might fail if there is not enough memory.   (In  that
+The most difficult part of this is (b), since it requires detailed knowledge of the video card  hardware,
+%
+firewalld - Dynamic Firewall Manager
+firewalld provides a dynamically managed firewall with support for network/firewall zones to define the
+ethernet bridges and has a separation of runtime and permanent configuration options. It also supports an
+interface for services or applications to add firewall rules directly.
+These are the command line options of firewalld:
+-h, --help
+Prints a short help text and exists.
+%
+mkinitcpio - Create an initial ramdisk environment
+mkinitcpio [options]
+Creates an initial ramdisk environment for booting the linux kernel. The initial ramdisk is in essence a
+very small environment (early userspace) which loads various kernel modules and sets up necessary things
+filesystems and root filesystems on a software RAID array. mkinitcpio allows for easy extension with
+custom hooks, has autodetection at runtime, and many other features.
+-A, --addhooks hooks
+Add the additional hooks to the image. These will be processed in order after all other hooks from
+times.
+%
+chage - change user password expiry information
+chage [options] LOGIN
+The chage command changes the number of days between password changes and the date of the last password
+The options which apply to the chage command are:
+-d, --lastday LAST_DAY
+be expressed in the format YYYY-MM-DD (or the format more commonly used in your area).
+-E, --expiredate EXPIRE_DATE
+%
+groupadd - create a new group
+groupadd [options] group
+The groupadd command creates a new group account using the values specified on the command line plus the
+default values from the system. The new group will be entered into the system files as needed.
+The options which apply to the groupadd command are:
+-f, --force
+exists. When used with -g, and the specified GID already exists, another (unique) GID is chosen (i.e.
+-g is turned off).
+%
+features an extremely fast decoder, with speed in multiple GB/s per core, typically  reaching  RAM  speed
+%
+workers] [-P pid_file] [-T time_offset]
+The -r realm option specifies the realm for which the server should provide service.
+does not apply to the LDAP database.
+The  -k keytype option specifies the key type of the master key to be entered manually as a password when
+-m is given; the default is des-cbc-crc.
+%
+env - run a program in a modified environment
+Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
+-i, --ignore-environment
+start with an empty environment
+-0, --null
+end each output line with NUL, not newline
+%
+mdadm - manage MD devices aka Linux Software RAID
+mdadm [mode] <raiddevice> [options] <component-devices>
+devices (typically disk drives or partitions thereof) to be combined into a single device  to  hold  (for
+example)  a  single  filesystem.   Some  RAID levels include redundancy and so can survive some degree of
+device failure.
+Linux Software RAID devices are implemented through the md (Multiple Devices) device driver.
+MULTIPATH  is  not a Software RAID mechanism, but does involve multiple devices: each device is a path to
+%
+features an extremely fast decoder, with speed in multiple GB/s per core, typically  reaching  RAM  speed
+%
+bc - An arbitrary precision calculator language
+bc [ -hlwsqv ] [long-options] [  file ... ]
+bc  is  a  language  that  supports arbitrary precision numbers with interactive execution of statements.
+There are some similarities in the syntax to the C programming language.   A  standard  math  library  is
+available by command line option.  If requested, the math library is defined before processing any files.
+bc starts by processing code from all the files listed on the command line in the  order  listed.   After
+all  files  have  been  processed, bc reads from the standard input.  All code is executed as it is read.
+(If a file contains a command to halt the processor, bc will never read from the standard input.)
+document describes the language accepted by this processor.  Extensions will be identified as such.
+%
+With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.
+-b, --binary
+read in binary mode
+-c, --check
+--tag  create a BSD-style checksum
+%
+taskset - set or retrieve a process's CPU affinity
+taskset [options] mask command [argument...]
+taskset [options] -p [mask] pid
+taskset  is  used  to set or retrieve the CPU affinity of a running process given its pid, or to launch a
+new command with a given CPU affinity.  CPU affinity is a scheduler property that "bonds" a process to  a
+given  set  of CPUs on the system.  The Linux scheduler will honor the given CPU affinity and the process
+scheduler  attempts  to  keep  processes  on  the  same CPU as long as practical for performance reasons.
+Therefore, forcing a specific CPU affinity is useful only in certain applications.
+The CPU affinity is represented as a bitmask, with the lowest order bit corresponding to the first  logi‐
+%
+nm - list symbols from object files
+nm [-A|-o|--print-file-name] [-a|--debug-syms]
+[-B|--format=bsd] [-C|--demangle[=style]]
+[-D|--dynamic] [-fformat|--format=format]
+[-g|--extern-only] [-h|--help]
+[-l|--line-numbers] [-n|-v|--numeric-sort]
+[-P|--portability] [-p|--no-sort]
+[-r|--reverse-sort] [-S|--print-size]
+[-s|--print-armap] [-t radix|--radix=radix]
+[-u|--undefined-only] [-V|--version]
+[--plugin name] [--size-sort] [--special-syms]
+[--synthetic] [--target=bfdname]
+[objfile...]
+%
+gropdf - PDF driver for groff
+gropdf [-delvs] [-F dir] [-p papersize] [-y foundry] [-u [cmapfile]] [files ...]
+It is possible to have whitespace between a command line option and its parameter.
+gropdf  translates  the output of GNU troff to PDF.  Normally gropdf should be invoked by using the groff
+command with a -Tpdf option.  If no files are given, gropdf reads the standard input.  A  filename  of  -
+also  causes  gropdf  to  read  the  standard input.  PDF output is written to the standard output.  When
+gropdf is run by groff options can be passed to gropdf using groff's -P option.
+See section FONT INSTALLATION below for a guide how to install fonts for gropdf.
+-d     Include debug information as comments within the PDF.  Also produces an uncompressed PDF.
+%
+ksu - Kerberized super-user
+ksu [ target_user ] [ -n target_principal_name ] [ -c source_cache_name ] [ -k ] [ -r time ] [ -pf ] [ -l
+lifetime ] [ -z | Z ] [ -q ] [ -e command [ args ...  ] ] [ -a [ args ...  ] ]
+REQUIREMENTS
+use ksu.
+ksu  is  a Kerberized version of the su program that has two missions: one is to securely change the real
+and effective user ID to that of the target user, and the other is to create a new security context.
+For the sake of clarity, all references to and attributes of the user invoking the program will  start
+with "source" (e.g., "source user", "source cache", etc.).
+%
+msgcomm - match two message catalogs
+msgcomm [OPTION] [INPUTFILE]...
+Find  messages  which  are  common  to  two  or more of the specified PO files.  By using the --more-than
+print the unique messages).  Translations, comments and extracted comments will be  preserved,  but  only
+from the first PO file to define them.  File positions from all PO files will be cumulated.
+Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
+Input file location:
+INPUTFILE ...
+input files
+%
+reiserfsck - The checking tool for the ReiserFS filesystem.
+reiserfsck  [ -aprVy ] [ --rebuild-sb | --check | --fix-fixable | --rebuild-tree | --clean-attributes ] [
+-j | --journal device ] [ -z | --adjust-size ] [ -n | --nolog ] [ -B | --badblocks file ] [ -l  |  --log‐
+file file ] [ -q | --quiet ] [ -y | --yes ] [ -f | --force ] [ -S | --scan-whole-partition ] [ --no-jour‐
+nal-available ] device
+Reiserfsck searches for a Reiserfs filesystem on a device, replays any necessary transactions, and either
+checks or repairs the file system.
+device is  the  special  file  corresponding to a device or to a partition (e.g /dev/hdXX for an IDE disk
+partition or /dev/sdXX for a SCSI disk partition).
+--rebuild-sb
+%
+xfs_metadump - copy XFS filesystem metadata to a file
+xfs_metadump [ -aefFgow ] [ -m max_extents ] ] [ -l logdev ] source target
+xfs_metadump -V
+xfs_metadump  is  a debugging tool that copies the metadata from an XFS filesystem to a file.  The source
+argument must be the pathname of the device or file containing the XFS filesystem and the target argument
+output to be redirected to another program such as a compression application.
+xfs_metadump does not alter the source filesystem in any way. The target  image  is  a  contiguous  (non-
+sparse) file containing all the filesystem's metadata and indexes to where the blocks were copied from.
+%
+ldd - print shared object dependencies
+ldd [option]... file...
+ldd  prints  the shared objects (shared libraries) required by each program or shared object specified on
+the command line.  An example of its use and output is the following:
+$ ldd /bin/ls
+%
+expand - convert tabs to spaces
+expand [OPTION]... [FILE]...
+Convert tabs in each FILE to spaces, writing to standard output.
+With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.
+Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
+-i, --initial
+do not convert tabs after non blanks
+-t, --tabs=NUMBER
+%
+basename - strip directory and suffix from filenames
+Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
+-a, --multiple
+-s, --suffix=SUFFIX
+remove a trailing SUFFIX; implies -a
+%
+safety mechanism.  The -f option disables this safety mechanism.
+-h     Display a usage message.
+-n     Dry-run; do not actually write blocks back to the filesystem.
+%
+mkfs.btrfs - create a btrfs filesystem
+mkfs.btrfs [-A|--alloc-start <alloc-start>] [-b|--byte-count <byte-count>] [-d|--data <data-profile>]
+[-m|--metadata <metadata profile>] [-M|--mixed] [-l|--leafsize <leafsize>] [-n|--nodesize <nodesize>]
+[-s|--sectorsize <sectorsize>] [-L|--label <label>] [-K|--nodiscard] [-r|--rootdir <rootdir>]
+[-V|--version] <device> [<device>...]
+mkfs.btrfs is used to create the btrfs filesystem on a single or multiple devices. <device> is typically
+a block device but can be a file-backed image as well. Multiple devices are grouped by UUID of the
+filesystem.
+Before mounting such filesystem, the kernel module must know all the devices either via preceding
+execution of btrfs device scan or using the device mount option. See section MULTIPLE DEVICES for more
+details.
+%
+runlevel - Print previous and current SysV runlevel
+runlevel [options...]
+"Runlevels" are an obsolete way to start and stop groups of services used in SysV init. systemd provides
+a compatibility layer that maps runlevels to targets, and associated binaries like runlevel.
+Nevertheless, only one runlevel can be "active" at a given time, while systemd can activate multiple
+targets concurrently, so the mapping to runlevels is confusing and only approximate. Runlevels should not
+be used in new code, and are mostly useful as a shorthand way to refer the matching systemd targets in
+kernel boot parameters.
+┌─────────┬───────────────────┐
+│Runlevel │ Target            │
+├─────────┼───────────────────┤
+%
+pdfroff - create PDF documents using groff
+pdfroff [-abcegilpstzCEGNRSUVXZ] [-d cs] [-f fam] [-F dir] [-I dir] [-L arg] [-m name] [-M dir] [-n num]
+[-o list] [-P arg] [-r cn] [-T dev] [-w name] [-W name] [--emit-ps] [--no-toc-relocation] [--no-
+kill-null-pages] [--stylesheet=name] [--no-pdf-output] [--pdf-output=name]
+[--no-reference-dictionary] [--reference-dictionary=name] [--report-progress]
+[--keep-temporary-files] file ...
+pdfroff -h | --help
+pdfroff -v | --version [option ...]
+pdfroff  is  a  wrapper  program for the GNU text processing system, groff.  It transparently handles the
+mechanics of multiple pass groff processing, when applied to suitably marked up groff source files,  such
+that tables of contents and body text are formatted separately, and are subsequently combined in the cor‐
+rect order, for final publication as a single PDF document.  A further optional “style sheet”  capability
+is  provided;  this  allows  for the definition of content which is required to precede the table of con‐
+%
+update-smart-drivedb - update smartmontools drive database
+other platforms.]
+update-smart-drivedb updates /usr/share/smartmontools/drivedb.h or DESTFILE from smartmontools SVN repos‐
+itory.
+It  tries  to  download first from the current branch and then from trunk. The tools used for downloading
+The old file is kept if the downloaded file is identical (ignoring the differences in Id  string)  other‐
+wise it is moved to drivedb.h.old.
+%
+sg - execute command as different group ID
+sg [-] [group [-c ] command]
+The sg command works similar to newgrp but accepts a command. The command will be executed with the
+Another difference between newgrp and sg is that some shells treat newgrp specially, replacing themselves
+command you are returned to your previous group ID.
+CONFIGURATION
+The following configuration variables in /etc/login.defs change the behavior of this tool:
+SYSLOG_SG_ENAB (boolean)
+Enable "syslog" logging of sg activity.
+%
+slabtop - display kernel slab cache information in real time
+slabtop [options]
+slabtop  displays  detailed kernel slab cache information in real time.  It displays a listing of the top
+caches sorted by one of the listed sort criteria.  It also displays a statistics header filled with  slab
+layer information.
+Normal  invocation  of slabtop does not require any options.  The behavior, however, can be fine-tuned by
+specifying one or more of the following flags:
+-d, --delay=N
+Refresh the display every n in seconds.  By default, slabtop refreshes  the  display  every  three
+seconds.  To exit the program, hit q.
+%
+journalctl - Query the systemd journal
+If called without parameters, it will show the full contents of the journal, starting with the oldest
+entry collected.
+If one or more match arguments are passed, the output is filtered accordingly. A match is in the format
+"FIELD=VALUE", e.g.  "_SYSTEMD_UNIT=httpd.service", referring to the components of a structured journal
+entry. See systemd.journal-fields(7) for a list of well-known fields. If multiple matches are specified
+matching different fields, the log entries are filtered by both, i.e. the resulting output will show only
+entries matching all the specified matches of this kind. If two matches apply to the same field, then
+%
+setmetamode - define the keyboard meta key handling
+setmetamode [ {meta|bit|metabit | esc|prefix|escprefix} ]
+Without argument, setmetamode prints the current Meta key mode.  With argument, it sets the Meta key mode
+as indicated.  The setting before and after the change are reported.
+The Meta key mode is specific for each VT (and the VT corresponding to stdin is  used).   One  might  use
+setmetamode in /etc/rc to define the initial state of the Meta key mode, e.g. by
+for tty in $INITTY; do
+setmetamode escprefix < $tty
+done
+%
+gpgconf - Modify .gnupg home directories
+gpgconf [options] --list-components
+gpgconf [options] --list-options component
+gpgconf [options] --change-options component
+The  gpgconf  is a utility to automatically and reasonable safely query and modify configuration files in
+the ‘.gnupg’ home directory.  It is designed not to be invoked manually by the user, but automatically by
+graphical  user  interfaces  (GUI). ([Please note that currently no locking is done, so concurrent access
+guarantees.])
+gpgconf provides access to the configuration of one or more components of the GnuPG system.  These compo‐
+nents correspond more or less to the programs that exist in the GnuPG framework, like GnuPG, GPGSM, DirM‐
+%
+grub-set-default - set the saved default boot entry for GRUB
+grub-set-default [OPTION] MENU_ENTRY
+-h, --help
+print this message and exit
+-V, --version
+print the version information and exit
+--boot-directory=DIR
+expect GRUB images under the directory DIR/grub instead of the /boot/grub directory
+%
+vgimport — make exported volume groups known to the system
+vgimport  [-a|--all]  [-d|--debug]  [-h|-?|--help]  [--reportformat {basic|json}] [-S|--select Selection]
+system again, perhaps after moving its Physical Volumes from a different machine.  vgexport clears the VG
+system ID, and vgimport sets the VG system ID to match the host running vgimport (if the host has a  sys‐
+tem ID).
+-a, --all
+Import all exported Volume Groups.
+%
+chsh - change your login shell
+chsh [-s shell] [-l] [-u] [-v] [username]
+chsh  is  used to change your login shell.  If a shell is not given on the command line, chsh prompts for
+one.
+chsh supports non-local entries (kerberos, LDAP, etc.) if linked  with  libuser,  otherwise  use  ypchsh,
+lchsh or any other implementation for non-local entries.
+-s, --shell shell
+Specify your login shell.
+-l, --list-shells
+%
+localectl - Control the system locale and keyboard layout settings
+The system locale controls the language settings of system services and of the UI before the user logs
+in, such as the display manager, as well as the default for users after login.
+The keyboard settings control the keyboard layout used on the text console and of the graphical UI before
+the user logs in, such as the display manager, as well as the default for users after login.
+during early system boot. The initramfs is not rebuilt automatically by localectl.
+%
+whistles you can expect from a decent OpenPGP implementation.
+as it requires several other modules to be installed.
+RETURN VALUE
+for fatal errors.
+%
+biosdecode - BIOS information decoder
+biosdecode  parses the BIOS memory and prints information about all structures (or entry points) it knows
+of. Currently known entry point types are:
+· SMBIOS (System Management BIOS)
+Use dmidecode for a more detailed output.
+· DMI (Desktop Management Interface, a legacy version of SMBIOS)
+Use dmidecode for a more detailed output.
+· SYSID
+%
+whistles you can expect from a decent OpenPGP implementation.
+as it requires several other modules to be installed.
+RETURN VALUE
+for fatal errors.
+%
+manpath - determine search path for manual pages
+manpath [-qgdc?V] [-m system[,...]] [-C file]
+If  $MANPATH  is set, manpath will simply display its contents and issue a warning.  If not, manpath will
+determine a suitable manual page hierarchy search path and display the results.
+The colon-delimited path is determined using information gained from  the  man-db  configuration  file  -
+(/etc/man_db.conf) and the user's environment.
+-q, --quiet
+Do not issue warnings.
+-d, --debug
+%
+guile - The GNU Project Extension Language
+guile [-L DIRECTORY] [-l FILE] [-e FUNCTION] [\] [-c EXPR] [-s SCRIPT] [--] [SCRIPT [ARGs for SCRIPT]]
+Only the most useful options are listed here; see below for the remainder.
+standards, providing additional features necessary for real-world use.
+Guile works well for interactive use, basic scripting, and extension of larger applications, as  well  as
+for stand-alone Scheme application development.
+The guile executable itself provides a stand-alone interactive compiler and run-time for Scheme programs,
+both for interactive use and for executing Scheme scripts or programs.
+%
+namei - follow a pathname until a terminal point is found
+namei [options] pathname...
+namei  interprets  its arguments as pathnames to any type of Unix file (symlinks, files, directories, and
+so forth).  namei then follows each pathname until an endpoint is found (a file, a  directory,  a  device
+node,  etc).  If it finds a symbolic link, it shows the link, and starts following it, indenting the out‐
+put to show the context.
+For each line of output, namei uses the following characters to identify the file type found:
+f: = the pathname currently being resolved
+d = directory
+%
+emacs - GNU project Emacs
+emacs [ command-line switches ] [ files ... ]
+The user functionality of GNU Emacs encompasses everything other editors do, and it is easily  extensible
+since its editing commands are written in Lisp.
+The  primary documentation of GNU Emacs is in the GNU Emacs Manual, which you can read using Info, either
+from Emacs or as a standalone program.  Please look there  for  complete  and  up-to-date  documentation.
+Emacs  has  an extensive interactive help facility, but the facility assumes that you know how to manipu‐
+%
+swapon, swapoff - enable/disable devices and files for paging and swapping
+swapon [options] [specialfile...]
+swapoff [-va] [specialfile...]
+swapon is used to specify devices on which paging and swapping are to take place.
+to indicate a device by label or uuid.
+Calls to swapon normally occur in the system boot scripts making all swap devices available, so that  the
+paging and swapping activity is interleaved across several devices and files.
+swapoff  disables  swapping  on  the specified devices and files.  When the -a flag is given, swapping is
+disabled on all known swap devices and files (as found in /proc/swaps or /etc/fstab).
+%
+perl [ -sTtuUWX ]      [ -hv ] [ -V[:configvar] ]      [ -cw ] [ -d[t][:debugger] ] [ -D[number/list] ]
+[ -pna ] [ -Fpattern ] [ -l[octal] ] [ -0[octal/hexadecimal] ]
+[ -Idir ] [ -m[-]module ] [ -M[-]'module...' ] [ -f ]      [ -C [number/list] ]      [ -S ]
+[ -x[dir] ]      [ -i[extension] ]      [ [-e|-E] 'command' ] [ -- ] [ programfile ] [ argument ]...
+For more information on these options, you can run "perldoc perlrun".
+GETTING HELP
+The perldoc program gives you access to all the documentation that comes with Perl.  You can get more
+documentation, tutorials and community support online at <http://www.perl.org/>.
+If you're new to Perl, you should start by running "perldoc perlintro", which is a general intro for
+beginners and provides some background to help you navigate the rest of Perl's extensive documentation.
+Run "perldoc perldoc" to learn more things you can do with perldoc.
+%
+usbhid-dump - dump USB HID device report descriptors and streams
+usbhid-dump [OPTION]...
+usbhid-dump  uses  libusb to dump report descriptors and streams from HID (human interface device) inter‐
+faces of USB devices.  By default, it dumps HID interfaces of all connected USB  devices,  but  could  be
+limited to a subset of them, or to a single interface, using options.
+other program receives the input in the meantime.  The report descriptor dumping  is  instantaneous,  but
+the stream dumping continues until terminated with SIGINT (^C from the terminal) or a timeout expires.
+If  you  accidentally  start  dumping a stream from the USB keyboard you use to control the terminal, the
+system will stop receiving the input and you won't be able to terminate usbhid-dump. Just stop your input
+and  wait until the timeout expires. The stream dumping will stop, the keyboard will be reattached to the
+%
+grep, egrep, fgrep - print lines matching a pattern
+grep  searches  the named input FILEs for lines containing a match to the given PATTERN.  If no files are
+specified, or if the file “-” is given, grep searches  standard  input.   By  default,  grep  prints  the
+matching lines.
+In  addition,  the  variant  programs  egrep and fgrep are the same as grep -E and grep -F, respectively.
+These variants are deprecated, but are provided for backward compatibility.
+Generic Program Information
+--help Output a usage message and exit.
+%
+chvt - change foreground virtual terminal
+chvt N
+The  command  chvt N makes /dev/ttyN the foreground terminal.  (The corresponding screen is created if it
+%
+dmidecode - DMI table decoder
+dmidecode  is  a  tool  for dumping a computer's DMI (some say SMBIOS) table contents in a human-readable
+pieces  of  information  such as serial numbers and BIOS revision. Thanks to this table, you can retrieve
+this information without having to probe for the actual hardware.  While this is a good point in terms of
+report speed and safeness, this also makes the presented information possibly unreliable.
+The DMI table doesn't only describe what the system is currently made of, it also can report the possible
+evolutions (such as the fastest supported CPU or the maximal amount of memory supported).
+SMBIOS stands for System Management BIOS, while DMI stands for Desktop Management Interface.  Both  stan‐
+dards are tightly related and developed by the DMTF (Desktop Management Task Force).
+%
+ld - The GNU linker
+ld [options] objfile ...
+ld combines a number of object and archive files, relocates their data and ties up symbol references.
+Usually the last step in compiling a program is to run ld.
+ld accepts Linker Command Language files written in a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language
+syntax, to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
+command language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
+read, combine, and write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or "a.out".
+%
+vgmerge — merge two volume groups
+-l, --list
+%
+reiserfstune - The tunning tool for the ReiserFS filesystem.
+reiserfstune  [  -f ] [ -h | --help ] [ -j | --journal-device FILE ] [ --no-journal-available ] [ --jour‐
+nal-new-device FILE ] [ --make-journal-standard ] [ -s | --journal-new-size N ] [ -o | --journal-new-off‐
+set  N ] [ -t | --max-transaction-size N ] [ -b | --add-badblocks file ] [ -B | --badblocks file ] [ -u |
+--uuid UUID ] [ -l | --label LABEL ] [ -c | --check-interval  interval-in-days  ]  [  -C  |  --time-last-
+checked timestamp ] [ -m | --max-mnt-count count ] [ -M | --mnt-count count ] device
+reiserfstune  is used for tuning the ReiserFS. It can change two journal parameters (the journal size and
+the maximum transaction size), and it can move the journal's location to a new  specified  block  device.
+the  relocated  journal was implemented for a special release of ReiserFS, and was not expected to be put
+you  must  apply  a  special patch. Without this patch the kernel will refuse to mount the newly modified
+%
+fuser - identify processes using files or sockets
+fuser -l
+fuser -V
+fuser  displays  the PIDs of processes using the specified files or file systems.  In the default display
+mode, each file name is followed by a letter denoting the type of access:
+c      current directory.
+e      executable being run.
+f      open file.  f is omitted in default display mode.
+F      open file for writing.  F is omitted in default display mode.
+r      root directory.
+m      mmap'ed file or shared library.
+%
+pstree - display a tree of processes
+pstree [-a, --arguments] [-c, --compact] [-h, --highlight-all, -Hpid, --highlight-pid pid]
+[-g] --show-pgids] [-l, --long] [-n, --numeric-sort] [-N, --ns-sortns [-p, --show-pids] [-s, --show-par‐
+ents] [-S, --ns-changes] [-u, --uid-changes] [-Z, --security-context]
+pstree -V, --version
+pstree shows running processes as a tree.  The tree is rooted at either pid or init if  pid  is  omitted.
+If a user name is specified, all process trees rooted at processes owned by that user are shown.
+pstree  visually merges identical branches by putting them in square brackets and prefixing them with the
+repetition count, e.g.
+init-+-getty
+%
+emacsclient - tells a running Emacs to visit a file
+emacsclient [options] files ...
+but is not specific to that system.
+emacsclient works in conjunction with the built-in Emacs server.
+You can either call emacsclient directly or let other programs run it for you when necessary.  On GNU and
+Unix systems many programs consult the environment variable EDITOR (sometimes also VISUAL) to obtain  the
+command used for editing.  Thus, setting this environment variable to 'emacsclient' will allow these pro‐
+grams to use an already running Emacs for editing.  Other operating systems might have their own  methods
+for defining the default editor.
+%
+vgcfgbackup — backup volume group descriptor area
+vgcfgbackup allows you to backup the metadata of your volume groups.  If you don't name any volume groups
+on the command line, all of them will be backed up.
+In  a default installation, each volume group gets backed up into a separate file bearing the name of the
+volume group in the directory /etc/lvm/backup.  You can write the backup to an alternative file using -f.
+%s gets replaced by the volume group name.
+%
+mouse-test - a tool for determining mouse type and device it's attached to.
+mouse-test [ device ... ]
+speak. It is able to detect MouseMan devices, and to choose between -t ms (three-buttons  aware)  and  -t
+bare old two-buttons-only serial mice.
+BUGS
+I know the application is buggy, but I only own one mouse device.  If you are interested in this applica‐
+tion, just call me and awake me from my laziness.
+device [ device ... ]
+%
+grub-mount - export GRUB filesystem with FUSE
+Debug tool for filesystem driver.
+-C, --crypto
+Mount crypto devices.
+-d, --debug=STRING
+Set debug environment variable.
+-K, --zfs-key=FILE|prompt
+Load zfs crypto key.
+%
+gnutls-serv - GnuTLS server
+gnutls-serv [-flags] [-flag [value]] [--option-name[[=| ]value]]
+All arguments must be options.
+Server program that listens to incoming TLS connections.
+-d number, --debug=number
+constrained to being:
+in the range  0 through 9999
+Specifies the debug level.
+%
+faked - daemon that remembers fake ownership/permissions of files manipulated by fakeroot processes.
+faked  [--debug] [--foreground] [--cleanup] [--key msg-key] [--load] [--save-file save-file] [--port TCP-
+port]
+If a fakeroot process wants to change the ownership of a file, then faked is the process  that  remembers
+that  new owner. If later the same fakeroot process does a stat() for that filename, then the libfakeroot
+wrapped stat() call will first ask faked for the fake ownership etc of that file, and then report it.
+--debug
+Print debugging information on stderr.
+--foreground
+Don't fork into the background.
+%
+era_invalidate - Provide a list of blocks that have changed since a particular era.
+era_invalidate [options] {device|file}
+-h, --help
+Print help and exit.
+-V, --version
+Output version information and exit.
+%
+vmstat - Report virtual memory statistics
+vmstat [options] [delay [count]]
+vmstat reports information about processes, memory, paging, block IO, traps, disks and cpu activity.
+The first report produced gives averages since the last reboot.  Additional reports give information on a
+delay  The delay between updates in seconds.  If no delay is specified, only one report is  printed  with
+the average values since boot.
+count  Number of updates.  In absence of count, when delay is defined, default is infinite.
+%
+vgreduce — reduce a volume group
+umePath...]
+vgreduce allows you to remove one or more unused physical volumes from a volume group.
+-a, --all
+Removes all empty physical volumes if none are given on command line.
+--removemissing
+%
+serve  as a pager for text files named as arguments or passed on standard input, and as a general purpose
+directory browser.
+capabilities do not meet your needs, the target URL can be handed over to a graphical browser with a sin‐
+gle command.
+%
+Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
+-i, --input=MODE
+adjust standard input stream buffering
+-o, --output=MODE
+adjust standard output stream buffering
+-e, --error=MODE
+%
+xzgrep - search compressed files for a regular expression
+xzgrep [grep_options] [-e] pattern file...
+xzegrep ...
+xzfgrep ...
+lzgrep ...
+lzegrep ...
+lzfgrep ...
+%
+usermod - modify a user account
+usermod [options] LOGIN
+The usermod command modifies the system account files to reflect the changes that are specified on the
+command line.
+The options which apply to the usermod command are:
+-a, --append
+Add the user to the supplementary group(s). Use only with the -G option.
+-c, --comment COMMENT
+%
+zless - file perusal filter for crt viewing of compressed text
+zless [ name ...  ]
+Zless is a filter which allows examination of compressed or plain text files one screenful at a time on a
+soft-copy terminal.  It is the equivalent of setting the environment variable LESSOPEN to '|gzip -cdfq --
+%s',  and  the environment variable LESSMETACHARS to '<space><tab><newline>;*?"()<>[|&^`#\$%=~', and then
+running less.  However, enough people seem to think that having the command zless available is  important
+to be worth providing it.
+BUGS
+Zless  does  not work with compressed data that is piped to it via standard input; it requires that input
+%
+timeout - run a command with a time limit
+timeout [OPTION]
+Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
+--preserve-status
+command times out
+%
+openssl - OpenSSL command line tool
+openssl command [ command_opts ] [ command_args ]
+openssl [ list-standard-commands | list-message-digest-commands | list-cipher-commands | list-cipher-
+algorithms | list-message-digest-algorithms | list-public-key-algorithms]
+openssl no-XXX [ arbitrary options ]
+The openssl program is a command line tool for using the various cryptography functions of OpenSSL's
+crypto library from the shell.  It can be used for
+%
+dnssec-checkds - DNSSEC delegation consistency checking tool
+dnssec-checkds [-l domain] [-f file] [-d dig path] [-D dsfromkey path] {zone}
+dnssec-dsfromkey [-l domain] [-f file] [-d dig path] [-D dsfromkey path] {zone}
+dnssec-checkds verifies the correctness of Delegation Signer (DS) or DNSSEC Lookaside Validation (DLV)
+resource records for keys in a specified zone.
+-f file
+If a file is specified, then the zone is read from that file to find the DNSKEY records. If not, then
+the DNSKEY records for the zone are looked up in the DNS.
+-l domain
+%
+column - columnate lists
+column [options] [file...]
+The  column utility formats its input into multiple columns.  By default, rows are filled before columns.
+Input is taken from file, or otherwise from standard input.  Empty lines are ignored.
+-c, --columns width
+Output is formatted to a width specified as number of characters.
+-o, --output-separator string
+Specify the columns delimiter for table output (default is two spaces).
+-s, --separator separators
+%
+cal - display a calendar
+cal [options] [[[day] month] year]
+cal displays a simple calendar.  If no arguments are specified, the current month is displayed.
+Display three months spanning the date.
+-n , --months number
+Display number of months, starting from the month containing the date.
+%
+echo - display a line of text
+echo [SHORT-OPTION]... [STRING]...
+echo LONG-OPTION
+Echo the STRING(s) to standard output.
+-n     do not output the trailing newline
+-e     enable interpretation of backslash escapes
+-E     disable interpretation of backslash escapes (default)
+--help display this help and exit
+%
+chmod - change file mode bits
+chmod [OPTION]... MODE[,MODE]... FILE...
+chmod [OPTION]... OCTAL-MODE FILE...
+chmod [OPTION]... --reference=RFILE FILE...
+according to mode, which can be either a symbolic representation of changes to make, or an  octal  number
+representing the bit pattern for the new mode bits.
+The  format  of a symbolic mode is [ugoa...][[-+=][perms...]...], where perms is either zero or more let‐
+ters from the set rwxXst, or a single letter from the set ugo.  Multiple symbolic  modes  can  be  given,
+separated by commas.
+A  combination of the letters ugoa controls which users' access to the file will be changed: the user who
+%
+sshd — OpenSSH SSH daemon
+[-g login_grace_time] [-h host_key_file] [-k key_gen_time] [-o option] [-p port] [-u len]
+and provide secure encrypted communications between two untrusted hosts over an insecure network.
+sshd listens for connections from clients.  It is normally started at boot from /etc/rc.  It forks a new
+daemon for each incoming connection.  The forked daemons handle key exchange, encryption, authentication,
+command execution, and data exchange.
+mand-line options override values specified in the configuration file.  sshd rereads its configuration file
+when it receives a hangup signal, SIGHUP, by executing itself with the name and options it was started
+%
+sort - sort lines of text files
+sort [OPTION]... [FILE]...
+sort [OPTION]... --files0-from=F
+Write sorted concatenation of all FILE(s) to standard output.
+With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.
+Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.  Ordering options:
+-b, --ignore-leading-blanks
+ignore leading blanks
+-d, --dictionary-order
+%
+mdmon - monitor MD external metadata arrays
+mdmon [--all] [--takeover] [--foreground] CONTAINER
+user space handles all updates to the metadata.  The kernel's responsibility is to notify user space when
+a  "metadata  event" occurs, like disk failures and clean-to-dirty transitions.  The kernel, in important
+Metadata updates:
+To service metadata update requests a daemon, mdmon, is introduced.  Mdmon is  tasked  with  polling  the
+sysfs  namespace  looking for changes in array_state, sync_action, and per disk state attributes.  When a
+change is detected it calls a per metadata type handler to make modifications to the metadata.  The  fol‐
+lowing actions are taken:
+%
+somewhat smaller than the fully-blown gpg and uses a different (and simpler) way to check that the public
+keys  used  to  make the signature are valid. There are no configuration files and only a few options are
+implemented.
+for expired or revoked keys.
+By  default  a  keyring named ‘trustedkeys.kbx’ is used; if that does not exist a keyring named ‘trusted‐
+%
+grub-ofpathname - find OpenBOOT path for a device
+grub-ofpathname DEVICE
+The  full  documentation  for  grub-ofpathname  is maintained as a Texinfo manual.  If the info and grub-
+ofpathname programs are properly installed at your site, the command
+info grub-ofpathname
+should give you access to the complete manual.
+%
+firewall-applet - firewalld applet
+firewall-applet is a tray applet for firewalld.
+firewall-applet does not support any special options.
+The following options are supported:
+-h, --help
+Prints a short help text and exists.
+QSETTINGS
+%
+mail -h | --help
+mail [-BDdEFintv~] [-A account] [-a attachment] [-b bcc-addr] [-c cc-addr] [-q quote-file] [-r from-addr]
+[-S variable[=value]] [-s subject] [-X cmd] [-.] to-addr ... [-- mta-option ...]
+mail [-BDdEeHiNnRv~#] [-A account] [-L spec-list] [-r from-addr] [-S variable[=value]] [-X cmd] -f [file]
+[-- mta-option ...]
+mail [-BDdEeHiNnRv~#] [-A account] [-L spec-list] [-r from-addr] [-S variable[=value]] [-u user] [-X cmd]
+[-- mta-option ...]
+%
+nohup - run a command immune to hangups, with output to a non-tty
+nohup OPTION
+--help display this help and exit
+--version
+output version information and exit
+If  standard input is a terminal, redirect it from an unreadable file.  If standard output is a terminal,
+append output to 'nohup.out' if possible, '$HOME/nohup.out' otherwise.  If standard error is a  terminal,
+%
+mkswap - set up a Linux swap area
+mkswap [options] device [size]
+mkswap sets up a Linux swap area on a device or in a file.
+The  device  argument will usually be a disk partition (something like /dev/sdb7) but can also be a file.
+The Linux kernel does not look at partition IDs, but many installation scripts will  assume  that  parti‐
+type.  Be careful not to kill your Solaris partitions.)
+The size parameter is superfluous but retained for backwards compatibility.  (It  specifies  the  desired
+%
+systemd-delta - Find overridden configuration files
+files. Files in /etc have highest priority, files in /run have the second highest priority, ..., files in
+/lib have lowest priority. Files in a directory with higher priority override files with the same name in
+directories of lower priority. In addition, certain configuration files can have ".d" directories which
+contain "drop-in" files with configuration snippets which augment the main configuration file. "Drop-in"
+files can be overridden in the same way by placing files with the same name in a directory of higher
+containing directory, which corresponds to the name of the main configuration file, must match). For a
+The command line argument will be split into a prefix and a suffix. Either is optional. The prefix must
+%
+xgettext - extract gettext strings from source
+xgettext [OPTION] [INPUTFILE]...
+Extract translatable strings from given input files.
+Mandatory  arguments  to  long options are mandatory for short options too.  Similarly for optional argu‐
+ments.
+Input file location:
+INPUTFILE ...
+input files
+-f, --files-from=FILE
+get list of input files from FILE
+%
+era_check - validate era metadata on device or file
+era_check [options] {device|file}
+era_check checks era metadata created by the device-mapper era target on a device or file.
+-q, --quiet
+Suppress output messages, return only exit code.
+-h, --help
+Print help and exit.
+%
+xfs_db - debug an XFS filesystem
+xfs_db [ -c cmd ] ... [ -i|r|x|F ] [ -f ] [ -l logdev ] [ -p progname ] device
+xfs_db -V
+xfs_db  is  used  to examine an XFS filesystem. Under rare circumstances it can also be used to modify an
+run xfs_db.
+-f     Specifies that the filesystem image to be processed is stored in a regular file at device (see the
+%
+chown - change file owner and group
+chown [OPTION]... [OWNER][:[GROUP]] FILE...
+chown [OPTION]... --reference=RFILE FILE...
+each given file.  If only an owner (a user name or numeric user ID) is given, that user is made the owner
+of each given file, and the files' group is not changed.  If the owner is followed by a colon and a group
+name (or numeric group ID), with no spaces between them, the group ownership of the files is  changed  as
+well.   If  a colon but no group name follows the user name, that user is made the owner of the files and
+the group of the files is changed to that user's login group.  If the colon and group are given, but  the
+as chgrp.  If only a colon is given, or if the entire operand is empty, neither the owner nor  the  group
+is changed.
+%
+blocks-per-group ] [ -G number-of-groups ] [ -i bytes-per-inode ] [ -I inode-size ] [ -j ] [ -J  journal-
+options ] [ -N number-of-inodes ] [ -n ] [ -m reserved-blocks-percentage ] [ -o creator-os ] [ -O [^]fea‐
+ture[,...]  ] [ -q ] [ -r fs-revision-level ] [ -E extended-options ] [ -v ] [ -F ] [ -L volume-label ] [
+-M last-mounted-directory ] [ -S ] [ -t fs-type ] [ -T usage-type ] [ -U UUID ] [ -V ] [ -e errors-behav‐
+ior ] [ -z undo_file ] device [ fs-size ]
+size ]
+by device.
+%
+kinit - obtain and cache Kerberos ticket-granting ticket
+kinit [-V] [-l lifetime] [-s start_time] [-r renewable_life] [-p | -P] [-f | -F] [-a] [-A] [-C] [-E] [-v]
+[-R] [-k [-t keytab_file]] [-c cache_name] [-n] [-S service_name] [-I input_ccache] [-T armor_ccache] [-X
+attribute[=value]] [principal]
+kinit obtains and caches an initial ticket-granting ticket for principal.
+-V     display verbose output.
+-l lifetime
+(duration string.)  Requests a ticket with the lifetime lifetime.
+%
+tset, reset - terminal initialization
+tset [-IQVcqrsw] [-] [-e ch] [-i ch] [-k ch] [-m mapping] [terminal]
+reset [-IQVcqrsw] [-] [-e ch] [-i ch] [-k ch] [-m mapping] [terminal]
+mination is done as follows, using the first terminal type found.
+ting TERM according to the type passed to it by /etc/inittab.)
+%
+vgimportclone — import and rename duplicated volume group (e.g. a hardware snapshot)
+vgimportclone  is used to import a duplicated VG (e.g. hardware snapshot).  Duplicate VG(s) and PV(s) are
+not able to be used until they are made to coexist  with  the  origin  VG(s)  and  PV(s).   vgimportclone
+renames the VG associated with the specified PV(s) and changes the associated VG and PV UUIDs.
+By  default  the  snapshot  VG will be renamed to the original name plus a numeric suffix to avoid
+base  VG  name  that is used for all VG renames.  If a VG already exists with the specified name a
+%
+newuidmap - set the uid mapping of a user namespace
+newuidmap pid uid loweruid count [uid loweruid count [ ... ]]
+The newuidmap sets /proc/[pid]/uid_map based on its command line arguments and the uids allowed in
+uid
+Beginning of the range of UIDs inside the user namespace.
+loweruid
+Beginning of the range of UIDs outside the user namespace.
+%
+getconf — get configuration values
+getconf [−v specification] system_var
+getconf [−v specification] path_var pathname
+In the first synopsis form, the getconf utility shall write to the standard output the value of the vari‐
+able specified by the system_var operand.
+In the second synopsis form, the getconf utility shall write to the standard  output  the  value  of  the
+%
+setvtrgb - set the virtual terminal RGB colors
+setvtrgb vga|FILE|-
+The  setvtrgb command takes a single argument, either the string vga , or a path to a file containing the
+red, green, and blue colors to be used by the Linux virtual terminals.
+RED, GREEN, and BLUE.
+To seed a valid FILE :
+cat /sys/module/vt/parameters/default_{red,grn,blu} > FILE
+And then edit the values in FILE
+%
+nstat, rtacct - network statistics tools.
+nstat and rtacct are simple tools to monitor kernel snmp counters and network interface statistics.
+-h, --help Print help
+-V, --version
+Print version
+-z, --zero
+Dump zero counters too. By default they are not shown.
+%
+pwck - verify integrity of password files
+pwck [options] [passwd [ shadow ]]
+The pwck command verifies the integrity of the users and authentication information. It checks that all
+entries in /etc/passwd and /etc/shadow have the proper format and contain valid data. The user is
+prompted to delete entries that are improperly formatted or which have other uncorrectable errors.
+Checks are made to verify that each entry has:
+·   the correct number of fields
+·   a unique and valid user name
+·   a valid user and group identifier
+%
+pic - compile pictures for troff or TeX
+pic [ -nvCSU ] [ filename ... ]
+pic -t [ -cvzCSU ] [ filename ... ]
+pic compiles descriptions of pictures embedded within troff or TeX input files  into  commands  that  are
+understood  by  TeX  or  troff.   Each picture starts with a line beginning with .PS and ends with a line
+beginning with .PE.  Anything outside of .PS and .PE is passed through without change.
+It is the user's responsibility to provide appropriate definitions of the PS and  PE  macros.   When  the
+macro package being used does not supply such definitions (for example, old versions of -ms), appropriate
+definitions can be obtained with -mpic: These will center each picture.
+%
+salt
+The salt provided to the hash algorithm.
+algorithm
+argument.
+%
+rlogin - Remote login
+rlogin [OPTION...] HOST
+Starts a terminal session on a remote host.
+-6, --ipv6
+use only IPv6
+allows an eight-bit input data path at all times
+%
+ssh-copy-id — use locally available keys to authorise logins on a remote machine
+ssh-copy-id [-f] [-n] [-i [identity_file]] [-p port] [-o ssh_option] [user@]hostname
+ssh-copy-id -h | -?
+so password authentication should be enabled, unless you've done some clever use of multiple identities).
+It assembles a list of one or more fingerprints (as described below) and tries to log in with each key, to
+you being repeatedly prompted for pass-phrases).  It then assembles a list of those that failed to log in,
+and using ssh, enables logins with those keys on the remote server.  By default it adds the keys by append‐
+ing them to the remote user's ~/.ssh/authorized_keys (creating the file, and directory, if necessary).  It
+is also capable of detecting if the remote system is a NetScreen, and using its ‘set ssh pka-dsa key ...’
+command instead.
+%
+mktemp - create a temporary file or directory
+mktemp [OPTION]... [TEMPLATE]
+secutive 'X's in last component.  If TEMPLATE is not  specified,  use  tmp.XXXXXXXXXX,  and  --tmpdir  is
+implied.  Files are created u+rw, and directories u+rwx, minus umask restrictions.
+-d, --directory
+create a directory, not a file
+-u, --dry-run
+do not create anything; merely print a name (unsafe)
+-q, --quiet
+%
+tabs - set tabs on a terminal
+tabs [options]] [tabstop-list]
+set_tab capabilities.  If either is absent, tabs is unable to clear/set tab-stops.  The  terminal  should
+be configured to use hard tabs, e.g.,
+stty tab0
+General Options
+-Tname
+Tell tabs which terminal type to use.  If this option is not given, tabs will use the $TERM environ‐
+ment variable.  If that is not set, it will use the ansi+tabs entry.
+%
+libtool [OPTION]... [MODE-ARG]...
+Provide generalized library-building support services.
+--config
+show all configuration variables
+--debug
+enable verbose shell tracing
+-n, --dry-run
+display commands without modifying any files
+%
+The  options  -v  and --version print the version information of the program to standard output and exit.
+The options -h and --help print a usage information of the program to standard output and stop  the  pro‐
+gram instantly.
+All  other options are assumed to be groffer options.  They are internally passed to groffer.  They over‐
+ride the behavior of the program.  The options are optional, they can be omitted.
+The filespec arguments correspond to the filespec arguments of groffer.  So they are either the names  of
+%
+cache_check - repair cache metadata on device or file
+cache_check [options] {device|file}
+cache_check checks cache  metadata created by the device-mapper cache target on a device or file.
+-q, --quiet
+Suppress output messages, return only exit code.
+-h, --help
+Print help and exit.
+%
+xz, unxz, xzcat, lzma, unlzma, lzcat - Compress or decompress .xz and .lzma files
+xz [option...]  [file...]
+unxz is equivalent to xz --decompress.
+xzcat is equivalent to xz --decompress --stdout.
+lzma is equivalent to xz --format=lzma.
+unlzma is equivalent to xz --format=lzma --decompress.
+lzcat is equivalent to xz --format=lzma --decompress --stdout.
+When  writing  scripts  that  need  to decompress files, it is recommended to always use the name xz with
+appropriate arguments (xz -d or xz -dc) instead of the names unxz and xzcat.
+%
+ssh-add — adds private key identities to the authentication agent
+ssh-add [-cDdkLlXx] [-E fingerprint_hash] [-t life] [file ...]
+After loading a private key, ssh-add will try to load corresponding certificate information from the file‐
+name obtained by appending -cert.pub to the name of the private key file.  Alternative file names can be
+given on the command line.
+If any file requires a passphrase, ssh-add asks for the passphrase from the user.  The passphrase is read
+from the user's tty.  ssh-add retries the last passphrase if multiple identity files are given.
+%
+ktutil - Kerberos keytab file maintenance utility
+ktutil
+The  ktutil  command  invokes  a  command  interface from which an administrator can read, write, or edit
+list
+list
+Displays the current keylist.
+Alias: l
+%
+filefrag - report on file fragmentation
+filefrag [ -bblocksize ] [ -BeksvxX ] [ files...  ]
+filefrag  reports  on  how badly fragmented a particular file might be.  It makes allowances for indirect
+The filefrag program initially attempts to get the extent information using FIEMAP ioctl  which  is  more
+efficient and faster.  If FIEMAP is not supported then filefrag will fall back to using FIBMAP.
+-B     Force the use of the older FIBMAP ioctl instead of the FIEMAP ioctl for testing purposes.
+-bblocksize
+Use  blocksize  in  bytes  for output instead of the filesystem blocksize.  For compatibility with
+%
+prtstat - print statistics of a process
+prtstat [-r|--raw] pid
+prtstat -V|--version
+file.
+-r, --raw
+Print the information in raw format.
+-V, --version
+Show the version information for prtstat.
+%
+kill - terminate a process
+kill [-signal|-s signal|-p] [-q value] [-a] [--] pid|name...
+kill -l [number] | -L
+The  command  kill sends the specified signal to the specified processes or process groups.  If no signal
+caught.
+Most modern shells have a builtin kill function, with a usage rather  similar  to  that  of  the  command
+described  here.  The --all, --pid, and --queue options, and the possibility to specify processes by com‐
+mand name, are local extensions.
+If signal is 0, then no actual signal is sent, but error checking is still performed.
+%
+Run  each  Texinfo  or (La)TeX FILE through TeX in turn until all cross-references are resolved, building
+all indices.  The directory containing each FILE is searched for included files.  The suffix of  FILE  is
+used  to determine its language ((La)TeX or Texinfo).  To process (e)plain TeX files, set the environment
+variable LATEX=tex.
+General options:
+-b, --batch
+%
+lvs — report information about logical volumes
+[-d|--debug]  [-h|-?|--help] [-H|--history] [--ignorelockingfailure] [--ignoreskippedcluster] [--logonly]
+{basic|json}]  [--rows]  [--separator Separator] [--segments] [--unbuffered] [--units hHbBsSkKmMgGtTpPeE]
+lvs produces formatted output about logical volumes.
+%
+pkaction - Get details about a registered action
+pkaction [--version] [--help]
+pkaction [--verbose]
+pkaction --action-id action [--verbose]
+pkaction is used to obtain information about registered polkit actions. If called without --action-id
+then all actions are displayed. Otherwise the action action. If called without the --verbose option only
+the name of the action is shown. Otherwise details about the actions are shown.
+RETURN VALUE
+On success pkaction returns 0. Otherwise a non-zero value is returned and a diagnostic message is printed
+on standard error.
+%
+printf - format and print data
+printf FORMAT [ARGUMENT]...
+printf OPTION
+Print ARGUMENT(s) according to FORMAT, or execute according to OPTION:
+--help display this help and exit
+--version
+output version information and exit
+FORMAT controls the output as in C printf.  Interpreted sequences are:
+\"     double quote
+%
+gpm - a cut and paste utility and mouse server for virtual consoles
+gpm [ options ]
+intended  as  a  replacement  for  "selection"  as a cut-and-paste mechanism; it also provides additional
+facilities. The "selection" package offered the first cut-and-paste implementation for  Linux  using  two
+mouse  buttons, and the cut buffer is still called "selection buffer" or just "selection" throughout this
+document.  The information below is extracted from the texinfo file, which is  the  preferred  source  of
+information.
+is meant to describe the command-line options for gpm, while its internals are outlined in the next  sec‐
+tion.
+%
+ldconfig - configure dynamic linker run-time bindings
+/sbin/ldconfig [ -nNvXV ] [ -f conf ] [ -C cache ] [ -r root ] directory ...
+/sbin/ldconfig -l [ -v ] library ...
+/sbin/ldconfig -p
+ldconfig  creates the necessary links and cache to the most recent shared libraries found in the directo‐
+ries specified on the command line, in the file /etc/ld.so.conf, and in the trusted directories, /lib and
+The cache is used by the run-time linker, ld.so or ld-linux.so.  ldconfig checks the header and filenames
+of the libraries it encounters when determining which versions should have their links updated.
+%
+gdbm_dump - dump a GDBM database to a file
+gdbm_dump [-H FMT] [--format=FMT] DB_FILE [FILE]
+gdbm_dump [-Vh] [--help] [--usage] [--version]
+dump file is supplied by the second argument (FILE).  If not specified, the output goes to  the  standard
+error.
+of the DB_FILE.
+-H, --format=FMT
+%
+chgpasswd - update group passwords in batch mode
+chgpasswd [options]
+The chgpasswd command reads a list of group name and password pairs from standard input and uses this
+information to update a set of existing groups. Each line is of the format:
+group_name:password
+By default the supplied password must be in clear-text, and is encrypted by chgpasswd.
+The default encryption algorithm can be defined for the system with the ENCRYPT_METHOD variable of
+/etc/login.defs, and can be overwritten with the -e, -m, or -c options.
+%
+dbus-send - Send a message to a message bus
+[--reply-timeout=MSEC] [--type=TYPE] OBJECT_PATH INTERFACE.MEMBER [CONTENTS...]
+The dbus-send command is used to send a message to a D-Bus message bus. See
+http://www.freedesktop.org/software/dbus/ for more information about the big picture.
+There are two well-known message buses: the systemwide message bus (installed on many systems as the
+"messagebus" service) and the per-user-login-session message bus (started each time a user logs in). The
+--system and --session options direct dbus-send to send messages to the system or session buses
+respectively. If neither is specified, dbus-send sends to the session bus.
+Nearly all uses of dbus-send must provide the --dest argument which is the name of a connection on the
+bus to send the message to. If --dest is omitted, no destination is set.
+%
+named-checkzone, named-compilezone - zone file validity checking or converting tool
+named-checkzone [-d] [-h] [-j] [-q] [-v] [-c class] [-f format] [-F format] [-J filename] [-i mode]
+[-k mode] [-m mode] [-M mode] [-n mode] [-l ttl] [-L serial] [-o filename] [-r mode]
+[-s style] [-S mode] [-t directory] [-T mode] [-w directory] [-D] [-W mode] {zonename}
+{filename}
+named-compilezone [-d] [-j] [-q] [-v] [-c class] [-C mode] [-f format] [-F format] [-J filename]
+[-i mode] [-k mode] [-m mode] [-n mode] [-l ttl] [-L serial] [-r mode] [-s style]
+[-t directory] [-T mode] [-w directory] [-D] [-W mode] {-o filename} {zonename}
+{filename}
+named-checkzone checks the syntax and integrity of a zone file. It performs the same checks as named does
+into a name server.
+%
+dbus-monitor - debug probe to print message bus messages
+dbus-monitor [--system | --session | --address ADDRESS] [--profile | --monitor | --pcap | --binary]
+[watch expressions]
+The dbus-monitor command is used to monitor messages going through a D-Bus message bus. See
+http://www.freedesktop.org/software/dbus/ for more information about the big picture.
+There are two well-known message buses: the systemwide message bus (installed on many systems as the
+"messagebus" service) and the per-user-login-session message bus (started each time a user logs in). The
+--system and --session options direct dbus-monitor to monitor the system or session buses respectively.
+If neither is specified, dbus-monitor monitors the session bus.
+dbus-monitor has two different text output modes: the 'classic'-style monitoring mode, and profiling
+mode. The profiling format is a compact format with a single line per message and microsecond-resolution
+%
+rlogind - Remote login server
+rlogind [OPTION...]
+Remote login server
+-6, --ipv6
+only IPv6 in daemon mode
+-a, --verify-hostname
+ask hostname for verification
+%
+ldns-signzone - sign a zonefile with DNSSEC data
+ldns-signzone  is used to generate a DNSSEC signed zone. When run it will create a new zonefile that con‐
+Keys must be specified by their base name (i.e. without .private). If the DNSKEY that belongs to the  key
+in  the  .private file is not present in the zone, it will be read from the file <base name>.key. If that
+file does not exist, the DNSKEY value will be generated from the private key.
+Multiple keys can be specified, Key Signing Keys are used as such when they are either already present in
+the zone, or specified in a .key file, and have the KSK bit set.
+%
+grub-file - check file type
+Check if FILE is of specified type.
+%
+lesskey - specify key bindings for less
+lesskey [-o output] [--] [input]
+lesskey [--output=output] [--] [input]
+lesskey -V
+lesskey --version
+Lesskey is used to specify a set of key bindings to be used by less.  The input file is a text file which
+describes the key bindings.  If the input file is "-", standard input is read.  If no input file is spec‐
+ified, a standard filename is used as the name of the input file, which depends on the system being used:
+$HOME/lesskey.ini  is used, or $INIT/lesskey.ini if $HOME is undefined.  The output file is a binary file
+which is used by less.  If no output file is specified, and the environment variable LESSKEY is set,  the
+value  of  LESSKEY is used as the name of the output file.  Otherwise, a standard filename is used as the
+name of the output file, which depends on the system being used: On Unix and OS-9 systems, $HOME/.less is
+%
+pg - browse pagewise through text files
+pg [-amount] [-p prompt] [-cefnrs] [+line] [+/pattern/] [file...]
+pg  displays  a  text  file on a CRT one screenful at once.  After each page, a prompt is displayed.  The
+If no filename is given on the command line, pg reads from standard input.  If standard output is  not  a
+If  input comes from a pipe, pg stores the data in a buffer file while reading, to make navigation possi‐
+ble.
+pg accepts the following options:
+%
+debugreiserfs - The debugging tool for the ReiserFS filesystem.
+device
+debugreiserfs  sometimes  helps to solve problems with reiserfs filesystems.  When run without options it
+prints the super block of the ReiserFS filesystem found on the device.
+device is the special file corresponding to the device (e.g  /dev/hdXX  for  an  IDE  disk  partition  or
+/dev/sdXX for a SCSI disk partition).
+-j device
+prints  the  contents of the journal. The option -p allows it to pack the journal with other meta‐
+%
+unexpand - convert spaces to tabs
+unexpand [OPTION]... [FILE]...
+Convert blanks in each FILE to tabs, writing to standard output.
+With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.
+Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
+-a, --all
+convert all blanks, instead of just initial blanks
+--first-only
+convert only leading sequences of blanks (overrides -a)
+%
+loadkeys - load keyboard translation tables
+loadkeys  [ -b --bkeymap ] [ -c --clearcompose ] [ -C '<FILE>' | --console=<FILE> ] [ -d --default ] [ -h
+--help ] [ -m --mktable ] [ -q --quiet ] [ -s --clearstrings ] [ -u --unicode ] [ -v --verbose ] [  file‐
+name...  ]
+The  program  loadkeys reads the file or files specified by filename....  Its main purpose is to load the
+kernel keymap for the console.  You can specify console device by the -C (or --console ) option.
+RESET TO DEFAULT
+If the -d (or --default  )  option  is  given,  loadkeys  loads  a  default  keymap,  probably  the  file
+defkeymap.map  either  in /usr/share/kbd/keymaps or in /usr/src/linux/drivers/char.  (Probably the former
+times,  with  a strange keymap loaded (with the minus on some obscure unknown modifier combination) it is
+easier to type `loadkeys defkeymap'.
+%
+dbus-uuidgen - Utility to generate UUIDs
+The dbus-uuidgen command generates or reads a universally unique ID.
+spec. Many systems have a separate command for that (often called "uuidgen").
+See http://www.freedesktop.org/software/dbus/ for more information about D-Bus.
+The primary usage of dbus-uuidgen is to run in the post-install script of a D-Bus package like this:
+dbus-uuidgen --ensure
+%
+ldns-resolver - tries to create a resolver from a resolv.conf file.
+ldns-resolver file
+library for robusteness with input data.
+ldns-resolver  takes  a  filename  of  the  resolv.conf  file  as  input.   For   example   ldns-resolver
+/etc/resolv.conf will show if the file can be parsed successfully.
+Written by the ldns team as an example for ldns usage.
+REPORTING BUGS
+%
+vpddecode - VPD structure decoder
+vpddecode prints the "vital product data" information that can be found in almost all IBM and Lenovo com‐
+puters. Available items are:
+· BIOS Build ID
+· Box Serial Number
+· Motherboard Serial Number
+· Machine Type/Model
+%
+git-upload-archive - Send archive back to git-archive
+git upload-archive <directory>
+Invoked by git archive --remote and sends a generated archive to the other end over the Git protocol.
+archive side, and the program pair is meant to be used to get an archive from a remote repository.
+SECURITY
+pruned, git-upload-archive avoids serving archives for commits and trees that are not reachable from the
+repository’s refs. However, because calculating object reachability is computationally expensive,
+git-upload-archive implements a stricter but easier-to-check set of rules:
+%
+cmp - compare two files byte by byte
+Compare two files byte by byte.
+default).
+Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
+-b, --print-bytes
+print differing bytes
+-i, --ignore-initial=SKIP
+%
+plipconfig - fine tune PLIP device parameters
+plipconfig interface [nibble NN] [trigger NN]
+plipconfig [-V] [--version] [-h] [--help]
+Plipconfig is used to (hopefully) improve PLIP performance by changing the default timing parameters used
+by the PLIP protocol. Results are dependent on the parallel port hardware, cable, and the  CPU  speed  of
+each machine on each end of the PLIP link.
+If  the  single  interface argument is given, plipconfig displays the status of the given interface only.
+Otherwise, it will try to set the options.
+nibble NN
+%
+uuidd - UUID generation daemon
+uuidd [options]
+The  uuidd  daemon  is used by the UUID library to generate universally unique identifiers (UUIDs), espe‐
+cially time-based UUIDs, in a secure and guaranteed-unique fashion, even in the face of large numbers  of
+threads running on different CPUs trying to grab UUIDs.
+-d, --debug
+-F, --no-fork
+Do not daemonize using a double-fork.
+%
+dbus-update-activation-environment - update environment used for D-Bus session services
+dbus-update-activation-environment [--systemd] [--verbose] --all | VAR... | VAR=VAL...
+dbus-update-activation-environment updates the list of environment variables used by dbus-daemon
+--session when it activates session services without using systemd.
+With the --systemd option, if an instance of systemd --user is available on D-Bus, it also updates the
+list of environment variables used by systemd --user when it activates user services, including D-Bus
+a service is started. For instance, it is not useful to add DBUS_SESSION_BUS_ADDRESS to dbus-daemon's
+activation environment, although it might still be useful to add it to systemd's activation environment.
+%
+shred - overwrite a file to hide its contents, and optionally delete it
+shred [OPTION]... FILE...
+Overwrite  the  specified FILE(s) repeatedly, in order to make it harder for even very expensive hardware
+probing to recover the data.
+If FILE is -, shred standard output.
+Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
+-f, --force
+change permissions to allow writing if necessary
+-n, --iterations=N
+%
+cryptsetup - manage plain dm-crypt and LUKS encrypted volumes
+cryptsetup <options> <action> <action args>
+cryptsetup is used to conveniently setup dm-crypt managed device-mapper mappings. These include plain dm-
+crypt volumes and LUKS volumes. The difference is that LUKS uses a metadata header and  can  hence  offer
+more features than plain dm-crypt. On the other hand, the header is visible and vulnerable to damage.
+In  addition,  cryptsetup  provides limited support for the use of historic loopaes volumes and for True‐
+Crypt compatible volumes.
+PLAIN DM-CRYPT OR LUKS?
+Unless you understand the cryptographic background well, use LUKS.  With plain dm-crypt there are a  num‐
+ber  of  possible  user  errors  that massively decrease security. While LUKS cannot fix them all, it can
+lessen the impact for many of them.
+%
+getkeycodes - print kernel scancode-to-keycode mapping table
+getkeycodes
+The getkeycodes command prints the kernel scancode-to-keycode mapping table.
+None.
+%
+locale - get locale-specific information
+locale [option]
+locale [option] -a
+locale [option] -m
+locale [option] name...
+The locale command displays information about the current locale, or all locales, on standard output.
+When invoked without arguments, locale displays the current locale settings for each locale category (see
+Values for variables set in the environment are printed without double quotes, implied values are printed
+with double quotes.
+If either the -a or the -m option (or one of their long-format equivalents) is specified, the behavior is
+%
+runuser - run a command with substitute user and group ID
+runuser [options] -u user command [argument...]
+runuser [options] [-] [user [argument...]]
+runuser  allows  to  run commands with a substitute user and group ID.  If the option -u is not given, it
+falls back to su-compatible semantics and a shell is  executed.   The  difference  between  the  commands
+only) and it uses a different PAM configuration.  The command runuser does not have to be installed  with
+suid permissions.
+When called without arguments, runuser defaults to running an interactive shell as root.
+For  backward  compatibility,  runuser  defaults  to not change the current directory and to only set the
+%
+groffer - display groff files and man pages on X and tty
+groffer [--] [filespec ....]
+groffer [mode-option ....]  [groff-options ....]  [man-options ....]  [X-options ....]  [--] [‐
+filespec ....]
+groffer -h | --help
+groffer -v | --version
+the groff language, see groff(7), or other roff languages, see roff(7), that are compatible to the origi‐
+nal troff language.  It finds and runs all necessary groff preprocessors, such as chem.
+%
+xzgrep - search compressed files for a regular expression
+xzgrep [grep_options] [-e] pattern file...
+xzegrep ...
+xzfgrep ...
+lzgrep ...
+lzegrep ...
+lzfgrep ...
+%
+pwdx - report current working directory of a process
+pwdx [options] pid [...]
+-V, --version
+Output version information and exit.
+-h, --help
+Output help screen and exit.
+STANDARDS
+No standards apply, but pwdx looks an awful lot like a SunOS command.
+%
+newgidmap - set the gid mapping of a user namespace
+newgidmap pid gid lowergid count [gid lowergid count [ ... ]]
+The newgidmap sets /proc/[pid]/gid_map based on its command line arguments and the gids allowed in
+gid
+Beginning of the range of GIDs inside the user namespace.
+lowergid
+Beginning of the range of GIDs outside the user namespace.
+%
+ntpq - standard NTP query program
+ntpq [-flags] [-flag [value]] [--option-name[[=| ]value]] [ host ...]
+The  ntpq  utility  program  is used to query NTP servers which implement the standard NTP mode 6 control
+read and write arbitrary variables can be assembled, with raw and  pretty-printed  output  options  being
+available.  The ntpq utility can also obtain and print a list of peers in a common format by sending mul‐
+tiple queries to the server.  If one or more request options is included on the command line when ntpq is
+executed, each of the requests will be sent to the NTP servers running on each of the hosts given as com‐
+mand line arguments, or on localhost by default.  If no request options are given, ntpq will  attempt  to
+read commands from the standard input and execute these on the NTP server running on the first host given
+%
+ps - report a snapshot of the current processes.
+ps [options]
+ps displays information about a selection of the active processes.  If you want a repetitive update of
+options, which are functionally identical, due to the many standards and ps implementations that this ps
+%
+drill - get (debug) information out of DNS(SEC)
+drill  is a tool to designed to get all sorts of information out of the DNS. It is specificly designed to
+be used with DNSSEC.
+The name drill is a pun on dig. With drill you should be able get even more information than with dig.
+If no arguments are  given  class  defaults  to  'IN'  and  type  to  'A'.  The  server(s)  specified  in
+/etc/resolv.conf are used to query against.
+name Ask for this name.
+@server Send to query to this server. If not specified use the nameservers from /etc/resolv.conf.
+%
+kbdrate - reset the keyboard repeat rate and delay time
+kbdrate [ -s ] [ -r rate ] [ -d delay ]
+kbdrate  is used to change the keyboard repeat rate and delay time.  The delay is the amount of time that
+a key must be depressed before it will start to repeat.
+-s     Silent.  No messages are printed.
+-r rate
+%
+grpck - verify integrity of group files
+grpck [options] [group [ shadow ]]
+The grpck command verifies the integrity of the groups information. It checks that all entries in
+/etc/group and /etc/gshadow have the proper format and contain valid data. The user is prompted to delete
+entries that are improperly formatted or which have other uncorrectable errors.
+Checks are made to verify that each entry has:
+·   the correct number of fields
+·   a unique and valid group name
+·   a valid group identifier (/etc/group only)
+%
+tac - concatenate and print files in reverse
+tac [OPTION]... [FILE]...
+Write each FILE to standard output, last line first.
+With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.
+Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
+-b, --before
+attach the separator before instead of after
+-r, --regex
+interpret the separator as a regular expression
+%
+gzip, gunzip, zcat - compress or expand files
+gunzip [ -acfhklLnNrtvV ] [-S suffix] [ name ...  ]
+zcat [ -fhLV ] [ name ...  ]
+Gzip reduces the size of the named files using Lempel-Ziv coding (LZ77).  Whenever possible, each file is
+replaced by one with the extension .gz, while keeping the same ownership modes, access  and  modification
+files are specified, or if a file name is "-", the standard input is compressed to the  standard  output.
+Gzip will only attempt to compress regular files.  In particular, it will ignore symbolic links.
+If  the  compressed file name is too long for its file system, gzip truncates it.  Gzip attempts to trun‐
+name  consists  of small parts only, the longest parts are truncated. For example, if file names are lim‐
+%
+vgck — check volume group metadata
+vgck checks LVM metadata for each named volume group for consistency.
+%
+lvextend — extend the size of a logical volume
+[-h|-?|--help] [-f|--force] [-i|--stripes Stripes [-I|--stripesize  StripeSize]]  {-l|--extents  [+]Logi‐
+calExtentsNumber[%{VG|LV|PVS|FREE|ORIGIN}] | -L|--size [+]LogicalVolumeSize[bBsSkKmMgGtTpPeE]} [-n|--nof‐
+sck] [--noudevsync] [-r|--resizefs] [--reportformat {basic|json}] [--use-policies] [-t|--test] [-v|--ver‐
+bose] LogicalVolumePath [PhysicalVolumePath[:PE[-PE]]...]
+lvextend  allows  you to extend the size of a logical volume.  Extension of snapshot logical volumes (see
+%
+grub-bios-setup - set up a device to boot using GRUB
+grub-bios-setup [OPTION...] DEVICE
+Set up images to boot from DEVICE.
+You should not normally run this program directly.  Use grub-install instead.
+-a, --allow-floppy
+make the drive also bootable as floppy (default for fdX devices). May break on some BIOSes.
+-b, --boot-image=FILE
+use FILE as the boot image [default=boot.img]
+-c, --core-image=FILE
+%
+catman - create or update the pre-formatted manual pages
+catman [-d?V] [-M path] [-C file] [section] ...
+catman  is  used to create an up to date set of pre-formatted manual pages known as cat pages.  Cat pages
+are generally much faster to display than the original manual pages, but  require  extra  storage  space.
+The  decision to support cat pages is that of the local administrator, who must provide suitable directo‐
+ries to contain them.
+The options available to catman are the manual page hierarchies and sections to pre-format.  The  default
+hierarchies  are  those specified as system hierarchies in the man-db configuration file, and the default
+sections are either the colon-delimited contents of the environment variable $MANSECT or the standard set
+compiled  into man if $MANSECT is undefined.  Supplying catman with a set of whitespace-delimited section
+names will override both of the above.
+%
+xzcmp, xzdiff, lzcmp, lzdiff - compare compressed files
+from which the compression format suffix has been stripped.  If two files are specified,  then  they  are
+served.
+The names lzcmp and lzdiff are provided for backward compatibility with LZMA Utils.
+%
+sprof - read and display shared object profiling data
+sprof [option]... shared-object-path [profile-data-path]
+The  sprof  command  displays a profiling summary for the shared object (shared library) specified as its
+first command-line argument.  The profiling summary is created using previously generated profiling  data
+in  the  (optional)  second command-line argument.  If the profiling data pathname is omitted, then sprof
+will attempt to deduce it using the soname of the shared object, looking for a file with the  name  <son‐
+ame>.profile in the current directory.
+The following command-line options specify the profile output to be produced:
+-c, --call-pairs
+Print  a  list of pairs of call paths for the interfaces exported by the shared object, along with
+%
+external-journal ] [ -E extended_options ] [ -z undo_file ] device
+use  a  journal, if the system has been shut down uncleanly without any errors, normally, after replaying
+the committed transactions  in the journal, the file system should  be  marked  as  clean.    Hence,  for
+indicates that further checking is required.
+-n  option is specified, and -c, -l, or -L options are not specified.   However, even if it is safe to do
+%
+dnssec-coverage - checks future DNSKEY coverage for a zone
+dnssec-coverage [-K directory] [-l length] [-f file] [-d DNSKEY TTL] [-m max TTL] [-r interval]
+[-c compilezone path] [-k] [-z] [zone...]
+dnssec-coverage verifies that the DNSSEC keys for a given zone or a set of zones have timing metadata set
+properly to ensure no future lapses in DNSSEC coverage.
+If zone is specified, then keys found in the key repository matching that zone are scanned, and an
+ordered list is generated of the events scheduled for that key (i.e., publication, activation,
+inactivation, deletion). The list of events is walked in order of occurrence. Warnings are generated if
+any event is scheduled which could cause the zone to enter a state in which validation failures might
+occur: for example, if the number of published or active keys for a given algorithm drops to zero, or if
+a key is deleted from the zone too soon after a new key is rolled, and cached data signed by the prior
+key has not had time to expire from resolver caches.
+%
+mkhomedir_helper {user} [umask [ path-to-skel ]]
+mkhomedir_helper is a helper program for the pam_mkhomedir module that creates home directories and
+populates them with contents of the specified skel directory.
+The helper is separated from the module to not require direct access from login SELinux domains to the
+contents of user home directories. The SELinux domain transition happens when the module is executing the
+mkhomedir_helper.
+The helper never touches home directories if they already exist.
+%
+patch - apply a diff file to an original
+patch [options] [originalfile [patchfile]]
+but usually just
+patch -pnum <patchfile
+patch  takes  a  patch  file  patchfile  containing a difference listing produced by the diff program and
+applies those differences to one or more  original  files,  producing  patched  versions.   Normally  the
+patched  versions are put in place of the originals.  Backups can be made; see the -b or --backup option.
+The names of the files to be patched are usually taken from the patch file, but if there's just one  file
+to be patched it can be specified on the command line as originalfile.
+Upon  startup, patch attempts to determine the type of the diff listing, unless overruled by a -c (--con‐
+%
+vgremove — remove a volume group
+vgremove allows you to remove one or more volume groups.  If one or more physical volumes in  the  volume
+group are lost, consider vgreduce --removemissing to make the volume group metadata consistent again.
+If  there  are logical volumes that exist in the volume group, a prompt will be given to confirm removal.
+You can override the prompt with -f.
+-f, --force
+%
+afmtodit - create font files for use with groff -Tps and -Tpdf
+afmtodit [ -ckmnsvx ] [ -a n ] [ -d desc_file ] [ -e enc_file ] [ -f internal_name ] [ -i n ]
+[ -o out_file ] afm_file map_file font
+The whitespace between a command line option and its argument is optional.
+afmtodit creates a font file for use with groff, grops, and gropdf.  afmtodit is  written  in  perl;  you
+afm_file is the AFM (Adobe Font Metric) file for the font.
+map_file  is  a  file that says which groff character names map onto each PostScript character name; this
+file should contain a sequence of lines of the form
+%
+an unmounted file system located on device.  If the filesystem is mounted, it can be used to  expand  the
+size of the mounted filesystem, assuming the kernel and the file system supports on-line resizing.  (Mod‐
+systems will require the use of file systems with the resize_inode feature enabled.)
+The  size  parameter  specifies the requested new size of the filesystem.  If no units are specified, the
+units of the size parameter shall be the filesystem blocksize of the filesystem.   Optionally,  the  size
+larger  than  the size of the partition.  If size parameter is not specified, it will default to the size
+%
+systemd-escape - Escape strings for usage in system unit names
+to escape and to undo escaping of strings.
+The command takes any number of strings on the command line, and will process them individually, one
+after another. It will output them separated by spaces to stdout.
+By default, this command will escape the strings passed, unless --unescape is passed which results in the
+inverse operation being applied. If --mangle is given, a special mode of escaping is applied instead,
+which assumes the string is already escaped but will escape everything that appears obviously
+non-escaped.
+%
+gprof - display call graph profile data
+gprof [ -[abcDhilLrsTvwxyz] ] [ -[ACeEfFJnNOpPqQZ][name] ]
+[ -I dirs ] [ -d[num] ] [ -k from/to ]
+[ -m min-count ] [ -R map_file ] [ -t table-length ]
+[ --[no-]annotated-source[=name] ]
+[ --[no-]exec-counts[=name] ]
+[ --[no-]flat-profile[=name] ] [ --[no-]graph[=name] ]
+[ --[no-]time=name] [ --all-lines ] [ --brief ]
+[ --debug[=level] ] [ --function-ordering ]
+[ --file-ordering map_file ] [ --directory-path=dirs ]
+[ --display-unused-functions ] [ --file-format=name ]
+[ --file-info ] [ --help ] [ --line ] [ --inline-file-names ]
+[ --min-count=n ] [ --no-static ] [ --print-path ]
+[ --separate-files ] [ --static-call-graph ] [ --sum ]
+[ --table-length=len ] [ --traditional ] [ --version ]
+%
+lvremove — remove a logical volume
+[--reportformat {basic|json}] [-S|--select Selection] [-t|--test] [-v|--verbose] [--version] [-f|--force]
+lvremove  removes  one  or  more logical volumes.  Confirmation will be requested before deactivating any
+active logical volume prior to removal.  Logical volumes cannot be deactivated or removed while they  are
+open (e.g. if they contain a mounted filesystem).  Removing an origin logical volume will also remove all
+dependent snapshots.
+If the logical volume is clustered then it must be deactivated on all nodes in the cluster before it  can
+be removed. A single lvchange command issued from one node can do this.
+If  the configuration setting metadata/record_lvs_history is enabled and the logical volume being removed
+%
+blkid - locate/print block device attributes
+blkid -L label | -U uuid
+blkid [-dghlv] [-c file] [-o format] [-s tag]
+blkid -p [-O offset] [-o format] [-S size] [-s tag]
+[-n list] [-u list] device ...
+blkid -i [-o format] [-s tag] device ...
+mine the type of content (e.g. filesystem or swap) that a block device holds,  and  also  the  attributes
+%
+setarch - change reported architecture in new program environment and set personality flags
+setarch arch [options] [program [argument...]]
+arch [options] [program [argument...]]
+setarch --list|-h|-V
+various personality options.  The default program is /bin/sh.
+--list List  the  architectures that setarch knows about.  Whether setarch can actually set each of these
+architectures depends on the running kernel.
+%
+Generate Makefile.in for configure from Makefile.am.
+Operation modes:
+--help print this help, then exit
+--version
+print version number, then exit
+-v, --verbose
+verbosely list files processed
+%
+sh — shell, the standard command language interpreter
+sh [−abCefhimnuvx] [−o option]... [+abCefhimnuvx] [+o option]...
+[command_file [argument...]]
+sh −c [−abCefhimnuvx] [−o option]... [+abCefhimnuvx] [+o option]...
+command_string [command_name [argument...]]
+sh −s [−abCefhimnuvx] [−o option]... [+abCefhimnuvx] [+o option]...
+[argument...]
+%
+dd - convert and copy a file
+dd [OPERAND]...
+dd OPTION
+Copy a file, converting and formatting according to the operands.
+bs=BYTES
+read and write up to BYTES bytes at a time
+cbs=BYTES
+convert BYTES bytes at a time
+conv=CONVS
+convert the file as per the comma separated symbol list
+%
+gio-querymodules - GIO module cache creation
+gio-querymodules {DIRECTORY...}
+implemented extension points for each module that has been found. It is used by GIO at runtime to avoid
+opening all modules just to find out which extension points they are implementing.
+GIO modules are usually installed in the gio/modules subdirectory of libdir.
+%
+mkfs - build a Linux filesystem
+mkfs [options] [-t type] [fs-options] device [size]
+mkfs is used to build a Linux filesystem on a device, usually a hard disk partition.  The device argument
+tem.  The size argument is the number of blocks to be used for the filesystem.
+In  actuality,  mkfs  is  simply  a front-end for the various filesystem builders (mkfs.fstype) available
+under Linux.  The filesystem-specific builder is searched for via your  PATH  environment  setting  only.
+Please see the filesystem-specific builder manual pages for further details.
+%
+[ Certificate-usage [ Selector [ Matching-type ] ] ]
+ldns-dane -h
+ldns-dane -v
+In  the  first  form: A TLS connection to name:port is established.  The TLSA resource record(s) for name
+are used to authenticate the connection.
+In the second form: The TLSA record(s) are read from tlsafile and used to authenticate  the  TLS  service
+%
+gpm-root - a default handler for gpm, used to draw menus on the root window
+gpm-root [ options ]
+The  program  gpm-root  is designed to handle Control-Mouse events to draw menus on the background of the
+current tty. The actual menus are described by a configuration file in the user's home directory.
+screen handling capabilities required by the program.
+The program uses the files /dev/vcs* to draw to the console screen.  These are available only from kernel
+dump/restore capability.
+%
+mtrace - interpret the malloc trace log
+mtrace [option]... [binary] mtracedata
+mtrace is a Perl script used to interpret and provide human readable output of the trace log contained in
+mtrace  also  contains  the source file name with line number information for problem locations (assuming
+that binary was compiled with debugging information).
+--help Print help and exit.
+--version
+%
+lslocks - list local system locks
+lslocks [options]
+lslocks lists information about all the currently held file locks in a Linux system.
+-J, --json
+Use JSON output format.
+-n, --noheadings
+Do not print a header line.
+-o, --output list
+%
+xzmore, lzmore - view xz or lzma compressed (text) files
+xzmore [file...]
+lzmore [file...]
+time on a soft-copy terminal.
+To use a pager other than the default more, set environment variable PAGER to the  name  of  the  desired
+program.  The name lzmore is provided for backward compatibility with LZMA Utils.
+e or q When the prompt --More--(Next file: file) is printed, this command causes xzmore to exit.
+s      When  the prompt --More--(Next file: file) is printed, this command causes xzmore to skip the next
+file and continue.
+%
+Prompts  the  user  for  a passphrase and inserts it into the specified keyring.  If no keyring is
+does not.
+%
+hpftodit [ -adqsv ] [ -in ] tfm_file map_file font
+It is possible to have whitespace between the -i option and its parameter.
+for  the  font;  Intellifont  and  TrueType  TFM  files  are supported, but symbol set TFM files are not.
+map_file is a file giving the groff names for characters in the font;  this  file  should  consist  of  a
+sequence of lines of the form:
+where  m  is  a decimal integer giving the MSL number of the character, u is a hexadecimal integer giving
+%
+dirmngr - CRL and OCSP daemon
+dirmngr [options] command [args]
+versions it is also used as a server for managing and downloading certificate revocation lists (CRLs) for
+invoked internally by gpg, gpgsm, or via the gpg-connect-agent tool.
+Commands are not distinguished from options except for the fact that only one command is allowed.
+--version
+mand.
+%
+grub-mklayout - generate a GRUB keyboard layout file
+by GRUB's keymap command.
+Generate GRUB keyboard layout from Linux console one.
+-i, --input=FILE
+set input filename. Default is STDIN
+-o, --output=FILE
+set output filename. Default is STDOUT
+%
+mdig - DNS pipelined lookup utility
+[-x addr] [plusopt...]
+mdig {-h}
+mdig [@server] {global-opt...} {{local-opt...} {query}...}
+mdig is a multiple/pipelined query version of dig: instead of waiting for a response after sending each
+query, it begins by sending all queries. Responses are displayed in the order in which they are received,
+not in the order the corresponding queries were sent.
+mdig options are a subset of the dig options, and are divided into "anywhere options" which can occur
+anywhere, "global options" which must occur before the query name (or they are ignored with a warning),
+%
+grub-script-check - check grub.cfg for syntax errors
+grub-script-check [OPTION...] [PATH]
+Checks GRUB script configuration file for syntax errors.
+-v, --verbose
+print verbose messages.
+-?, --help
+give this help list
+--usage
+give a short usage message
+%
+captoinfo - convert a termcap description into a terminfo description
+captoinfo looks in each given text file for termcap descriptions.  For each one found, an equivalent ter‐
+minfo description is written to standard output.  Termcap tc capabilities are translated directly to ter‐
+minfo use capabilities.
+If no file is given, then the environment variable TERMCAP is used for the filename or entry.  If TERMCAP
+is a full pathname to a file, only the terminal whose name is specified in the environment variable  TERM
+is  extracted  from  that  file.   If  the  environment  variable  TERMCAP  is  not  set,  then  the file
+/usr/share/terminfo is read.
+-v   print out tracing information on standard error as the program runs.
+%
+tee - read from standard input and write to standard output and files
+tee [OPTION]... [FILE]...
+Copy standard input to each FILE, and also to standard output.
+-a, --append
+append to the given FILEs, do not overwrite
+-i, --ignore-interrupts
+ignore interrupt signals
+-p     diagnose errors writing to non pipes
+--output-error[=MODE]
+%
+netcap - a program to see capabilities
+netcap
+netcap  is  a  program that prints out a report of process capabilities. If the application is using tcp,
+udp, raw, or packet family of sockets AND has any capabilities, it will be in the report. If the  process
+has  partial capabilities, it is further examined to see if it has an open-ended bounding set. If this is
+found to be true, a '+' symbol is added.
+Some directories in the /proc file system are readonly by root. The program will try to access and report
+what it can. But if nothing comes out, try changing to the root user and re-run this program.
+%
+thin_restore - restore thin provisioning metadata file to device or file
+thin_restore [options] -i {device|file} -o {device|file}
+thin_restore  restores  thin  provisioning metadata created by the respective device-mapper target dumped
+to  another  device  or  file.   If  restored to a metadata device , the metadata can be processed by the
+device-mapper target.
+-q, --quiet
+Suppress output messages, return only exit code.
+-i, --input {device|file}
+%
+setarch - change reported architecture in new program environment and set personality flags
+setarch arch [options] [program [argument...]]
+arch [options] [program [argument...]]
+setarch --list|-h|-V
+various personality options.  The default program is /bin/sh.
+--list List  the  architectures that setarch knows about.  Whether setarch can actually set each of these
+architectures depends on the running kernel.
+%
+dbus-launch - Utility to start a message bus from a shell script
+dbus-launch [--version] [--help] [--sh-syntax] [--csh-syntax] [--auto-syntax] [--binary-syntax]
+[PROGRAM] [ARGS...]
+The dbus-launch command is used to start a session bus instance of dbus-daemon from a shell script. It
+would normally be called from a user's login scripts. Unlike the daemon itself, dbus-launch exits, so
+backticks or the $() construct can be used to read information from dbus-launch.
+With no arguments, dbus-launch will launch a session bus instance and print the address and PID of that
+instance to standard output.
+the appropriate environment variables so the specified program can find the bus, and then execute the
+%
+telnetd - Telnet server
+telnetd [OPTION...]
+DARPA telnet protocol server
+-D, --debug[=LEVEL]
+set debugging level
+-E, --exec-login=STRING
+set program to be executed instead of /usr/bin/login
+-h, --no-hostinfo
+do not print host information before login has been completed
+%
+ionice - set or get process I/O scheduling class and priority
+ionice [-c class] [-n level] [-t] -p PID...
+ionice [-c class] [-n level] [-t] -P PGID...
+ionice [-c class] [-n level] [-t] -u UID...
+ionice [-c class] [-n level] [-t] command [argument...]
+-p is given, ionice will query the current I/O scheduling class and priority for that process.
+When command is given, ionice will run this command with the given arguments.  If no class is  specified,
+As of this writing, a process can be in one of three scheduling classes:
+%
+tcpdump - dump traffic on a network
+tcpdump [ -AbdDefhHIJKlLnNOpqRStuUvxX# ] [ -B buffer_size ]
+[ -c count ]
+[ -C file_size ] [ -G rotate_seconds ] [ -F file ]
+[ -i interface ] [ -j tstamp_type ] [ -m module ] [ -M secret ]
+[ --number ] [ -Q in|out|inout ]
+[ -r file ] [ -V file ] [ -s snaplen ] [ -T type ] [ -w file ]
+[ -W filecount ]
+[ -E spi@ipaddr algo:secret,...  ]
+[ -y datalinktype ] [ -z postrotate-command ] [ -Z user ]
+[ --time-stamp-precision=tstamp_precision ]
+[ --immediate-mode ] [ --version ]
+[ expression ]
+%
+lex — generate programs for lexical tasks (DEVELOPMENT)
+lex [−t] [−n|−v] [file...]
+The  lex  utility shall generate C programs to be used in lexical processing of character input, and that
+can be used as an interface to yacc.  The C programs shall be generated from lex source code and  conform
+to  the ISO C standard, without depending on any undefined, unspecified, or implementation-defined behav‐
+documented  by  the  implementation. Usually, the lex utility shall write the program it generates to the
+file lex.yy.c; the state of this file is unspecified if lex exits with a non-zero exit  status.  See  the
+%
+chgrp - change group ownership
+chgrp [OPTION]... GROUP FILE...
+chgrp [OPTION]... --reference=RFILE FILE...
+Change  the  group  of  each  FILE  to GROUP.  With --reference, change the group of each FILE to that of
+RFILE.
+-c, --changes
+like verbose but report only when a change is made
+-f, --silent, --quiet
+suppress most error messages
+-v, --verbose
+%
+named-checkzone, named-compilezone - zone file validity checking or converting tool
+named-checkzone [-d] [-h] [-j] [-q] [-v] [-c class] [-f format] [-F format] [-J filename] [-i mode]
+[-k mode] [-m mode] [-M mode] [-n mode] [-l ttl] [-L serial] [-o filename] [-r mode]
+[-s style] [-S mode] [-t directory] [-T mode] [-w directory] [-D] [-W mode] {zonename}
+{filename}
+named-compilezone [-d] [-j] [-q] [-v] [-c class] [-C mode] [-f format] [-F format] [-J filename]
+[-i mode] [-k mode] [-m mode] [-n mode] [-l ttl] [-L serial] [-r mode] [-s style]
+[-t directory] [-T mode] [-w directory] [-D] [-W mode] {-o filename} {zonename}
+{filename}
+named-checkzone checks the syntax and integrity of a zone file. It performs the same checks as named does
+into a name server.
+%
+grub-mkfont - make GRUB font files
+-a, --force-autohint
+force autohint
+-b, --bold
+convert to bold font
+-c, --asce=NUM
+set font ascent
+%
+key.dns_resolver - Upcall for request-key to handle dns_resolver keys
+/sbin/key.dns_resolver <key>
+/sbin/key.dns_resolver -D [-v] [-v] <keydesc> <calloutinfo>
+and AFS) want to perform a hostname lookup and the kernel does not have the key cached.  It is not  ordi‐
+narily intended to be called directly.
+It  can  be  called in debugging mode to test its functionality by passing a -D flag on the command line.
+For this to work, the key description and the callout information must be  supplied.   Verbosity  can  be
+increased by supplying one or more -v flags.
+ERRORS
+All errors will be logged to the syslog.
+%
+newusers - update and create new users in batch
+newusers [options] [file]
+The newusers command reads a file (or the standard input by default) and uses this information to update
+a set of existing users or to create new users. Each line is in the same format as the standard password
+pw_name:pw_passwd:pw_uid:pw_gid:pw_gecos:pw_dir:pw_shell
+pw_name
+It can be the name of a new user or the name of an existing user (or a user created before by
+%
+swaplabel - print or change the label or UUID of a swap area
+swaplabel [-L label] [-U UUID] device
+swaplabel  will  display  or  change  the label or UUID of a swap partition located on device (or regular
+file).
+If the optional arguments -L and -U are not given, swaplabel will simply display  the  current  swap-area
+label and UUID of device.
+If  an  optional  argument is present, then swaplabel will change the appropriate value on device.  These
+label or UUID on an actively used swap device.
+%
+find - search for files in a directory hierarchy
+find [-H] [-L] [-P] [-D debugopts] [-Olevel] [starting-point...] [expression]
+given starting-point by evaluating the given expression from left to right, according  to  the  rules  of
+precedence (see section OPERATORS), until the outcome is known (the left hand side is false for and oper‐
+ations, true for or), at which point find moves on to the next file name.  If no starting-point is speci‐
+fied, `.' is assumed.
+If  you  are using find in an environment where security is important (for example if you are using it to
+search directories that are writable by other users), you should read the "Security Considerations" chap‐
+ter  of the findutils documentation, which is called Finding Files and comes with findutils.   That docu‐
+ful source of information.
+%
+xzgrep - search compressed files for a regular expression
+xzgrep [grep_options] [-e] pattern file...
+xzegrep ...
+xzfgrep ...
+lzgrep ...
+lzegrep ...
+lzfgrep ...
+%
+etags, ctags - generate tag file for Emacs, vi
+etags [-aCDGIQRVh] [-i file] [-l language]
+[-o tagfile] [-r regexp] [--parse-stdin=file]
+[--append] [--no-defines] [--globals] [--no-globals] [--no-line-directive] [--include=file]
+[--ignore-indentation] [--language=language] [--members] [--no-members] [--output=tagfile]
+[--class-qualify] [--regex=regexp] [--no-regex] [--help] [--version] file ...
+ctags [-aCdgIQRVh] [-BtTuvwx] [-l language]
+[-o tagfile] [-r regexp] [--parse-stdin=file]
+[--append] [--backward-search] [--cxref] [--no-defines] [--globals] [--no-globals] [--no-line-directive]
+[--ignore-indentation] [--language=language] [--members] [--no-members] [--class-qualify]
+[--output=tagfile] [--regex=regexp] [--update] [--help] [--version] file ...
+%
+pcregrep - a grep with Perl-compatible regular expressions.
+pcregrep  searches  files  for character patterns, in the same way as other grep commands do, but it uses
+the PCRE regular expression library to support patterns that are compatible with the regular  expressions
+full description of the syntax and semantics of the regular expressions that PCRE supports.
+Patterns, whether supplied on the command line or in a separate file, are given without  delimiters.  For
+example:
+pcregrep Thursday /etc/motd
+%
+xzless, lzless - view xz or lzma compressed (text) files
+xzless [file...]
+lzless [file...]
+xzless  is a filter that displays text from compressed files to a terminal.  It works on files compressed
+The command named lzless is provided for backward compatibility with LZMA Utils.
+ENVIRONMENT
+%
+pvscan — scan all disks for physical volumes
+ingfailure] [-e|--exported] [-n|--novolumegroup] [--reportformat {basic|json}] [-s|--short] [-u|--uuid]
+pvscan  [-d|--debug]   [-h|--help]   --cache   [-a|--activate   ay]   [-b|--background]   [--reportformat
+{basic|json}] [--major major --minor minor | DevicePath | major:minor]...
+pvscan scans all supported LVM block devices in the system for physical volumes.
+Scanning with lvmetad
+Scanning  disks  is  required  to  read LVM metadata and identify LVM PVs.  Once read, lvmetad caches the
+%
+[--reportformat {basic|json}] [--setphysicalvolumesize size] PhysicalVolume [PhysicalVolume...]
+allocated on it.
+--setphysicalvolumesize size
+Overrides  the  automatically-detected  size  of  the PV.  Use with care, or prior to reducing the
+physical size of the device.
+%
+ntptrace - Trace peers of an NTP server
+ntptrace [-flags] [-flag [value]] [--option-name[[=| ]value]] [host]
+ntptrace  is  a  perl script that uses the ntpq utility program to follow the chain of NTP servers from a
+given host back to the primary time source. For ntptrace to work properly, each  of  these  servers  must
+If given no arguments, ntptrace starts with localhost. Here is an example of the output from ntptrace:
+On  each  line,  the fields are (left to right): the host name, the host stratum, the time offset between
+%
+findfs - find a filesystem by label or UUID
+findfs  will  search the block devices in the system looking for a filesystem or partition with specified
+tag. The currently supported tags are:
+LABEL=<label>
+Specifies filesystem label.
+UUID=<uuid>
+Specifies filesystem UUID.
+PARTUUID=<uuid>
+%
+kpasswd - change a user's Kerberos password
+kpasswd [principal]
+The  kpasswd  command  is  used to change a Kerberos principal's password.  kpasswd first prompts for the
+current Kerberos password, then prompts the user twice for the new password, and the password is changed.
+If the principal is governed by a policy that specifies the length and/or  number  of  character  classes
+required  in  the new password, the new password must conform to the policy.  (The five character classes
+principal
+Change the password for the Kerberos principal principal.  Otherwise, kpasswd uses  the  principal
+name  from  an existing ccache if there is one; if not, the principal is derived from the identity
+%
+pvdisplay - display attributes of a physical volume
+ure]  [--ignoreskippedcluster]   [--maps]   [--nosuffix]   [--reportformat   {basic|json}]   [-s|--short]
+[-S|--select  Selection]  [--units  hsbkmgtHKMGT] [-v[v]|--verbose [--verbose]] [--version] [PhysicalVol‐
+umePath...]
+[--reportformat   {basic|json}]   [--separator  Separator]  [--unbuffered]  [--units  hHbBsSkKmMgGtTpPeE]
+[-v[v]|--verbose [--verbose]] [--version] [PhysicalVolumePath...]
+pvdisplay allows you to see the attributes of one or more physical volumes  like  size,  physical  extent
+size, space used for the volume group descriptor area and so on.
+%
+nroff - emulate nroff command with groff
+nroff [-CchipStUvwW] [-dcs] [-Mdir] [-mname] [-nnum] [-olist] [-rcn] [-Tname] [file ...]
+nroff --help
+nroff -v | --version
+devices accepted by nroff to select the output encoding emitted by grotty, groff's TTY output device.  If
+neither  the  GROFF_TYPESETTER  environment  variable nor the -T command line option (which overrides the
+environment variable) specifies a (valid) device, nroff checks the current locale  to  select  a  default
+output  device.   It first tries the locale program, then the environment variables LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and
+LANG, and finally the LESSCHARSET environment variable.
+The -h and -c options are equivalent to grotty's options -h (using tabs in the output) and -c (using  the
+old  output  scheme  instead  of  SGR  escape sequences).  The -d, -C, -i, -M, -m, -n, -o, -r, -w, and -W
+%
+With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.
+-b, --binary
+read in binary mode
+-c, --check
+--tag  create a BSD-style checksum
+%
+sudoreplay — replay sudo session logs
+sudoreplay [-h] [-d dir] [-f filter] [-m num] [-s num] ID
+sudoreplay [-h] [-d dir] -l [search expression]
+sudoreplay plays back or lists the output logs created by sudo.  When replaying, sudoreplay can play the
+line options.
+tern matching the iolog_file option in the sudoers file.  When a command is run via sudo with log_output
+also be determined using sudoreplay's list mode.
+%
+grub-probe - probe device information for GRUB
+grub-probe [OPTION...] [OPTION]... [PATH|DEVICE]
+Probe device information for a given path (or device, if the -d option is given).
+-0     separate items in output using ASCII NUL characters
+-d, --device
+given argument is a system device, not a path
+-m, --device-map=FILE
+use FILE as the device map [default=//boot/grub/device.map]
+-t, --target=TARGET
+%
+numactl - Control NUMA policy for processes or shared memory
+numactl [ --all ] [ --interleave nodes ] [ --preferred node ] [ --membind nodes ] [ --cpunodebind nodes ]
+[ --physcpubind cpus ] [ --localalloc ] [--] command {arguments ...}
+numactl --show
+numactl --hardware
+numactl [ --huge ] [ --offset offset ] [ --shmmode shmmode ] [ --length length ] [ --strict ]
+[ --shmid id ] --shm shmkeyfile | --file tmpfsfile
+[ --touch ] [ --dump ] [ --dump-nodes ] memory policy
+numactl runs processes with a specific NUMA scheduling or memory placement policy.  The policy is set for
+command and inherited by all of its children.  In addition it can set persistent policy for shared memory
+segments or files.
+Use -- before command if using command options that could be confused with numactl options.
+%
+logger - enter messages into the system log
+logger [options] [message]
+logger makes entries in the system log.
+When  the  optional message argument is present, it is written to the log.  If it is not present, and the
+-f option is not given either, then standard input is logged.
+-d, --udp
+Use datagrams (UDP) only.  By default the connection is  tried  to  the  syslog  port  defined  in
+-e, --skip-empty
+%
+sclient remotehost
+sclient  is  a  sample  application,  primarily useful for testing purposes.  It contacts a sample server
+MIT
+%
+cache_dump - dump cache metadata from device or file to standard output
+cache_dump [options] {device|file}
+cache_dump  dumps  binary cache metadata created by the device-mapper cache target on a device or file to
+standard output for analysis or postprocessing in XML format.  XML formated  metadata  can  be  fed  into
+device-mapper target) or file.
+-r, --repair
+Repair the metadata whilst dumping it.
+-h, --help
+%
+python - an interpreted, interactive, object-oriented programming language
+python [ -B ] [ -b ] [ -d ] [ -E ] [ -h ] [ -i ] [ -I ]
+[ -m module-name ] [ -q ] [ -O ] [ -OO ] [ -s ] [ -S ] [ -u ]
+[ -v ] [ -V ] [ -W argument ] [ -x ] [ [ -X option ] -?  ]
+[ -c command | script | - ] [ arguments ]
+Python  is  an  interpreted,  interactive,  object-oriented programming language that combines remarkable
+power with very clear syntax.  For an introduction to programming in Python,  see  the  Python  Tutorial.
+The  Python  Library  Reference  documents built-in and standard types, constants, functions and modules.
+Finally, the Python Reference Manual describes the syntax and semantics of the core language in  (perhaps
+installed on your system as well.)
+Python's basic power can be extended with your own modules written in C or C++.   On  most  systems  such
+%
+glib-compile-resources - GLib resource compiler
+glib-compile-resources [OPTION...] {FILE}
+glib-compile-resources reads the resource description from FILE and the files that it references and
+creates a binary resource bundle that is suitable for use with the GResource API. The resulting bundle is
+then written out as-is, or as C source for linking into an application.
+The XML resource files normally have the filename extension .gresource.xml. For a detailed description of
+the XML file format, see the GResource documentation.
+-h, --help
+Print help and exit
+%
+tar - an archiving utility
+Traditional usage
+tar {A|c|d|r|t|u|x}[GnSkUWOmpsMBiajJzZhPlRvwo] [ARG...]
+%
+grub-kbdcomp - generate a GRUB keyboard layout file
+used by GRUB's keymap command.
+Make GRUB keyboard layout file.
+-h, --help
+print this message and exit
+-V, --version
+print the version information and exit
+%
+vgextend — add physical volumes to a volume group
+ume group to extend it in size. Moreover, it allows you to re-add a physical volume that has gone missing
+previously,  due to a transient device failure, without re-initialising it. Use vgextend --restoremissing
+to that effect.
+%
+look - display lines beginning with a given string
+look [options] string [file]
+The  look utility displays any lines in file which contain string.  As look performs a binary search, the
+with).
+If  file  is not specified, the file /usr/share/dict/words is used, only alphanumeric characters are com‐
+-a, --alternative
+Use the alternative dictionary file.
+%
+repo-add - package database maintenance utility
+repo-add [options] <path-to-db> <package|delta> [<package|delta> ...]
+repo-remove [options] <path-to-db> <packagename|delta> [<packagename|delta> ...]
+repo-add and repo-remove are two scripts to help build a package database for packages built with
+repo-add will update a package database by reading a built package or package delta file. Multiple
+packages and/or deltas to add can be specified on the command line.
+If a matching “.sig” file is found alongside a package file, the signature will automatically be embedded
+into the database.
+%
+Translate Pod file(s) to Texinfo.  There are two basic modes of operation.  First, by default, each pod
+is translated to a standalone Texinfo manual.
+Second, if "--base-level" is set higher than 0, each pod is translated to a file suitable for @include,
+and one more file with all the @includes is generated, intended to be @included in turn within a hand-
+written top-level file.
+--appendix-sections
+Use appendix sectioning commands (@appendix, ...) instead of the default numbered sectioning Texinfo
+@-commands (@chapter, @section, ...).
+%
+bison - GNU Project parser generator (yacc replacement)
+bison [OPTION]... FILE
+designed for yacc.
+Input files should follow the yacc convention of ending in .y.  Unlike yacc, the generated files  do  not
+have fixed names, but instead use the prefix of the input file.  Moreover, if you need to put C++ code in
+the input file, you can end his name by a C++-like extension (.ypp or .y++), then bison will follow  your
+extension  to  name  the  output  file  (.cpp  or  .c++).  For instance, a grammar description file named
+parse.yxx would produce the generated parser in a file named parse.tab.cxx, instead of yacc's y.tab.c  or
+old Bison version's parse.tab.c.
+%
+aclocal [OPTION]...
+--automake-acdir=DIR
+--system-acdir=DIR
+directory holding third-party system-wide files
+%
+dir - list directory contents
+dir [OPTION]... [FILE]...
+List information about the FILEs (the current directory by default).  Sort entries alphabetically if none
+of -cftuvSUX nor --sort is specified.
+Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
+-a, --all
+do not ignore entries starting with .
+-A, --almost-all
+do not list implied . and ..
+%
+xfs_growfs, xfs_info - expand an XFS filesystem
+xfs_growfs  [  -dilnrx  ]  [ -D size ] [ -e rtextsize ] [ -L size ] [ -m maxpct ] [ -t mtab ] [ -R size ]
+mount-point
+xfs_growfs -V
+xfs_info [ -t mtab ] mount-point
+xfs_info -V
+The existing contents of the filesystem are undisturbed, and the added space becomes available for  addi‐
+tional file storage.
+%
+Reads  a  grap  program as input; produces an image file (by default in Portable Network Graphics format)
+The output image will be a black-on-white graphic clipped to the smallest possible bounding box that con‐
+it  a  border,  set  the  background  transparent, set the image's pixel density, or perform other useful
+transformations.
+%
+blockdev - call block device ioctls from the command line
+blockdev [-q] [-v] command [command...] device [device...]
+blockdev --report [device...]
+The utility blockdev allows one to call block device ioctls from the command line.
+-V     Print version and exit.
+-q     Be quiet.
+-v     Be verbose.
+--report
+%
+dmeventd — Device-mapper event daemon
+dmeventd [-d [-d [-d]]] [-f] [-h] [-l] [-R] [-V] [-?]
+dmeventd  is  the  event  monitoring  daemon for device-mapper devices.  Library plugins can register and
+carry out actions triggered when particular events occur.
+LVM PLUGINS
+Mirror
+Raid
+Snapshot
+%
+zdump - timezone dumper
+zdump [ --version ] [ --help ] [ -v ] [ -c [loyear,]hiyear ] [ zonename ... ]
+Zdump prints the current time in each zonename named on the command line.
+These options are available:
+--version
+Output version information and exit.
+--help Output short usage and exit.
+-v     For  each zonename on the command line, print the time at the lowest possible time value, the time
+one day after the lowest possible time value, the times both one second before and exactly at each
+%
+mand [command_options]
+key stash file or perform live rollover of the master key.
+%
+setarch - change reported architecture in new program environment and set personality flags
+setarch arch [options] [program [argument...]]
+arch [options] [program [argument...]]
+setarch --list|-h|-V
+various personality options.  The default program is /bin/sh.
+--list List  the  architectures that setarch knows about.  Whether setarch can actually set each of these
+architectures depends on the running kernel.
+%
+filecap - a program to see capabilities
+filecap  is a program that prints out a report of programs with file based capabilities. If a file is not
+in the report or there is no report at all, no capabilities were found. For expedience, the default is to
+check  only  the  directories in the PATH environmental variable. If the -a command line option is given,
+then all directories will be checked. If a directory is passed, it will recursively check that directory.
+If  a  path  to a file is given, it will only check that file. If the path to the file includes capabili‐
+ties, then they are written to the file.
+environmental variable is used to show you capabilities on files you are likely to execute.
+%
+su - run a command with substitute user and group ID
+su [options] [-] [user [argument...]]
+su allows to run commands with a substitute user and group ID.
+When called without arguments, su defaults to running an interactive shell as root.
+For  backward compatibility, su defaults to not change the current directory and to only set the environ‐
+to always use the --login option (instead of its shortcut -) to avoid side effects caused by mixing envi‐
+ronments.
+options  found  in other su implementations, such as support for a wheel group, have to be configured via
+%
+fakeroot - run a command in an environment faking root privileges for file manipulation
+fakeroot  [-l|--lib library] [--faked faked-binary] [-i load-file] [-s save-file] [-u|--unknown-is-real ]
+[-b|--fd-base ] [-h|--help ] [-v|--version ] [--] [command]
+fakeroot runs a command in an environment wherein it appears to have root privileges for  file  manipula‐
+root permissions/ownership.  Without fakeroot one would need to have root privileges to create  the  con‐
+stituent  files of the archives with the correct permissions and ownership, and then pack them up, or one
+would have to construct the archives directly, without using the archiver.
+simulate the effect the real library functions would have had, had the user really been root. These wrap‐
+per functions are in a shared library /usr/lib/*/libfakeroot-*.so or similar location on  your  platform.
+%
+lvmchange — change attributes of the logical volume manager
+lvmchange
+%
+cp - copy files and directories
+cp [OPTION]... [-T] SOURCE DEST
+cp [OPTION]... SOURCE... DIRECTORY
+cp [OPTION]... -t DIRECTORY SOURCE...
+Copy SOURCE to DEST, or multiple SOURCE(s) to DIRECTORY.
+Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
+-a, --archive
+same as -dR --preserve=all
+--attributes-only
+don't copy the file data, just the attributes
+%
+setpci - configure PCI devices
+setpci [options] devices operations...
+setpci is a utility for querying and configuring PCI devices.
+All numbers are entered in hexadecimal notation.
+Root  privileges  are  necessary for almost all operations, excluding reads of the standard header of the
+General options
+-v     Tells setpci to be verbose and display detailed information about configuration space accesses.
+%
+A summary of options is included below.
+-M path
+Specify path as MANPATH.
+-k keyword
+%
+fsck.btrfs - do nothing, successfully
+fsck.btrfs [-aApy] [<device>...]
+fsck.btrfs is a type of utility that should exist for any filesystem and is called during system setup
+set fs_passno to 0.
+If you wish to check the consistency of a BTRFS filesystem or repair a damaged filesystem, see
+option (use with care!).
+%
+migspeed - Test the speed of page migration
+migspeed -p pages from-nodes to-nodes
+migspeed  attempts  to move a sample of pages from the indicated node to the target node and measures the
+time it takes to perform the move.
+-p pages
+%
+era_dump - dump era metadata from device or file to standard output
+era_dump [options] {device|file}
+era_dump  dumps  binary era metadata created by the device-mapper era target on a device or file to stan‐
+dard output for analysis or postprocessing in  XML  format.   XML  formated  metadata  can  be  fed  into
+device-mapper target) or file.
+-r, --repair
+Repair the metadata whilst dumping it.
+-h, --help
+%
+xzgrep - search compressed files for a regular expression
+xzgrep [grep_options] [-e] pattern file...
+xzegrep ...
+xzfgrep ...
+lzgrep ...
+lzegrep ...
+lzfgrep ...
+%
+ftp - File Transfer Protocol client.
+ftp [OPTION...] [HOST [PORT]]
+Remote file transfer.
+-6, --ipv6
+contact IPv6 hosts
+-A, --active
+enable active mode transfer
+%
+strings - print the strings of printable characters in files.
+strings [-afovV] [-min-len]
+[-n min-len] [--bytes=min-len]
+[-t radix] [--radix=radix]
+[-e encoding] [--encoding=encoding]
+[-] [--all] [--print-file-name]
+[-T bfdname] [--target=bfdname]
+[-w] [--include-all-whitespace]
+[-s] [--output-separatorsep_string]
+[--help] [--version] file...
+long (or the number given with the options below) and are followed by an unprintable character.
+%
+pcre-config - program to return PCRE configuration
+pcre-config [--prefix] [--exec-prefix] [--version] [--libs]
+[--cflags] [--cflags-posix]
+pcre-config returns the configuration of the installed PCRE libraries and the options required to compile
+respectively,  and  are  not  available  if only one of those libraries has been built. If an unavailable
+option is encountered, the "usage" information is output.
+%
+glib-genmarshal - C code marshaller generation utility for GLib closures
+glib-genmarshal [OPTION...] [FILE...]
+glib-genmarshal is a small utility that generates C code marshallers for callback functions of the
+GClosure mechanism in the GObject sublibrary of GLib. The marshaller functions have a standard signature,
+they get passed in the invoking closure, an array of value structures holding the callback function
+parameters and a value structure for the return value of the callback. The marshaller is then responsible
+to call the respective C code function of the closure with all the parameters on the stack and to collect
+its return value.
+glib-genmarshal takes a list of marshallers to generate as input. The marshaller list is either read from
+standard input or from files passed as additional arguments on the command line.
+Marshaller list format
+%
+smartctl - Control and Monitor Utility for SMART Disks
+smartctl [options] device
+other platforms.]
+smartctl controls the Self-Monitoring, Analysis and Reporting Technology (SMART) system built  into  most
+ATA/SATA  and SCSI/SAS hard drives and solid-state drives.  The purpose of SMART is to monitor the relia‐
+bility of the hard drive and predict drive failures, and to carry out  different  types  of  drive  self-
+smartctl also provides support for polling TapeAlert messages from SCSI tape drives and changers.
+%
+kproplog - display the contents of the Kerberos principal update log
+kproplog [-h] [-e num] [-v] kproplog [-R]
+The  kproplog command displays the contents of the KDC database update log to standard output.  It can be
+used to keep track of incremental updates to the principal database.  The update log  file  contains  the
+slave KDC servers.  When updates occur, they are logged to this file.  Subsequently any KDC slave config‐
+ured  for incremental updates will request the current data from the master KDC and update their log file
+with any updates returned.
+The kproplog command requires read access to the update log file.  It will display  update  entries  only
+for the KDC it runs on.
+If  no  options  are specified, kproplog displays a summary of the update log.  If invoked on the master,
+%
+xml-config - script to get information about the installed version of GNOME-XML
+xml-config [--prefix[=DIR]] [--libs] [--cflags] [--version] [--help]
+xml-config  is  a tool that is used to determine the compile and linker flags that should be used to com‐
+pile and link programs that use GNOME-XML.
+xml-config accepts the following options:
+--version
+Print the currently installed version of GNOME-XML on the standard output.
+--libs  Print the linker flags that are necessary to link a GNOME-XML program.
+%
+rdisc - network router discovery daemon
+rdisc [-abdfrstvV] [-p preference] [-T max_interval] [send_address] [receive_address]
+rdisc implements client side of the ICMP router discover protocol.  rdisc is invoked at boot time to pop‐
+ulate the network routing tables with default routes.
+for  ROUTER_ADVERTISE  messages  from  routers. The received messages are handled by first ignoring those
+listed router addresses with which the host does not share a network. Among the remaining  addresses  the
+ones  with  the  highest preference are selected as default routers and a default route is entered in the
+kernel routing table for each one of them.
+Optionally, rdisc can avoid waiting for routers to announce themselves by sending out a few ROUTER_SOLIC‐
+%
+ifnames - Extract CPP conditionals from a set of files
+ifnames [OPTION]... [FILE]...
+Scan  all of the C source FILES (or the standard input, if none are given) and write to the standard out‐
+put a sorted list of all the identifiers that appear in those  files  in  `#if',  `#elif',  `#ifdef',  or
+`#ifndef'  directives.   Print each identifier on a line, followed by a space-separated list of the files
+in which that identifier occurs.
+-h, --help
+print this help, then exit
+-V, --version
+print version number, then exit
+%
+showkey - examine the codes sent by the keyboard
+showkey [-h|--help] [-a|--ascii] [-s|--scancodes] [-k|--keycodes]
+showkey  prints  to  standard output either the scan codes or the keycode or the `ascii' code of each key
+or release event, or until it receives a suitable signal, like SIGTERM, from another process.  In `ascii'
+mode the program terminates when the user types ^D.
+When in scancode dump mode, showkey prints in hexadecimal format each byte received from the keyboard  to
+sequences  the  keyboard  sends  at  once  on  a given key press. The scan code dumping mode is primarily
+intended for debugging the keyboard driver or other low level interfaces. As such it shouldn't be of much
+interest  to the regular end-user. However, some modern keyboards have keys or buttons that produce scan‐
+%
+systemd-detect-virt - Detect execution in a virtualized environment
+systemd-detect-virt detects execution in a virtualized environment. It identifies the virtualization
+technology and can distinguish full machine virtualization from container virtualization.
+systemd-detect-virt exits with a return value of 0 (success) if a virtualization technology is detected,
+and non-zero (error) otherwise. By default, any type of virtualization is detected, and the options
+--container and --vm can be used to limit what types of virtualization are detected.
+When executed without --quiet will print a short identifier for the detected virtualization technology.
+The following technologies are currently identified:
+i.e. shared kernel virtualization)
+%
+ls - list directory contents
+ls [OPTION]... [FILE]...
+List information about the FILEs (the current directory by default).  Sort entries alphabetically if none
+of -cftuvSUX nor --sort is specified.
+Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
+-a, --all
+do not ignore entries starting with .
+-A, --almost-all
+do not list implied . and ..
+%
+gpgparsemail - Parse a mail message into an annotated format
+gpgparsemail [options] [file]
+The gpgparsemail is a utility currently only useful for debugging.  Run it with --help for usage informa‐
+tion.
+%
+unix_update [...]
+unix_update is a helper program for the pam_unix module that updates the password of a given user. It is
+not intended to be run directly from the command line and logs a security violation if done so.
+The purpose of the helper is to enable tighter confinement of login and password changing services. The
+helper is thus called only when SELinux is enabled on the system.
+The interface of the helper - command line options, and input/output data format are internal to the
+pam_unix module and it should not be called directly from applications.
+%
+applygnupgdefaults - Run gpgconf --apply-defaults for all users.
+applygnupgdefaults
+with an existing GnuPG home directory.  Admins might want to use this script to update he GnuPG  configu‐
+applygnupgdefaults is invoked by root as:
+applygnupgdefaults
+%
+libnetcfg - configure libnet
+standard Perl distribution, but the libnetcfg can be used for any libnet installation.
+Without arguments libnetcfg displays the current configuration.
+$ libnetcfg
+# old config ./libnet.cfg
+ftp_int_passive      0
+ftp_testhost         ftp.funet.fi
+inet_domain          none.such
+nntp_hosts           nntp.none.such
+ph_hosts
+%
+--infile=<name> --outfile=<name>
+--podpath=<name>:...:<name> --podroot=<name>
+--cachedir=<name> --flush --recurse --norecurse
+--quiet --noquiet --verbose --noverbose
+--index --noindex --backlink --nobacklink
+--header --noheader --poderrors --nopoderrors
+--css=<URL> --title=<name>
+Converts files from pod format (see perlpod) to HTML format.
+%
+podchecker - check the syntax of POD format documentation files
+podchecker [-help] [-man] [-(no)warnings] [file ...]
+-help   Print a brief help message and exit.
+-man    Print the manual page and exit.
+-warnings -nowarnings
+Turn on/off printing of warnings. Repeating -warnings increases the warning level, i.e. more
+warnings are printed. Currently increasing to level two causes flagging of unescaped "<,>"
+characters.
+file    The pathname of a POD file to syntax-check (defaults to standard input).
+%
+piconv [-f from_encoding] [-t to_encoding]
+[-p|--perlqq|--htmlcref|--xmlcref] [-C N|-c] [-D] [-S scheme]
+[-s string|file...]
+piconv -l
+piconv -r encoding_alias
+piconv -h
+piconv is perl version of iconv, a character encoding converter widely available for various Unixen
+piconv converts the character encoding of either STDIN or files specified in the argument and prints out
+to STDOUT.
+%
+encguess - guess character encodings of files
+encguess [switches] filename...
+SWITCHES
+-h
+show this message and exit.
+-s
+specify a list of "suspect encoding types" to test, seperated by either ":" or ","
+-S
+output a list of all acceptable encoding types that can be used with the -s param
+%
+[--fixed=font] [--fixedbold=font] [--fixeditalic=font]
+[--fixedbolditalic=font] [--name=name] [--nourls]
+[--official] [--quotes=quotes] [--release=version]
+[input [output] ...]
+%
+ptardiff - program that diffs an extracted archive against an unextracted one
+ptardiff is a small program that diffs an extracted archive
+against an unextracted one, using the perl module Archive::Tar.
+Provide the progam with an ARCHIVE_FILE and it will look up all
+the files with in the archive, scan the current working directory
+for a file with the name and diff it against the contents of the
+archive.
+ptardiff ARCHIVE_FILE
+ptardiff -h
+%
+perlbug - how to submit bug reports on Perl
+perlbug
+perlbug [ -v ] [ -a address ] [ -s subject ] [ -b body | -f inputfile ] [ -F outputfile ]
+[ -r returnaddress ] [ -e editor ] [ -c adminaddress | -C ] [ -S ] [ -t ]  [ -d ]  [ -A ]  [ -h ] [ -T ]
+perlbug [ -v ] [ -r returnaddress ]
+[ -A ] [ -ok | -okay | -nok | -nokay ]
+perlthanks
+the modules which ship with it.
+%
+Tcl Encoding Files (.enc).  Besides being used internally during the build process of the Encode module,
+Quick Guide
+If you want to know as little about Perl as possible but need to add a new encoding, just read this
+chapter and forget the rest.
+0.  Have a .ucm file ready.  You can get it from somewhere or you can write your own from scratch or you
+%
+cpan - easily interact with CPAN from the command line
+# with arguments and no switches, installs specified modules
+cpan module_name [ module_name ... ]
+# with switches, installs modules with extra behavior
+cpan [-cfgimtTw] module_name [ module_name ... ]
+# with just the dot, install from the distribution in the
+# current directory
+cpan .
+# without arguments, starts CPAN.pm shell
+cpan
+# force install modules (usually those that fail tests)
+%
+[-q quotes] [--nourls] [--stderr] [-w width]
+[input [output ...]]
+from POD source.  It can optionally use either termcap sequences or ANSI color escape sequences to format
+the text.
+input is the file to read for POD source (the POD can be embedded in code).  If input isn't given, it
+defaults to "STDIN".  output, if given, is the file to which to write the formatted output.  If output
+isn't given, the formatted output is written to "STDOUT".  Several POD files can be processed in the same
+%
+-help   Print a brief help message and exit.
+-man    Print this command's manual page and exit.
+-exit exitval
+The exit status value to return.
+-output outfile
+%
+prove - Run tests through a TAP harness.
+prove [options] [files or directories]
+Boolean options:
+-v,  --verbose         Print all test lines.
+-l,  --lib             Add 'lib' to the path for your tests (-Ilib).
+-b,  --blib            Add 'blib/lib' and 'blib/arch' to the path for
+your tests
+-s,  --shuffle         Run the tests in random order.
+-c,  --color           Colored test output (default).
+--nocolor         Do not color test output.
+--count           Show the X/Y test count when not verbose
+(default)
+%
+easily run while in /usr/include:
+or
+or
+%
+diagnostics, splain - produce verbose warning diagnostics
+Using the "diagnostics" pragma:
+use diagnostics;
+use diagnostics -verbose;
+enable  diagnostics;
+disable diagnostics;
+Using the "splain" standalone filter program:
+splain [-v] [-p] diag.out
+Using diagnostics to get stack traces from a misbehaving script:
+%
+ptar - a tar-like program written in perl
+ptar is a small, tar look-alike program that uses the perl module
+Archive::Tar to extract, create and list tar archives.
+ptar -c [-v] [-z] [-C] [-f ARCHIVE_FILE | -] FILE FILE ...
+ptar -c [-v] [-z] [-C] [-T index | -] [-f ARCHIVE_FILE | -]
+ptar -x [-v] [-z] [-f ARCHIVE_FILE | -]
+ptar -t [-z] [-f ARCHIVE_FILE | -]
+ptar -h
+c   Create ARCHIVE_FILE or STDOUT (-) from FILE
+x   Extract from ARCHIVE_FILE or STDIN (-)
+t   List the contents of ARCHIVE_FILE or STDIN (-)
+%
+podselect - print selected sections of pod documentation on standard output
+podselect [-help] [-man] [-section section-spec] [file ...]
+-help   Print a brief help message and exit.
+-man    Print the manual page and exit.
+-section section-spec
+Specify a section to include in the output.  See "SECTION SPECIFICATIONS" in Pod::Parser for the
+file    The pathname of a file from which to select sections of pod documentation (defaults to standard
+input).
+%
+shasum - Print or Check SHA Checksums
+Print or check SHA checksums.
+With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.
+-b, --binary      read in binary mode
+-c, --check       read SHA sums from the FILEs and check them
+-t, --text        read in text mode (default)
+-U, --UNIVERSAL   read in Universal Newlines mode
+produces same digest on Windows/Unix/Mac
+ASCII '0' interpreted as 0-bit,
+all other characters ignored
+%
+json_pp - JSON::PP command utility
+json_pp [-v] [-f from_format] [-t to_format] [-json_opt options_to_json]
+from json_xs and modified.
+The default input format is json and the default output format is json with pretty option.
+-f
+-f from_format
+Reads a data in the given format from STDIN.
+%
+perlbug - how to submit bug reports on Perl
+perlbug
+perlbug [ -v ] [ -a address ] [ -s subject ] [ -b body | -f inputfile ] [ -F outputfile ]
+[ -r returnaddress ] [ -e editor ] [ -c adminaddress | -C ] [ -S ] [ -t ]  [ -d ]  [ -A ]  [ -h ] [ -T ]
+perlbug [ -v ] [ -r returnaddress ]
+[ -A ] [ -ok | -okay | -nok | -nokay ]
+perlthanks
+the modules which ship with it.
+%
+Usually, your old .pl file will still work fine and you should only use this tool if you plan to update
+LIMITATIONS
+It's just a first step, but it's usually a good first step.
+Larry Wall <larry@wall.org>
+%
+perldoc - Look up Perl documentation in Pod format.
+perldoc [-h] [-D] [-t] [-u] [-m] [-l] [-F]
+[-i] [-V] [-T] [-r]
+[-d destination_file]
+[-o formatname]
+[-w formatteroption:value]
+[-n nroff-replacement]
+[-X]
+[-L language_code]
+Examples:
+perldoc -f BuiltinFunction
+%
+corelist - a commandline frontend to Module::CoreList
+See Module::CoreList for one.
+corelist -v
+corelist [-r <PerlVersion>] ...
+corelist --diff PerlVersion PerlVersion
+the perls Module::CoreList knows about.
+%
+ptargrep - Apply pattern matching to the contents of files in a tar archive
+ptargrep [options] <pattern> <tar file> ...
+Options:
+--basename|-b     ignore directory paths from archive
+--list-only|-l    list matching filenames rather than extracting matches
+--verbose|-v      write debugging message to STDERR
+--help|-?         detailed help message
+You might use this to identify all files in an archive which contain lines matching the specified pattern
+and either print out the pathnames or extract the files.
+%
+xsubpp - compiler to convert Perl XS code into C code
+xsubpp [-v] [-except] [-s pattern] [-prototypes] [-noversioncheck] [-nolinenumbers] [-nooptimize]
+[-typemap typemap] [-output filename]... file.xs
+other Perl module build tools.
+xsubpp will compile XS code into C code by embedding the constructs necessary to let C functions
+manipulate Perl values and creates the glue necessary to let Perl access those functions.  The compiler
+uses typemaps to determine how to map C function parameters and variables to Perl values.
+The compiler will search for typemap files called typemap.  It will use the following search path to find
+default typemaps, with the rightmost typemap taking precedence.
+%
+Options:
+-n  do not generate perl code  (default when invoked as pstruct)
+-v  generate perl code, with C decls as comments
+-i  do NOT recompute sizes for intrinsic datatypes
+%
+to retrieve the value of any #define statement which was in the C header files.
+The module_name will be used for the name of the extension.  If module_name is not supplied then the name
+of the first header file will be used, with the first character capitalized.
+If the extension might need extra libraries, they should be included here.  The extension Makefile.PL
+will take care of checking whether the libraries actually exist and how they should be loaded.  The extra
+libraries should be specified in the form -lm -lposix, etc, just as on the cc command line.  By default,
+%
+perlivp - Perl Installation Verification Procedure
+perlivp [-p] [-v] [-h]
+The perlivp program is set up at Perl source code build time to test the Perl version it was built under.
+It can be used after running:
+make install
+(or your platform's equivalent procedure) to verify that perl and its libraries have been installed
+correctly.  A correct installation is verified by output that looks like:
+%
+Options:
+-n  do not generate perl code  (default when invoked as pstruct)
+-v  generate perl code, with C decls as comments
+-i  do NOT recompute sizes for intrinsic datatypes
+%
+instmodsh - A shell to examine installed modules
+instmodsh
+A little interface to ExtUtils::Installed to examine installed modules, validate your packlists and even
+create a tarball from an installed module.
+ExtUtils::Installed
+%
+zipdetails - display the internal structure of zip files
+zipdetaile [-v] zipfile.zip
+zipdetails -h
+Zipdetails displays information about the internal record structure of the zip file. It is not concerned
+with displaying any details of the compressed data stored in the zip file.
+The program assumes prior understanding of the internal structure of a Zip file. You should have a copy
+-v   Enable Verbose mode
+-h   Display help
+%